Generated by All in One SEO Pro v5.0.1.1, this is an llms-full.txt file, used by LLMs to index the site. # One Stone Creative Podcasts for Your Business ## Posts ### [How to Build Your Framework Into Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-build-your-framework-into-your-podcast/) **Published:** July 29, 2026 **Author:** Megan **Content:** # How to Build Your Framework Into Your Podcast With Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast Spotlight If you have a proprietary method, framework or system, it should be the bedrock of your podcast to build your thought leadership and educate your community. ## Your Framework is Your Thought Leadership When you have a proprietary methodology, it should be everywhere in your business. Especially in your podcast. You can do it by categorizing your episodes along the lines of your system, integrating your vocabulary into the conversations you have with guests, and presenting your finished episodes in a way that lets people at different parts of the process access what is relevant to them easily. Whether you have a solo show, conduct interview or something else, when you have spent the time and effort to create a system that helps your clients and community succeed, your podcast should be a place where people can learn about it. Paul Pape is the host of [Tavern Tales](https://gamifybusiness.com/podcast-hub), a new show designed to help him build a community and share the system he has created with Gamify Business. What system you ask? Why a class system with wizards, warriors, rangers and more to help creatives learna nd apply the business strategy they need without crawling up the walls. I am SO into it. He joined me on the Business Podcast Spotlight to talk about his business, and how his podcast can help him share this novel method of business coaching and consulting with more people. ## About Paul Pape ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2026/07/PaulPapeHeadshot.webp "PaulPapeHeadshot") Business is an Adventure, so don’t be an NPC. Paul Pape is a TEDx speaker, author, and business consultant for creative entrepreneurs with 30+ years int he arts. Paul is the creator of Gamify Business and author of five books, the most recent of which is The Bard’s Guide to Storycraft. His approach uses gaming frameworks and RPG mechanics to help artists, designers, makers, and creative entrepreneurs build profitable businesses without selling out to corporate business culture. His mission is clear: destroy the starving artist mindset. Paul proves that creative entrepreneurs don’t have to choose between artistic integrity and real profit—and that the business side of creativity can be just as innovative and fulfilling as the art itself. You can connect with Paul on [Youtube](https://www.youtube.com/paulpapedesigns), [Facebook](https://www.facebook.com/paulpapedesigns), [LinkedIn](https://www.linkedin.com/in/paulericpape), [Instagram](https://www.instagram.com/paulpapedesigns/) or [TikTok](https://www.tiktok.com/@paulpapede)! ### Listen to How to Build your Framework into Your Podcast: Subscribe on [Apple Podcasts](https://podcasts.apple.com/ca/podcast/the-business-podcast-spotlight/id1801282981), [Spotify](https://open.spotify.com/show/0t8M5xTxALwoGe8sues7kw), your [your favorite other podcast player](https://pod.link/1801282981)! ## Why Build Your Framework Into Your Podcast at All? Lots of business owners have a framework or model they use to serve their clients. Paul has his Class System ([Take the quiz here to find yours](https://gamifybusiness.com/#quiz)!), [Angela Foster on our last episode had the SPARK Method](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-get-new-clients-from-your-podcast/), I have the [Business Podcast Blueprints](https://onestonecreative.net/business-podcast-blueprints) – these framworks help us differentiate the servies we provide and help our audiences and communities more effectively. But that can take a lot of education. No one starts out knowing they’re an artificer, or that the type of podcast they need is a Relationship Building one with a dash of Audience Building. They know problems they have the outcomes they want – so if you want to speak the same language as your clients, you need to share it with them. Your podcast is the perfect way to do that. You can structure your episodes to use your own vocabulary, and talk about your topic area the way YOU understand it. This does a couple of things: - It familiarizes your guests, if you have them, with your model and your langage – this makes it easier for them to talk about. Similarly, it keeps your methodolgy top of mind with your listeners. - It creates a library of examples and demonstrations of your framework in action -you can use these in your sales process, and on your social media platforms. - It lets you continue refining your model and how it can be applied in different situations – the more people you talk about it with, and the more situations you apply it to, the more robust it will become. - It lets your interview guests and build relationships while also enforcing your thought leadership. Your guest is the expert on their area of expertise, but the way you’re going to be talking about it is guided by your proprietary model – for at least part of the conversation! ## Business Podcast Blueprints Analysis What I love about building a podcast that centers your framework is that it’s a way to get your Thought Leadership along with your Relationship Building. Often, it can be challenging to do both. A Relationship Building podcast generally focuses on the guest and their expertise, and a Thought Leadership one centers yours. When you integrate your theory, methods and vocabulary int the show, however, you can, essentially, have it all. In any relationship Building podcast, you are going to have a guest workflow that inclues an intake form. This is your chance to have them take your assessment if you have one. The trick here is making sure that it isn’t too extensive. If it takes 5 minutes or less, it’s a totally reasonable ask, and you’ll want to frame it in terms of “we’re going to be talking about THE FRAMEWORK, so I’d like to make sure you have the context for it.” If you don’t have an assessment, or your asessment is too long, then you can include some information in your episode prep email. Something like “When we talk, I’ll be referring to the Widget Mastery System – particularly the ‘Widget Communications Methods’ step, where your expertise really comes into play. I’ve attached a little information about it for you below! Our audience is used to hearing things discussed this way, so I want to make sure you’re prepared.” It’s all about being friendly and helpful while making sure you’re controlling how information is presented. [![Image of the book Podcasting for Business: How to Create a Show That Makes a Bottom-Line Difference for Your Company with the headline: A Step-by-Step guide to profitable podcasting.](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/A-Step-By-Step-Guide.jpg "A-Step-By-Step-Guide")](https://podcastingforbusiness.com) [Get a Free Copy of Podcasting for Business!](https://podcastingforbusiness.com) ## Other Ways to Optimize For Your Framework While you want to make sure you are getting your methodology out there, you don’t want to be shoehorning it in awkwardly. It doesn’t always make sense to have an entire episode be in your vocabulary or focused really narrowly on what you teach. Here are a few other ways to build your framework into your podcast that take a slightly less ‘front an center’ position. ### Reframing Using your Terminology There’s also nothing wrong with repeating or rephrasing an excellent point your guest makes using your own vocabulary so that your audience will understand it more easily. ### Structure the Delivery of Your Episodes You can create different categories on your website for the different elements of your framwork. (Check out [Paul’s podcast page](https://gamifybusiness.com/podcast-hub) – he as added a category for each Class type, so listeners can binge all of the episodes about their own! So cool.) You can also add specific epsiodes into your email and nurturing sequences, on different sales and informational pages, and anywhere else people are looking for information related to what you do and how you do it. ## Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. ## Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet - and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you're ready to launch or level up your show, let's talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) ### Keep Learning: [![How to get 3-4 New Clients a Week From Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2026/07/How-to-get-new-clients-from-your-podcast-feature-400x250.webp)](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-get-new-clients-from-your-podcast/) ## [How to get 3-4 New Clients a Week From Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-get-new-clients-from-your-podcast/) How to New Clients From Your PodcastWith Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast SpotlightNot every show can turn listeners... **Categories:** Blog, Podcast --- ### [How to get 3-4 New Clients a Week From Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-get-new-clients-from-your-podcast/) **Published:** July 9, 2026 **Author:** Megan **Content:** # How to New Clients From Your Podcast With Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast Spotlight Not every show can turn listeners into clients- but with the right audience, the right offer and the right content – it can happen. ## Can you really get new clients from your podcast? Yes. But. It’s pretty much the dream for a business owner starting a podcast – but not every show can manage to create that direct line between listeners and new clients – you need the right mix of expertise, audience, content and offer. Angela Foster is the host of the [Inside Petite Style podcast](https://open.spotify.com/show/7slkrPsW5JJz0rmODAEle5), and when she started her show, after just a few month she found she was gaining 3-4 new clients a week from listeners. I asked her to join me on the Business Podcast Spotlight to talk about how she came to be getting that result – and how to scale it up even more. ## About Angela Foster ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2026/07/AngelaFosterHeadshot.webp "AngelaFosterHeadshot") After 20 years as an executive in the fashion and beauty industry, [Angela Foster](https://www.linkedin.com/in/angelastylecoach/) now helps high-achieving women feel more confident by creating closets they love—ones that truly represent both their personal style and professional brand. Through her signature [S.P.A.R.K. Style Method,](https://angelastylecoach.com/) Angela’s clients show up feeling prepared and confident whether they’re heading to brand photoshoots, delivering keynote presentations, or simply navigating everyday life. They love their wardrobes because every piece fits their height, flatters their body, and reflects who they are. ### Listen to How to Get New Clients From Your Podcast: Subscribe on [Apple Podcasts](https://podcasts.apple.com/ca/podcast/the-business-podcast-spotlight/id1801282981), [Spotify](https://open.spotify.com/show/0t8M5xTxALwoGe8sues7kw), your [your favorite other podcast player](https://pod.link/1801282981)! ## Creating the Conditions to Gain Clients from your Episodes When it comes to podcasting for Business, Angela has done an incredible job. Started a show, put in some time and got her sea legs, and began getting clients – 3 or 4 a week! That is exactly the outcome we all hope to get when we start a show, but not every entrepreneur who starts a show sees that result right away. There are a few things that made Angela’s business and show poised to see that kind of outcome, Looking at her business, she was already **known as an expert in her space**, and offers a **personal and emotionally significant service** – the kind that requires a lot of **trust** for people to buy in. On her podcast, she answers the kinds of **specific questions** she KNOWS her audience is searching for, and the podcast served to give the kind of insight and information she would otherise be providing in other mediums. After having listened to her show, listeners they feel they **know her and trust her** well enough to take the leap into becoming a client. Something that also helps with that is that she has an **easy to find and buy entry-level offer**. New clients aren’t jumping to the very highest tier for the most part, they’re starting with a single paid consultation, it’s an easy, low-risk way to get personal advice from someone who already helped them. That’s a big takeaway here: if you want clients directly from your listening audience, it needs to be a *logical next step from listening in terms of price and ease of access.* This means makng sure you are creating content that matches the listener’s intent when they are searching for information. Finding a specific type of clothing at a specific moment in time is a great example of intent-based content creation. That is a problem someone wants SOLVED at the time they go looking for information. Think about your own services and offers and the specific ‘triggers’ that will cause someone to take action to try and solve the problem – if you’re not sure, ask your current clients, check your inbox for your past inquiries and what they included, and spend some time browsing social media to see what people are specifically asing about (ideally, right before they make a purchase of some kind, if you’re able to determine it!) There also need to be enough people listening that a certain percentage of them will reliably take action, of course. Angela started with a good-sized following on social media and email -these are people who were already aware of her expertise and adding a new media format provided a new way to seal the deal, as it were. If you are starting with little to no audience it will probably take longer and a lot of active audience building work to see results. ## Business Podcast Blueprints Analysis According to the [Business Podcast Blueprints](https://onestonecreative.net/business-podcast-blueprints/), a show that is a direct listener-to-client pipeline is an Audience Engagement show. It does the work connecting with, educating and nurturing people that you would otherwise do manually or through other kinds of content. It’s also important to note that this will almost always be a solo show, rather than an interview one. While interviews are the most popular podcast format (and critical for Relationship Building!) if you want to build the kind of knowing, liking and trusting that leads to sales you need to give your audience lots of time hearing *you* talk. This is especially true when you’re creating content that addresses high-intent topics that people are looking for when they’re in the mood to buy. For this type of podcast, you’re also probably going to want to avoid sponsors – you want your listeners to engage with you after they listen – not anyone else. High quality show notes or even edited transcrpts are a good idea as well – because your goal is to speak directly to high-intent topics your audience is interested in, we don’t really care if someone reads, listens or watches – as long as they do it, and then take action! [![Image of the book Podcasting for Business: How to Create a Show That Makes a Bottom-Line Difference for Your Company with the headline: A Step-by-Step guide to profitable podcasting.](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/A-Step-By-Step-Guide.jpg "A-Step-By-Step-Guide")](https://podcastingforbusiness.com) [Get a Free Copy of Podcasting for Business!](https://podcastingforbusiness.com) ## Scaling Up Your Success Once you’ve got your high-intent, problem solving episodes, and an easy, low-cost starter offer that people can book right away, and enough listeners and conversions to start assembling some data, then its a matter of optimizing. Most likely, you are going to need to do some trial and error to get things running perectly, so here’s what you should look at: How many episodes on a specific topic do people listen to before they take the next step? Ask your current clients, then try to record enough episodes on your highest value topics. Where did your clients, the ones who signed up after listening, they first hear about the show? Promotion can be an endless time-scuk, so If there are clear patterns like most people heard from LinkedIn, or word of mouth? Focus your promotions there. How are your episodes organized on your website? Is it easy for someone to listen to multiple shows on the sapce topic? Create category pages or specific playlists on single issues. This is not the easiest podcast strategy, but if you can crack this particular nut, you’ll be in a very enviable category of podcasters! If you’d like a little support, check out our [business podcast production services](https://onestonecreative.net/business-podcast-production-services/) – especially a solo audio show. It can be a great addition to your marketing, and the benefits compound exponentially over time. ## Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. ## Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet - and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you're ready to launch or level up your show, let's talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) ### Keep Learning: [![How to Build Your Framework Into Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2026/07/BPS030_Paul-Pape_featureimage-400x250.webp)](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-build-your-framework-into-your-podcast/) ## [How to Build Your Framework Into Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-build-your-framework-into-your-podcast/) How to Build Your Framework Into Your PodcastWith Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast SpotlightIf you have a... **Categories:** Podcast --- ### [How to Host a Panel Discussion On Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-host-a-panel-discussion-on-your-podcast/) **Published:** June 16, 2026 **Author:** Megan **Excerpt:** If you want to grow your business through relationship building on your podcast, then panel discussions should be on your radar. **Content:** # How to Host a Panel Discussion on Your Podcast With Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast Spotlight The most important factor in a successful panel discussion is *planning*. You need a repeatable structure that creates balance between the speakers and keeps the conversation flowing. ## What is a Panel Discussion and Why Might You Want One? A panel discussion is where multiple guests join the host for a dicsussion where they will each share their perspective on the topic. Often these are done live – you’ve probably seen them at conferences – but they can be a podcasting strategy, too. There are a few times you might want to consider a panel discussion on your podcast. Among other things, if you have a guest waitlist so long you can’t see the end, or you want to absolutely speedrun your relationship building, it can be a good strategy. It’s also a great way to learn from many people at once (for you and your audience!), and gives you the opportunity to connect your guests with eachother. It comes with some challenges, however: more people equals more scheduling conflicts, more sharing assets, and more follow-up, and a very different skillset than hosting one guest at a time. You want to make sure that each of your panelists has a chance to speak, and that the cadence is a little more engaging than 1 question, 3 answers, repeat – that gets old fast. You also want to make sure that people aren’t interrupting eachother, repeating eachother or generally creating (well-intentioned!) chaos. All of this requires plenty of planning and a good amount of practice. Robbie Samuels is the host of the [Biz Book Pub Hub Podcast](https://robbiesamuels.com/hubpodcast/) which is 100% panel discussions. (Twice a week panel discussions!) I asked him to join me on the Business Podcast Spotlight to talk about how he manages these conversations, and he shared a *masterclass* in exactly how to do it well. ## About Robbie Samuels ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2026/06/Robbie-Samuels.webp "Robbie Samuels") [Robbie Samuels](https://robbiesamuels.com) is an award-winning author, book launch strategist, and business development coach. His latest book is “LAUNCH Your Book! An Entrepreneur’s Guide to Reviews That Drive Revenue,” and his four books have received over 900 reviews and reached #1 Best Seller in 37 categories. Based on the success of his book launches, Robbie became sought out for his insight. He coaches entrepreneurs to build book launch teams that lead to 50+ Amazon reviews and create a pipeline from the book to their business. You can check out his author services at [Book Launch Brainstorm](http://www.booklaunchbrainstorm.com/) and his resource ecosystem for entrepreneurs at [Biz Book Pub Hub.](http://www.bizbookpubhub.com/) Listen to our full conversation below, or check it out on the podcast player you like best, then read on to learn more about hosting an effective panel discussion on your podcast, and how it can help you grow your business. ### Listen to How to Host a Panel Discussion on Your Podcast: Subscribe on [Apple Podcasts](https://podcasts.apple.com/ca/podcast/the-business-podcast-spotlight/id1801282981), [Spotify](https://open.spotify.com/show/0t8M5xTxALwoGe8sues7kw), your [your favorite other podcast player](https://pod.link/1801282981)! ## How to Host a Panel Discussion on Your Podcast I want to review some of the specific strategies that Robbie recommends for hosting an effective panel discussion: **Before the call:** - Plan exactly how the call is going to go in advance. Make sure to include time for introductions, questions, follow-ups and closing. (Listen to the episode for the timings he recommends specifically!) - Give each panelist a primary question, that you pre-assign so you know who is going to be speaking when. - Help your panelists understand how to get your attention if they have somethng to say, for example by leaning forward. This is subtle enough it won’t interrupt the flow of conversation, and clear enough you’ll be able to see it as the moderator. **During the Call:** - When you have follow-ups or audience questions, let the speaker know you’re about to ask them a question by saying something like “Jane, here’s a question for you” or “I’m going to get Jane to answer, the Billy,” then ask the question. This gives your panelists a chance to lock in, pay attention and know they are going to be called on. - Remember that not everyone needs to answer every question! You can decide who is going to be the best one to answer, and can make sure that you’re creating a balance between the speakers. Variety in the number of answers for each question also keeps the flow of the discussion interesting. - You want everyone to look good! You can teach and share your own knowledge during your panel moderation, but make sure you are highlighting wehre your guests are doing a great job, and if you have advice or insight, let them absorb it indirectly by what you ask others rather than through a more direct, live coaching strategy. This is a skill that, like most others, takes practice to really master, but if you put in that time, there are some really interesting ways you can work panel dicussions into your podcasting strategy. ## When a Panel Discussion Works Best Now let’s talk about when a panel discussion podcast makes strategic sense. If you are aggressively trying to build your network, panel discussions will get you talking to more people more quickly, and that can pay big dividends. But remember: hosting someone on a podcast, whether alone or as part of a panel, is just one of the many, many steps involved in creating the kind of relationship that leads to sales, referrals and opportunities. For a real relationship to develop you need to invest time in the prep, and follow-up exactly the way you would if you were talking to one person at a time. Triple the networking equals almost triple the work. You will save a little time on recording and post-production, however. If you have a membership or community, then, like Robbie, a spot on a panel can be an awesome perk that you offer to your members. (It can even be a paid one if you have a large enough audience!) Most entrepreneurs and experts are looking for oportunities for more exposure, and providing a platform for them to share their knowledge is valuable. It can also be a lovely thing to do if your community is largely composed of people who don’t have much media experience, but want to change that! Jill Lublin talked about this strategy in [Three Unique Podcast Strategies](https://onestonecreative.net/three-unique-podcast-strategies/)! Hosting a panel discussion also gives you the opportunity to learn from more people and share more viewpoints than you might be able to otherwise. Many people use their podcast as an educational and professional development tool, so having more experts weigh in can help you acquire more information more quickly. This means you can level up your own skills quickly, and it positions you to your audience as the source of insight, strategy and ideas from a wide variety of experts. Looking super well-connected doesn’t hurt either. Finally, panel dicsussions provide the material for some pretty exciting repurposing. Round-up posts of experts answering the same or related questions are great to share, and contributors are often willing to do so. You want to be careful not to let your episode get repetitive and have everyone answering every question, but having one or two that you get every guest to answer, like “what is your single best strategy for X?” or “what is your favorite book on Y?” is amazing content for round-up posts. And if you get them to refer to other people, like podcasters, or authors, you have even MORE people to network with, and a great reason to reach out. ## Business Podcast Blueprints Analysis Looking at Panel Discussions in the context of the [Business Podcast Blueprints](https://onestonecreative.net/business-podcast-blueprints/), we can see they are primarily a Relationship Building Strategy, with a strong Audience Engagement element. Relationship Building really speaks for itself here. More guests = more relationships. You can strategically invite people you’d like to have in your professional network to be panelists, and if you do all of the prep and follow-up steps critical for relationship building (high-quality assets, demonstration of your own expertise, real consistent follow up and directly asking for the next step you are looking for) you can build your network quickly. A panel could be effective either as an ongoing podcast, or in a season if you wanted to batch the addtional work. You also have the option to alternate panel discussions with easier to produce ones. (Learn more: [Can you have differen episode types in one podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/can-you-use-different-episode-types-in-one-podcast/)) The Audience Engagement comes in when and if you source the questions, topics or even guests from your audience – this is a great way to increase your engagement and be directly responsive to what your community needs from you. Wherever you are trying to engage your audience – social media, email, in person events etc – are where you can be sourcing questions and topics. Make sure to note who asks what and tag them when you have the answers! [![Image of the book Podcasting for Business: How to Create a Show That Makes a Bottom-Line Difference for Your Company with the headline: A Step-by-Step guide to profitable podcasting.](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/A-Step-By-Step-Guide.jpg "A-Step-By-Step-Guide")](https://podcastingforbusiness.com) [Get a Free Copy of Podcasting for Business!](https://podcastingforbusiness.com) Looking at the 2025 [State of Business Podcasting Report](https://onestonecreative.net/report), we can see that only 3% of the top 100 Business Podcasts are always or usually panel discussions, which is, in my opinion, indicative of the extra work involved. A panel discussion is distinct from a co-host conversation in that you as the host will be moderating and guiding more than participating in the disucssion. (Learn more about [different episode types](https://onestonecreative.net/what-are-some-different-podcast-episode-types/).) Importantly, this means it is usually NOT a Thought Leadership strategy when it’s your only episode type. ## Should A Panel Discussion For Your Podcast be Live or Pre-Recorded? Traditionally, panel discussions have been live events, and many podcasts that use them as one of their episode types livestream them like Robbie does with the Biz Book Pub Hub. There are some benefits to doing them live – there is great energy when the audience can participate directly, and it can help raise your profile and gain followers on the platforms you are streaming on. There are drawbacks, however. Doing it live means you’re going to be dealing with whatever happens in terms of how your guests and audience act, and the audio-visual quality on linvestreams is typically lower than it will be when you’re recording in advance in a proper virtual studio. This might affect the quality of the content you have to repurpose. Ultimately, it’s up to you – there are good reasons to record in each way! If you’re looking for a partner to help you figure out and deploy a strategy that will work for your business, we can help! [Book a Podcast Strategy call](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/), and let’s talk about it! ## Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. ## Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet - and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you're ready to launch or level up your show, let's talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) ### Keep Learning: [![How to Build Your Framework Into Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2026/07/BPS030_Paul-Pape_featureimage-400x250.webp)](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-build-your-framework-into-your-podcast/) ## [How to Build Your Framework Into Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-build-your-framework-into-your-podcast/) How to Build Your Framework Into Your PodcastWith Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast SpotlightIf you have a... **Categories:** Blog, Podcast --- ### [How to Maximize the Value of Your Podcast Archive with Racheal Cook](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-maximize-your-podcast-archive/) **Published:** June 26, 2025 **Author:** Darla Fields **Content:** # How to Maximize the Value of Your Podcast Archive with Racheal Cook With Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast Spotlight A massive archive of podcast content can either feel like an incredible resource or a logistical nightmare. The difference? Strategy and organization. # Listen to the Episode Now: Subscribe on [Apple Podcasts](https://podcasts.apple.com/ca/podcast/the-business-podcast-spotlight/id1801282981), [Spotify](https://open.spotify.com/show/0t8M5xTxALwoGe8sues7kw), your [your favorite other podcast player](https://pod.link/1801282981)! ## Content Strategy, Evergreen Assets, and Podcasting as a Business Tool – with Racheal Cook A massive archive of podcast content can either feel like an incredible resource or a logistical nightmare. The difference? Strategy and organization. In this episode of *The Business Podcast Spotlight*, we are replaying one of my favorite episodes, as the show is currently on summer hiatus. In this conversation, I’m joined by Racheal Cook – business strategist, founder of [The CEO Collective](https://theceocollective.com/), and host of [Promote Yourself to CEO](https://theceocollective.com/podcast) – who shares how to turn your content into a joy-filled, business-driving machine. We’re talking all about repurposing and reusing old content to give it new life. It’s almost like podcasting inception, considering that’s exactly what we’re doing here at *The Business Podcast Spotlight –* replaying our favorites during the break! You could think of this episode as the theory, and the fact that you’re listening to it? That’s the practice. ## Why Content Strategy Matters Racheal walks us through her approach to content creation and reuse, rooted in understanding the customer journey. Whether it’s mapping your Business Podcast Blueprint or planning an editorial calendar, Racheal shows how every piece of content should have a purpose – whether that’s nurturing your audience, building thought leadership, or supporting sales. She shares her method of running an annual content audit, tracking what’s already out there, and making intentional decisions about what to create next. With a central content spreadsheet (aka your podcast’s “brain”), you can repurpose smartly and identify gaps without reinventing the wheel. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/BPS013_Quote-Card_Racheal-Cook-scaled.jpg "BPS013_Quote Card_Racheal Cook") ### From Burnout to the CEO Collective Racheal’s journey began after leaving a high-pressure consulting role that led to burnout and serious health challenges. A conversation on a yoga mat led her to start helping small, owner-led businesses, eventually launching her first brand, The Yogipreneur. From there, her business evolved into The CEO Collective, as she expanded her message beyond the yoga world. Her early podcast, Yogipreneur Radio, later became Uncomplicate Your Business, and today lives on as Promote Yourself to CEO. Same podcast feed – just a natural evolution as her audience and work grew. ### Content Creation: Start with What You’ve Got A pivotal moment for Racheal was launching the *Fired Up & Focused* challenge in 2014, with 30 daily videos recorded while raising three toddlers. That challenge became a podcast series, then a book, and still drives engagement today. It’s a perfect example of turning one idea into multiple formats – video, audio, text – and using it repeatedly. Her podcast now serves as a living library of evergreen content. Rather than chasing trends, she focuses on strategy that stands the test of time. Even after hundreds of episodes, most are still relevant and repurposable. ### Podcast Planning and Auditing in Practice Racheal’s team uses a detailed episode spreadsheet to track each episode’s topic, performance, and format. Every year, they audit this archive to decide what needs updating and often find that older episodes can be reused with minimal effort. She treats her podcast like a set of long-term assets: “It’s like owning a home. You can repaint the walls, but the asset is still there.” For Racheal, this means recording with intention, knowing she’ll return to that material later. ### Creating a Content Ecosystem Producing a podcast alone won’t grow your audience – you need a full ecosystem. Racheal explains the three main ways new listeners find her content: 1. **Search:** Google, YouTube, Pinterest – even podcast platforms with searchable transcripts. 2. **Other People’s Audiences:** Guest interviews are a powerful way to connect with aligned listeners. 3. **Advertising:** Strategic podcast ads help amplify your message. Once people discover her, the podcast acts as a nurturing tool, building trust and guiding them toward deeper engagement. ### Every Episode With Purpose Racheal builds her podcast in monthly series, each focused on a topic her ideal client cares about. Each episode walks listeners through ideas, common mistakes, small wins, and actions they can take. Every episode points to a free resource or opt-in to help transition them from listeners to email subscribers – her most valuable asset, alongside the podcast itself. ### You Don’t Need to Be an Influencer Racheal emphasizes that small business podcasters are not influencers. You don’t need massive download numbers or to be in the Apple Podcast Top 100. You need a small but loyal audience that trusts you. By viewing your podcast as a business asset, not just a content stream, you shift your mindset to sustainability and strategic reuse. ### Final Thoughts One of the most powerful takeaways from this conversation? Conducting a regular content audit. It can feel daunting, but it’s one of the most time-saving, ROI-boosting things you can do. It helps you avoid duplicate work, identify gaps, and reuse what’s already working. Racheal’s approach to content is all about longevity, intention, and ease – working smarter with what you already have. ## Ready for the Next Level? If you’re wondering: *is my podcast actually doing what I need it to? Am I measuring the right things? Could I be getting more out of the time and money I’m already putting in?* then you might want to grab a copy of [Podcasting for Business](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book)! Podcasting for Business outlines the entire Business Podcast Blueprints methdology and goes into detail about how t optimize your show for 15 different business outcomes, from more referral partners to a shorter sales cycle. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/PFB-Book-Mockups.png "PFB Book Mockups") ## Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. ## Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet - and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you're ready to launch or level up your show, let's talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) ### Keep Learning: [![How to Build Your Framework Into Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2026/07/BPS030_Paul-Pape_featureimage-400x250.webp)](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-build-your-framework-into-your-podcast/) ## [How to Build Your Framework Into Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-build-your-framework-into-your-podcast/) How to Build Your Framework Into Your PodcastWith Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast SpotlightIf you have a... **Categories:** Blog, Podcast --- ### [Three Unique Podcast Strategies](https://onestonecreative.net/3-experts-3-strategies/) **Published:** July 17, 2025 **Author:** Darla Fields **Content:** # No Results Found The page you requested could not be found. Try refining your search, or use the navigation above to locate the post. **Categories:** Blog, Podcast --- ### [What Are Some Different Podcast Episode Types?](https://onestonecreative.net/what-are-some-different-podcast-episode-types/) **Published:** April 8, 2026 **Author:** Megan **Content:** ### Choosing the right episode format for your show can make or break it. When it comes to your podcast format, you’ve got a lot of options. ## Listen Now: There are interviews, solos, short form, long form, panel discussions – but what are the different episode types and how do you know which one to choose for your show? The right format for your podcast is a really important decision to make, not just in terms of how your audience is going to experience it, but what kind of an experience is going to be for you as you’re recording it. Choosing the wrong one can feel awkward or be so miserable that you never want to do it. So, understanding what the different types are, and making a decision about what’s going to be the most effective at helping you achieve your goals, is a pretty important thing to do at the beginning of the process. We always start with the business goals. If one of your reasons for podcasting is to connect with other people, and build relationships with them, you’re going to have to have guests in one format or another. And that can be through a traditional interview podcast, which is the most popular form of podcasting still. It can be through panel discussions where you have multiple guests discussing a single topic, or it can be a segment in a longer episode – which is other kinds of content – maybe a solo found or repurposed from elsewhere. And then you get into the solo types of content. So if you need to engage your audience, sometimes you’ll do that with interviews, but sometimes it’s just got to be you and them, and you spend a little time doing solo content for them. And if you want to get your thought leadership out there, then you’re really going to want to have some elements of just you talking and taking all of the spotlight onto yourself, to get your own IP out into the world. So you do have lots of options for the format that you’re choosing – interviews, solos, or combinations thereof. You’re going to make the right decision when you start with your business goals. And if you’re not sure which is going to be the best format for you, test out a few different ones at the beginning of your podcasting process and see which ones feel the best and are the easiest to work with, with your team or with your producer, and which your audience responds to the most. ## Watch What Are Some Different Podcast Episode Types?: **Categories:** QandA --- ### [How to Make Sure You’re Talking to the Right People](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-make-sure-youre-talking-to-the-right-people/) **Published:** September 11, 2025 **Author:** Darla Fields **Content:** # How to Make Sure You’re Talking to the Right People With Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast Spotlight Making the most of your podcast starts with choosing guests who fit your goals, so every conversation moves you closer to the relationships and results that matter most. # Listen to the Episode Now: Subscribe on [Apple Podcasts](https://podcasts.apple.com/ca/podcast/the-business-podcast-spotlight/id1801282981), [Spotify](https://open.spotify.com/show/0t8M5xTxALwoGe8sues7kw), your [your favorite other podcast player](https://pod.link/1801282981)! # The Situation When Robin J. Emdon joined me on the Business Podcast Spotlight, he’d already produced more than a hundred episodes of Goalbusters in just a few months. The show was never meant to sell his services directly – instead, it became a way to connect with people in his industry, build trust quickly, and explore opportunities for collaboration. With a background in coaching and a book on productivity already published, Robin designed his podcast to be short, structured, and easy for guests to share, making sure he was always talking to the right people. # About Robin J. Emdon Robin J. Emdon is an accountability coach who helps professionals cut through procrastination and get real results. He’s the author of Get Resultsology: The Science of Getting Stuff Done and the host of the Goalbusters podcast, where he’s recorded over a hundred short, sharp conversations designed to spark collaboration and productivity. With a background in coaching that stretches back to his training with Tony Robbins’ team in the early 2000s, Robin combines practical strategies with a deep understanding of the challenges solopreneurs and freelancers face. Based in the UK, he’s also a single dad who values connection, community, and finding ways to add value wherever he goes. # What’s Happened So Far ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/09/BPS025_Blog-Quote-Card_Robin-J-Emdon-1-scaled.jpg "BPS025_Blog Quote Card_Robin J Emdon") Looking at Robin’s situation, he’s built an impressive foundation for his business podcast. In less than a year, he recorded more than a hundred episodes of *Goalbusters*, keeping them short, focused, and designed to highlight the expertise of his guests. Robin didn’t start the show to sell coaching directly. Instead, he saw podcasting as a way to rebuild his network, since his earlier clients from two decades ago were no longer accessible. By keeping the format tight – five key questions in under ten minutes – he makes it easy for busy professionals to say yes to being on the show, and even easier for listeners to get quick, actionable takeaways. This approach has done a few important things for him: - It gives his guests a professional, low-friction way to share their expertise while building rapport with Robin. - It positions him as a connector in his field, someone who adds value without pushing for a sale. - It creates natural opportunities for follow-up conversations and collaborations after the recordings end. Now that the show is established, Robin is turning his attention to growth. The big question for him is *how to keep expanding his reach while staying focused on talking to the right people.* # The New Plan As you’ll have heard in the conversation, Robin has a strong system in place for keeping his show short, structured, and relationship-focused, but the next step is making sure more of the right people actually hear it. After looking at his goals, we identified that improving guest promotion and building in simple collaboration follow-ups will give him the best return without adding a heavy workload. A clear “promotion kit” with ready-to-use graphics and sample posts will make it easier for guests to share their episodes, and a quick check-in a few weeks after recording can open the door to deeper partnerships. Adding the occasional short solo episode with a practical productivity tip will also let his listeners hear directly from him, helping the show reflect his own expertise as much as his guests’. This combination of guest support, intentional follow-ups, and small format tweaks should mean steady growth over the next several months and more opportunities for Robin to connect with exactly the people he wants to reach. # Business Podcast Blueprints Analysis Robin’s show is a clear example of a **Relationship Building Podcast strategy,** where the main goal is creating new connections that can grow into collaborations, referrals, and professional opportunities. He knows his audience is really the people he invites onto the show, and by keeping the format short and structured, he makes it easy for them to say yes, enjoy the experience, and stay open to follow-up conversations. Over time, these intentional connections strengthen his network and expand the reach of his business in ways that direct selling alone could never do. We can expect that continuing to focus on the right guests will increase referrals, open more doors for collaboration, and keep positioning Robin as a trusted connector in his industry. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/A-Step-By-Step-Guide.jpg "A-Step-By-Step-Guide") [Get Your Copy Today!](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book) # How to Use This Strategy So if you want to use a relationship-building podcast strategy like Robin, here are a few questions to ask yourself: - Who are the people I most want to connect with in my industry – potential partners, referrers, or collaborators? - What criteria can I use to pre-vet guests so I know they’ll be a good fit before I ever send an invitation? - How can I make the guest experience smooth and valuable enough that they’ll be glad they said yes? - Do I have a clear and simple process for following up after the interview to explore future opportunities? That will form the foundation of your guest strategy, and it doesn’t need to be complicated. A short, well-structured interview format can help you highlight your guest, while leaving space to build rapport before and after recording. If you’re not sure where to start, think about the qualities that make someone the right kind of guest for you. Do they serve a complementary audience? Do they already create content that shows they know how to present themselves well? Have they been on other podcasts before? Building your guest list around these cues means you’ll spend your time talking to people who are most likely to bring real value to your network. If you’re looking for a partner to help you figure out and deploy a strategy that will work for your business, we can help! [Book a call](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/), and let’s talk! # How to Track Success Here are the stats you should track for a relationship-building podcast that’s designed to expand your network and create collaboration opportunities: 1. How many of your guests agree to a follow-up conversation after the recording. 2. The number of collaborations, referrals, or partnerships that come directly from those guest relationships. 3. Invitations you receive to appear on other podcasts, speak at events, or contribute to projects as a result of your show. 4. And if you’re curious, you can track overall download numbers, too, but the more meaningful metric is how many new doors open because of the conversations you’ve had. # Connect with Robin Robin is continuing to grow *Goalbusters* and refine how he uses it to build the right relationships, and we’ll be inviting him back to the Spotlight in the future to hear what new collaborations have come from the show. In the meantime, you can grab a free copy of his book [*Get Resultsology*](https://reallyusefultips.com/) -it’s packed with practical strategies to move from procrastination to productivity. Connect with Robin on [LinkedIn](https://www.linkedin.com/in/robinjemdon/) or visit [getresultsology.com](https://getresultsology.com/) to learn more about his work and the *Goalbusters* podcast. Gives Goalbusters a listen on [Spotify](https://open.spotify.com/show/0GK9sYXaGqlLMykokrKPLc) or [Apple Podcasts](https://podcasts.apple.com/gb/podcast/goalbusters-productivity-tips/id1747000085) too! # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. ## Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet - and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you're ready to launch or level up your show, let's talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) ### Keep Learning: [![How to Build Your Framework Into Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2026/07/BPS030_Paul-Pape_featureimage-400x250.webp)](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-build-your-framework-into-your-podcast/) ## [How to Build Your Framework Into Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-build-your-framework-into-your-podcast/) How to Build Your Framework Into Your PodcastWith Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast SpotlightIf you have a... **Categories:** Blog, Podcast --- ### [Are AI-Generated Podcast Clips Worth the Time and Effort?](https://onestonecreative.net/are-ai-generated-podcast-clips-worth-the-time-and-effort/) **Published:** May 28, 2026 **Author:** Megan **Content:** [![Where Do You Find Guests for Your Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2026/05/PFBQA0342-Feature-400x250.jpg)](https://onestonecreative.net/where-do-you-find-guests-for-your-podcast-2/) ## [Where Do You Find Guests for Your Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/where-do-you-find-guests-for-your-podcast-2/) For most podcasters, guest sourcing is the hardest part of the workflow. It doesn't have to be. Listen Now: For some... **Categories:** QandA --- ### [Should Each Podcast Episode Have Its Own Website Page?](https://onestonecreative.net/should-each-podcast-episode-have-its-own-website-page/) **Published:** June 2, 2026 **Author:** Megan **Content:** ### Someone downloads, listens while doing dishes, then moves on with their day. They need a destination you actually control – not a Spotify show notes section. ## Listen Now: So should each podcast episode be on its own page of your website? I would say only if you want people to find and listen to it. In last year’s State of Business Podcasting Report, we saw that 59% of the shows we looked at were putting each episode that they released on individual website pages, and there are tons of good reasons to do this. Every episode that you release can become a piece of content that you optimize for different reasons, different purposes, and different outcomes in your business. The first and most important of them is probably for the SEO and the interlinking possibility that you have with this content. Every episode is unique and standalone and interesting, and it can relate to other things that you’ve talked about, other services that you offer, other resources that you recommend. And so that becomes a web or an environment of content that people can get into when they start examining your content, when they find your podcast and start listening to more. This happens because podcast episodes are ephemeral. They come into someone’s feed, they download them, they listen maybe while they’re doing something else, and then they go on with their day and they do other things, and they don’t really think about that episode anymore unless they happen to remember it and look it up later. And when they look it up later, or when they want that resource that you’ve talked about, or they want to connect with you in some way because what you said really resonated with them, your website’s a really good place for them to be doing that. Apple Podcasts and Spotify don’t have great “hey, get in touch” or “hey, get a free discovery call” options within their show notes. So as much as possible, you want to be directing people back to the part of the internet that you really control, where you can decide what people see, where you can give them the options they need to get in touch with you, to learn more, and even to buy something. When you don’t have your podcast episodes on unique website pages, people are going to have to go to the podcast players, which aren’t going to be as optimized for them to take the next step, to get deeper into a relationship with you. Ultimately, they’re not as effective as your own website is going to be. So take the time to make every episode and the notes associated with it its own web page. That’s a benefit that’s really going to stack over time, especially as your content continues to interrelate and get stronger and stronger in terms of its presence online and the authority that you have to speak on your topic area. ## Watch Should Each Podcast Episode Have Its Own Website Page?: **Categories:** QandA --- ### [Pushing Back Against Podcasting ‘Best Practice’](https://onestonecreative.net/pushing-back-against-podcasting-best-practice/) **Published:** July 24, 2025 **Author:** Darla Fields **Content:** # Pushing Back Against Podcasting ‘Best Practice’ With Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast Spotlight Letting go of what you’re “supposed” to do with your podcast can make space for something that fits your message, your mission, and the way you actually like to work. # Listen to the Episode Now: Subscribe on [Apple Podcasts](https://podcasts.apple.com/ca/podcast/the-business-podcast-spotlight/id1801282981), [Spotify](https://open.spotify.com/show/0t8M5xTxALwoGe8sues7kw), your [your favorite other podcast player](https://pod.link/1801282981)! # The Situation When Jess Sato joined Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast Spotlight, she was more than 60 episodes into the Purpose + Profit Podcast—a show she launched reluctantly but has stayed incredibly consistent with. The podcast pairs with her long-running blog and helps amplify her message around purpose-driven business and thought leadership. Jess was starting to think about how the show could evolve to include other voices, support her bigger mission, and still fit into a workflow that works for her style and time. # About Jess Sato Jess Sato is a business growth and visibility strategist who helps impact-driven women turn their big ideas into bold, clear messaging that fuels real momentum. Through her company, she works with entrepreneurs who want to challenge the status quo and lead meaningful change in their industries or communities. Jess is also the host of the Purpose + Profit Podcast, where she shares insights on thought leadership, mission-led business, and the power of using your voice to create impact. # What’s Happened So Far ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/07/BPS019_Blog-Quote-Card_Jess-Sato-scaled.jpg "BPS019_Blog Quote Card_Jess Sato") Jess has been doing something a lot of podcasters only dream about – sticking with a consistent release schedule for over two years, without missing a beat. Her podcast, Purpose + Profit, grew out of her long-running blog, and it’s always been deeply tied to her mission: helping women use their voices to lead change and create real impact. But here’s the twist: she never actually *wanted* to start a podcast. In fact, she kind of hated the idea at first. It felt like “one more thing” everyone was doing and Jess isn’t one to follow the crowd just because. So, she made a deal with herself: if she was going to do it, it had to be fully on her terms. No fancy tech. No overthinking. No music. Just clarity, consistency, and her actual voice. Over time, the show has become a natural extension of her brand. It’s a way for people to get to know her, learn from her, and understand the deeper values behind the work she does. But lately, Jess has been feeling that familiar nudge – what if this podcast could do more? What if it could not only share her own message, but help amplify the voices of others doing world-changing work too? So now she’s asking a new set of questions: Can she evolve the show without losing the simplicity that’s made it sustainable? What would it look like to bring in guests, especially when she wants conversations that go deeper than the typical Q&A? Could short, focused series be the key to expanding the show’s impact without turning it into a full-time job? And maybe most importantly: Can you push back against “best practices” and still build a podcast that works beautifully, for your business and your life? # The New Plan As you heard in the episode, Jess isn’t trying to blow up her entire podcast strategy, she just wants to stretch it a little. After two solid years of solo episodes that pair with blog posts, she’s ready to experiment with something new: guest voices, deeper storytelling, and content that supports her bigger mission without hijacking her calendar. The plan? Keep the existing feed (no need for a whole new show) and introduce occasional themed series – something like a mini-campaign inside the podcast. Each series would explore a specific issue Jess cares about, like menstrual equity or global sisterhood in entrepreneurship, and could include her own reflections, guest interviews, and actionable insights. To keep things tidy, she’ll flag these episodes with clear titles and visuals so listeners know when something special is happening. And because she loves a good system, it’ll all be designed to fit neatly alongside her regular workflow. Think blog post + podcast episode, just like now, but with a few new voices in the mix. These series can also tie into bigger initiatives, like her upcoming retreat in Egypt. A collection of episodes that builds awareness, shares stories, and gets people excited about joining? Yes, please. Best of all, it’s flexible. If she loves it, she can do more. If not, no harm done, it’s just one more way of using the platform she’s already built, on her own terms. # Business Podcast Blueprints Analysis This new series-based direction is a classic Audience Engagement Podcas**t** move, where the main goal is to serve and connect more deeply with the people already in Jess’s world. Her audience knows her through her blog, her work, and the podcast itself, and now these mini-series will let her show up in an even more focused and intentional way. Each one will offer deeper value, more mission alignment, and new ways for listeners to engage with the issues that matter. It’s a smart, flexible format that can adapt to whatever she’s most passionate about – and whatever her audience most needs to hear. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/A-Step-By-Step-Guide.jpg "A-Step-By-Step-Guide") [Get Your Copy Today!](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book) # How to Use This Strategy So if you’re thinking about adding short, mission-driven series to your podcast like Jess, here are a few questions to get you started: - What topic or cause do you care about deeply – and want your audience to care about too? - Are there guests or stories you could bring in to raise awareness, share practical tools, or spark action? - How might this series support something else in your business, like a launch, an event, or a larger campaign? Once you’ve got your focus, sketch out a few episode ideas that would help someone understand the issue, feel inspired, and know what to do next. That’s your structure. You don’t need a huge overhaul – just a clear theme, consistent messaging, and a light production touch to help it stand out. You can record all the episodes up front, release them as a block or weekly over a set period, and promote the series like its own little product. Think of it as a podcast-within-a-podcast and a tool you can use again and again. If you’re looking for a partner to help you figure out and deploy a strategy that will work for your business, we can help! [Book a call](https://calendly.com/onestone/strategysession), and let’s talk! # How to Track Success Here are the metrics to keep an eye on for a short, mission-focused podcast series that’s meant to build deeper engagement and drive meaningful action: 1. How many people you share the series with directly and how many reply, share it, or take some kind of next step. 2. The number of conversations or collaborations that start because someone heard the series (this includes DMs, emails, and “I heard you on…” moments). 3. Any business tied to the series – retreat sign-ups, speaking invites, new clients, etc. 4. And sure, track downloads if you want, but the real win here is in the quality of connection, not the size of the audience. # Connect with Jess Jess is planning out her first special podcast series now, and once she’s back from her trip to Egypt, we’ll be inviting her back to the Spotlight to hear how it all played out. If you’re curious about her work (or just love the idea of turning big ideas into big impact), head over to [jessicasato.com](https://jessicasato.com/) and check out the Purpose + Profit Podcast. You can also connect with Jess on [LinkedIn](https://www.linkedin.com/in/jess-sato/) to follow along as she develops these new projects – and if you’re a purpose-led entrepreneur looking to sharpen your message and amplify your voice, she’s someone you’ll definitely want in your corner. # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. ## Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet - and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you're ready to launch or level up your show, let's talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) ### Keep Learning: [![How to Build Your Framework Into Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2026/07/BPS030_Paul-Pape_featureimage-400x250.webp)](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-build-your-framework-into-your-podcast/) ## [How to Build Your Framework Into Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-build-your-framework-into-your-podcast/) How to Build Your Framework Into Your PodcastWith Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast SpotlightIf you have a... **Categories:** Blog, Podcast --- ### [13 Questions to Ask a Podcast Production Company Before You Hire Them](https://onestonecreative.net/13-questions-to-ask-a-podcast-production-company/) **Published:** June 19, 2025 **Author:** Darla Fields **Content:** # 13 Questions to Ask a Podcast Production Company Before You Hire Them If you’re deciding whether or not to hire a production company for your comapny’s podcast, you want to make sure you get all of the information you need to make the right decision. ## Do you Need a Production Company for Your Podcast? Yes, you probably do. Unless, of course, you’re burdened with an abundance of free time and a desire to learn a set of new, highly technical skills and strategies. This is especially true if you’re a lawyer, consultant or expert business owner who would rather be billing hours and doing client work than fiddling with audio software. But there are a lot of options out there – freelancers, agencies, podcast coaches, niche studios, training providers – all with wildly different pricing, styles, and service levels. And as you probably know, hiring a third-party provider can be an… ordeal*.* When hiring for a podcast, it’s also fairly high-risk. Your show needs to reflect well on your company and help you achieve important goals so the provider you choose to work with needs to be reliable and produce high-quality work that, in some way, increases your profitability. When you work with a great one, then creating your podcast is going to be a really pleasant part of your workflow; you’ll get to focus on creating interesting and valuable content and won’t have to do much else while the benefits to your business stack up. But if you end up with a less than satisfactory one, it can vary from a lackluster experience with middling results all the way to an expensive, time-sucking nightmare. I’m Megan Dougherty, the co-founder of One Stone Creative, and I’ve had far more conversations with people who hated their production partner than I’d care to remember. At One Stone Creative, we’ve been producing podcasts for expert business owners for 9 years and have worked with dozens of different firms, sometimes creating new shows from scratch, and sometimes taking over shows started with enthusiasm, but that weren’t creating the results required. Based on this experience, these questions are what my team and I think you should ask any podcast production agency or vendor before you sign a deal with them, and what their answers will tell you. There aren’t right or wrong answers – just right or wrong for your specific business and show. You should make sure to speak with at least 2 or 3 different vendors before making your choice, to get a sense of your options. We’d love to be one of them. Book a call using the link below. [Book a Complimentary Podcast Strategy Session](https://zcal.co/onestonecreative/strategysession) ## 13 Questions to Ask When Looking for a Podcast Production Company ### **1. What does a successful podcast look like for your company?** As a producer, this is one of my favorite questions to be asked, because it means that someone is thinking seriously about how to evaluate the podcast as a marketing channel. Success can mean all sorts of things, from particular download numbers to on-time releases, and the length of time a podcast lasts, to much more nebulous things like getting invited to speak at more conferences or shortening your sales cycle. What they say isn’t as important as the fact that they have an answer to this question. The answer can be “it depends,” but they need to be able to tell you what it depends on and how the determination of what successful means for YOUR podcast is going to be made. What you don’t want to hear is something like “downloads” or “there’s no way to evaluate success” or “whatever you want!” That’s not really helpful for a business show. If their vision of success matches your vision of success, they pass! *One Stone Creative Answer: A successful podcast is one that is regularly making measurable progress towards one or more business goals like more referrals, shorter sales cycles, warmer leads, better search visibility and more opportunities to speak or present. Identifying those goals and designing a show optimized to achieve them is how we begin all production relationships, and we track results monthly. Success depends on how well we achieve the goals that are important for your business.* ### **2. What kind of contract or service agreement will we be entering into?** Any provider is going to have a contract or services agreement that you need to sign in order to do business together. That’s just practical, and a lot of what goes into those contracts is boilerplate: you own your content, we do A, B and C tasks for each episode, here is how we handle liability and emergencies, when does audio need to be submitted, what are the feedback processes etc. One of the things you should take a close look at is the length of the term of service. There are providers who work month to month and allow a variable number of episodes, those who work on a per-episode basis, those with specific packages for a certain amount of episodes and deliverables, and those who require commitments of up to a year. There are still others that let you cancel at any time or with a certain amount of notice. Make sure you end up working with a company that offers you the level of flexibility or stability that works best for your firm. *One Stone Creative Answer: Our Services Agreement covers who owns what copyrights to work (all IP belongs to our clients!), details funding and payment terms, and has clauses for what happens in case of major emergencies like fire, flood, and zombies. It also goes into where content information will be stored, who will have access to it, and how that information will be handled at the end of the service. We also detail client and producer responsibilities, like turnaround time and deadlines, and list exactly what deliverables go along with each episode.* *The agreement is in place for 30 days, and renews monthly unless cancelled, which can be done at any time with 30-days notice, so we can accurately plan each month’s production work. Our reasoning is that if it’s not a fit, it’s not a fit and everyone will be happier moving on in that case!* ### **3. Who’s in charge of managing the episode process?** There are a lot of moving parts in every podcast episode: finding and inviting guests, preparing for the call, recording, audio editing, asset creation, scheduling and promotion, so it is extremely important to get clear on who owns (is in charge of) the high-level process. Who is going to make sure everything is done at the right time, and in the right way? This is basically like asking whose desk is the project management for the podcast on. Different companies are going to take responsibility for different elements, and some are more proactive about things like making sure you get your audio recorded on time, getting reviews and feedback organized and scheduling episodes than others, so you want to make sure you’ve got clarity on exactly what you can expect in terms of who is going to be “owning” the podcast. *One Stone Creative Answer: We do! Outside of recording the content and arranging guest interviews (which we can help with), we project manage the entire podcast, from receiving raw audio to the content being scheduled on all platforms, including notifying the guest, if there is one, that their episode is live.* ### **4. Where are the handoff points and how do we share content and feedback?** There are going to be points where you need to get content and audio to your producer, and they need to get information and content back to you. What are the points in the workflow for each episode where that happens, and what is the method it happens by? Do they have a dashboard or portal they need you to use to send them raw audio? Do they upload finished content to your Dropbox? Is email the best and fastest way to submit your feedback on an episode, or is there a shared project management system where you can tag someone into a conversation? There are no right or wrong answers here. But you need to make sure that you’re going to be able to integrate your workflows effectively, and sometimes, when you get into the nitty-gritty, you find a dealbreaker. It’s good to fully explore in advance. *One Stone Creative Answer: Our key handover points are when we receive raw audio from our clients. That audio can be uploaded to our shared Google Drive via direct upload with an accompanying email, or through a form we provide.* *The next one is when we submit finished content back to the client for review. We upload content to the shared workspace and email that it is ready.* *We send a final email when the episode has been fully scheduled, and populate a stats tracking document monthly, which is reviewed during monthly or quarterly strategy calls.* ### **5. Is there any kind of coaching, feedback or strategic help provided?** If you want to improve your skills as a podcast host or need support around leveraging the show in different areas of your business, then you probably want a provider that offers coaching, feedback, and/or strategic consulting. This isn’t needed for every show, but if it’s something you’re interested in, you will definitely want to know in advance! As about what type of feedback is provided. You might hear answers like: “we provide detailed feedback on sound capture and your recording setup.” Which is great if that is your need, but if what you’re looking for is interviewing and performance critiques, you’ll want to work with someone else. Similarly, you may want to work with someone who can keep an eye on your stats and progress towards podcast-adjacent goals, you can learn through a discovery call if a provider is more focused on downloads and social shares, or more holistic metrics. *One Stone Creative Answer: We offer content feedback on request for whatever the current area of focus for improvement within a show is like welcomes, closings or transitions, interviewing style and general performance, as well as sound and recording. We also track any and all monthly stats and have monthly or quarterly strategy calls to evaluate progress and make plans.* ### **6. What’s the turnaround time from raw audio to finished episode?** This can vary wildly from company to company. Some editors and agencies can turn an episode around in a few days or even hours. Others take longer, up to a week or more. There isn’t a right or wrong amount of time, but you can usually expect that the more assets provided, like show notes and sharing materials, and the more complex the editing, the longer it will take. The most important consideration here isn’t finding the fastest turnaround; it’s establishing that you can make YOUR workflow match THEIR workflow. If the answer to “What is your turnaround time?” isn’t clear or can’t be easily explained to you, I would consider that a red flag. When thinking about the turnaround time, one thing to consider is how topical your content is. If you want a daily news commentary show, you’ll need a hyper-fast turnaround time. If you’re doing interviews that are generally evergreen or can be produced well in advance of release, then it’s not as critical. *One Stone Creative Answer: We work on a 7-day production schedule for podcasts that require notes, sharing assets, and scheduling. If it is an audio-only project, it can be closer to 3 days. Some shows are done on a batch basis, where all content is recorded at once, then produced, then published all at once.* ### **7. Are they using AI? And if so – how?** Whatever kind of producer or production company you end up working with, they will probably be integrating AI one way or another. There are dozens (at least!) of AI-powered services to write show notes, clip videos, enhance audio and even develop scripts and episode titles. This isn’t necessarily a bad thing, but it’s a very good idea to understand exactly what the company you work with is using AI for and what kind of quality assurance mechanisms they have in place so that you don’t wind up with misspelled guest names, choppy, degraded audio, or generic social media posts. Ask what tools they’re using at what point in the process, and exactly how humans are reviewing the work the AI tools produce before the content comes back to you or goes live to the rest of the world. Do not hire anyone who cannot tell you that a human will be personally reviewing and responsible for any AI assisted content. *One Stone Creative Answer: We have experimented with a lot of different AI programs, and test new ones as they come out. We have at various times used a writing-assistance tool to develop the first draft of show notes and social media shares, which were then reviewed and edited for accuracy and tone. Ultimately, we abandoned those services because, considering that each episode also gets a quality assurance listen by a human, it costs less and is more accurate to have that person do it right the first time. Likewise with clip selection, we have found that our audio and video editors do a better job selecting clips while they are editing than hoping an AI tool surfaces something good. ([Purposefully recorded short form videos](https://onestonecreative.net/micro-podcasts/) are much more effective strategically, however!)* *Where we have found a legitimate use for AI assitance tools is when there is a wide variance in quality between the host and guest’s audio. In that case we use an audio-improvement AI feaure of our editing software to slightly balance out the sound.* ### **8. What assets do they provide?** Common assets that go along with podcasts are show notes and descriptions, different kinds of social media shares, including text and graphics, audiograms and short form videos like reels or shorts, emails, video versions of the show, sharing materials for your guests and even things like opt-in content and blog posts. Admin tasks like guest research, scheduling episodes on podcast hosts and blogs, and scheduling social media posts and announcement emails can also be included. Depending on how much support you need with the show and how much bandwidth and skill there is on your own team, you might need more or less from a production company in terms of deliverables that go with each episode. If you have an amazing social media team and the best admin ever, you don’t need those services from a provider and can focus on getting a service or package that includes just what you don’t have available in-house. Something I would like to mention here is that you are much less likely to find a single individual who is going to be able to do really high quality, complex podcast editing AND cool graphic design and fluent social media post writing. It is a lot of different skill sets, and while I am sure such humans do exist, they are rare and expensive (as they should be!), which often makes agencies the best choice for a podcast with high content and support needs. They have different people and departments that are experts in each production area. If, on the other hand, you’ve got great writers and designers and admin support in-house, let them do what they’re great at and find an individual provider who can give you awesome audio without worrying about the rest. *One Stone Creative Answer: We’re pretty flexible in this regard. We can include everything mentioned above, including scheduling of all assets, but let our clients customize their production package to include exactly what they need and none of what they don’t.* ### **9. Who is providing the service and who are the points of contact?** Podcast production companies and agencies come in all shapes and sizes and organize the work in different ways. As a potential client, it’s important to know who your points of contact are and what, if any, contact you will have with other members of the team. Will you have a dedicated account manager who is familiar with your show? When you have a question, who do you ask, and what is the best way to get in touch with them? Will you have a dedicated producer who will get to know you and your show and your editing preferences, or are there standards and edits that get applied to all shows? If getting feedback is part of the service, who provides it, and is it a two-way dialogue? Basically, you want to be very clear about who is handling your content and how you make sure you all have the information that you need as the production relationship evolves. *One Stone Creative Answer: We assign dedicated people to each podcast we produce so that the same person is always handling the audio/video editing, feedback, strategy, notes and admin. This lets us become familiar with the style and direction of each podcast. We do believe in vacations, however, so we develop detailed standard operating procedures for each show so we can help each other when needed. The account manager in charge of each show is the primary point of contact and liaises between different members of our team, and whatever members of the client’s team are involved.* ### **10. If you are starting a new show, what is included in a launch? Follow up: how long will the podcast launch take?** Podcast launches provided by a podcast production company can be as simple as creating the first episode and pointing you at Apple Podcasts Connect or as complex as orchestrating a multi-channel, multi-media content extravaganza complete with a launch team and listener contest. The provider you’re talking to should be able to tell you the linear steps in their launch process: what has to be done, in what order, and how long it usually takes. You’ll want to know what kind of show development support they provide. Will they be really hands-on in helping you design the different elements of your show, like the branding and the episode format, or will they just take what you send and produce it? It’s the same thing for the rest of the elements of launch. Ask if they have different packages, what is the most popular, and how much time it’s all going to take. It’s also a good idea to ask about how custom the launch is going to be to YOU. If they have a standard launch they provide for all shows, that can be a good thing; it will likely be a smooth process that runs efficiently. But sometimes, you want something more personalized that takes advantage of your existing audience and community or the channels you’re currently using. Ask about how much collaboration and differentiation for your launch is going to be possible. It’s typical for there to be a launch/setup fee for new podcasts and for podcast takeovers, so ask about those as well. *One Stone Creative Answer: We have a standard launch package for a new podcast (both audio and video versions) that includes show development, audio-visual branding, template and tracking infrastructure creation, a trailer episode, the first full episode, and support around tech submission. It includes everything needed to go from “I have an idea!” to “We’re on Spotify!” We can also add promotional assets like email and social media campaigns as needed.* *For existing shows, we have a lower ‘takeover’ rate that simply covers getting the show integrated into our systems for a seamless transition.* ### **11. What kind of editing do they offer?** There are many different kinds of podcast editing, and it’s reasonable to expect that different service providers will use different terms to describe them! The person you are speaking with should be able to describe their editing style or styles clearly, explain what kind of sound improvement they do, like minimizing background noise, balancing the levels of the speakers, “sweetening” the overall sound, and explain any terms you’re not familiar with. They should also be able to tell you what kind of content editing they will do: removing filler words, cutting trailing questions out, and making editorial decisions about what should be included—the range can be big! Sometimes, companies might be able to follow content edits you provide, like “remove the question and answer about balloons.” Other times they can make editorial decisions on their own. Ideally, they can give you examples of shows they produce so you can listen to the finished product. (Do remember as you are reviewing shows that even the world’s best audio editor can’t work magic. If source audio is terrible, there is a hard limit to how much it can be improved. The host should always sound acceptable but be forgiving of weird or wonky guest audio. Sometimes, you just get what you get.) The key thing to figure out with this question is what are *you* going to be responsible for providing in terms of editing decisions and what *they* are going to do. There might even be a process where you collaboratively establish content standards, and that’s awesome! Just know what you’re getting into so you don’t find yourself expecting something they can’t provide. *One Stone Creative Answer: For most shows, we do what we call ‘hygiene’ editing. This means improving the quality of the sound by lowering background noise (where possible!), balancing the volume between the speakers, and improving the overall tone and quality (sweetening!). We remove any obvious errors and re-starts and take editorial comments from clients when they have specific requests. The goal is to make the editing “invisible” and leave the host and guest, if there is one, sounding just a little smarter and more polished than they do in real life. For some shows, we can do more intensive editing and include content edits like re-arranging the parts of an episode and more music design. It depends on the needs of the show.* ### **12. How long do their clients usually keep podcasting?** Many shows fizzle out after a few weeks or months in a sad process called podfading, where the project just loses steam and stops releasing. If you can avoid it, you should. It’s not like anyone will lose a leg if you don’t, but what a waste of time and resources – and not a great look if you announced it publicly. Ideally, the provider you work with will have clients who have been podcasting for a long time. It’s a good indication that they’re providing quality service. This is FAR from a hard and fast rule, of course; brand new providers can provide fantastic service, and sometimes companies specialize in podcasts that have limited lifespans by design. This should just be one of the many elements you consider when choosing a provider. Something else you should ask about is whether it’s possible to create a podcast season instead of a permanently ongoing show. For many businesses, this is an amazing fit, either to test the waters or to serve a specific business function and then move on. *One Stone Creative Answer: Our longest-running show has been going since 2018, and average tenure is over two years. We also LOVE podcast seasons – many businesses don’t need permanent ongoing shows. If a company just wants to nurture and pre-qualify new leads, 12 episodes is going to do it. We always recommend the style of show that is going to meet the business goals, whether that’s ongoing, micro, seasonal, or something entierly new.* ### **13. What happens when something goes wrong?** This is kind of a tricky one because everyone sells based on things being great. But there will be problems. Humans make mistakes. You will, and your provider will. It happens. So you want to know in advance what the provider’s approach to things like you submitting late audio, a recording too bad to release, or confusing instructions is going to be. Similarly, what if the producer makes an error in production, like missing a requested edit, adding the wrong intro, or misspelling a guest’s name? It could be that they don’t have prepared answers to these kinds of questions, maybe you’re foreseeing problems they haven’t, or vice versa! But a willingness to collaborate with you to establish standards and best practices. For example, if raw audio is not submitted by X date, the editor will prepare a replay, or “any mistakes in editing will be fixed and re-uploaded free of charge,” which means you’re going to have consistency and, ultimately, trust. And that is the foundation of any good working relationship. *One Stone Creative Answer: While we try to avoid mistakes, as stated, it happens from time to time! We will always fix any error we make in the audio or assets as soon as we are made aware of it and at no additional charge. In the case of a client error, we are also happy to make after-release edits, although we prefer a pre-release review stage to avoid them! We guarantee on-time releases when we receive raw audio in time, and if we miss one for a reason within our control, we will discount the next month’s production by the amount of a full episode.* ![Quote card with a pictue of Megan Dougherty and the text: At the end of the day the most important consideration in your choice of producer or editor is that you trust them with your content. Megan Dougherty on the value of a podcast production company.](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2026/05/MeganDoughertyPhoto.png "MeganDoughertyPhoto") [Book a Call with One Stone Creative Co-Founder, Megan Dougherty](https://zcal.co/onestonecreative/strategysession) ## Final Thoughts on Hiring a Podcast Production Company At the end of the day, the most important consideration in your choice of producer or editor is that you trust them with your content. You might only need someone to clean up your episodes and add the intro and outro. You might be looking for someone to take your hand and walk you through the process long term. It could be something in between. or, and I say this with all seriousness, it might come down to vibes. The producer-host relationship can be an intimate one. You’re going to be trusting someone with your unedited audio and that can be a vulnerable thing. Liking the person or people you’re working with goes a long way to making the relationship a good one. There isn’t a wrong thing to want from a third-party provider. The trick is to find someone who is happy and excited to provide what you’re looking for and who is clear about what they can, can’t, or won’t do. If you’re currently evaluating podcast production companies, please check out our ongoing [Business Podcast Production Services,](https://onestonecreative.net/business-podcast-production-services/) [Business Podcast Sprints](https://onestonecreative.net/sprint/) (stand alone seasons) or [Micro-Podcasts](https://onestonecreative.net/micro-podcasts/). We’d love to be one of the potential partners you speak with. # What People Have to Say about Working with One Stone Creative: ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/Lindsay-Rec.png "Lindsay Rec") [dipl_tilt_image image=”https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/Amy-Rec.png” _builder_version=”4.27.4″ _module_preset=”default” hover_enabled=”0″ global_colors_info=”{}” theme_builder_area=”post_content” box_shadow_style=”preset2″ sticky_enabled=”0″][/dipl_tilt_image] [dipl_tilt_image image=”https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/Mary-Ann-Rec.png” _builder_version=”4.27.4″ _module_preset=”default” hover_enabled=”0″ global_colors_info=”{}” theme_builder_area=”post_content” box_shadow_style=”preset2″ sticky_enabled=”0″][/dipl_tilt_image] ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/Mike-Rec.png "Mike Rec") One Stone Creative produced the Unlearn Podcast from the spring of 2019, to 2024. The team provided excellent strategy development, coaching and preparation during the planning and launch of the show, and consistently deliver crisp editing and detailed show notes. On an ongoing basis, they’ve offered interview coaching, brainstorming around strategies and ideas to improve the show. With their help my audience and podcasting skills continuously grow. – Barry O’Reilly, The Unlearn Podcast “The team of One Stone creative was a pure joy to work with on my podcast network. They bring both professionalism and passion to being two of the top podcast producers and podcasting consultants around. If you are thinking about starting a podcast or have been podcasting for years as I have, they bring not only efficiency to your podcast production but real value for your entire operation. Two Thumbs up and Five Stars to the entire team of One Stone Creative.” – Tox Fox, The Compliance Podcast Network I’ll be honest. I started the Spin Sucks podcast with some trepidation. We talked about it for years, but I couldn’t just seem to get my butt in gear to get it done. I kept hearing things such as less than one percent of podcasts are hosted by women (according to Libsyn) and also watched the trajectory of podcasting and yet… But then the amazingly brilliant and easy-to-work with women from One Stone Creative told me there is more than enough content on the blog to create a podcast. They said, in fact, I wouldn’t have to do any work, other than record something weekly. They made it so easy, it was impossible to say no. Thanks to them, we’re here 7 years later. – Gini Dietrich, The Spin Sucks Podcast **Categories:** Blog, Podcast --- ### [Where Do You Find Guests for Your Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/where-do-you-find-guests-for-your-podcast-2/) **Published:** June 16, 2026 **Author:** Megan **Content:** ### For most podcasters, guest sourcing is the hardest part of the workflow. It doesn’t have to be. ## Listen Now: For some people, finding guests for their podcast is absolutely hands-down the easiest part of their workflow. Most podcasters are not like this. Sometimes, finding a guest or enough people who are going to be appropriate and interesting and professionally relevant for your show, it feels like it can take forever, and you never get anywhere, and you are constantly running behind your production schedule because somebody canceled and you didn’t have anyone to fill that slot with. It’s frustrating, and it can be difficult, but to have a relationship-building podcast, you have to have guests to talk to. Those two things, they absolutely go together. They are not mutually exclusive. They are mutually inclusive. So if you’re in the position where you’re not sure where to source these new guests, the first thing that you should try is probably the podcast matchmaking services. PodMatch is one that I really like. It’s designed to be Tinder for podcasters, where you get new matches every day, and you can connect them through the infrastructure. This is not a sponsored post. That’s not an affiliate. Just go look it up. The guy who runs it is really awesome. Other ways you can find guests, though, because not everyone is on PodMatch, not every guest. There are lots of experts who do not really deal with multimedia at all, who are still going to be perfectly delighted to get a podcast invitation and appear on your show. So one of the strategies I recommend at first is to find similar podcasts to yours. People who have similar businesses doing similar things, and look at all the people they’ve interviewed over the last year or so. These are great because they’re going to be relevant. They’re going to have something to say. You can preview their episode and see if they’re a good guest, and they already know how a podcast works, and they’ve agreed to be on one before. So these are really hot leads for new podcast guests. And most of the time in podcast show notes, the host is going to ask the guests, “Where can people get in touch with you? How can people reach out?” Their contact information is going to be right there. You are allowed to use it and invite them to a podcast episode. Other places you should look is in your clients, people that you work with, people that you’ve helped. Ask them who they think you’d be able to talk to. Do they know anyone who would make a really great guest? Would they themselves make a really great guest? That’s a great thing to do with a client. Any professional networking groups that you’re a part of in person or online – inviting someone to be on a podcast is one of the friendliest things you can do on the internet. So don’t worry about reaching out to someone if they are further ahead in their business or if they seem like they have a little bit more status or authority than you online. You can still ask. The worst they’re going to say is no, but nobody is ever angry to be asked if they’ll be on your podcast. Don’t worry if you feel like you’re running behind on guests a little bit. It’s just a matter of finding a new strategy, finding new sources for where these people already exist or where they’re already hanging out, or the podcast that they’ve already been on. And you can do it. And once you build a workflow around that, you can start filling out your pipeline a little bit further in advance and relax a little bit more. ## Watch Where Do You Find Guests for Your Podcast?: **Categories:** QandA --- ### [Should Your Micro Podcast Be Video or Audio?](https://onestonecreative.net/should-your-micro-podcast-be-video-or-audio/) **Published:** June 11, 2026 **Author:** Megan **Content:** ### Video or audio for your micro podcast? Different formats, completely different outcomes. ## Listen Now: So you can do a micro podcast in either audio or in video, but they’ve got very different purposes and are going to produce very different outcomes for your business. So video is the most popular type of micro podcast because it allows you, as the content creator, the host of the show, to be able to take advantage of short-form video social media platforms, which just seem to be unending in their growing popularity. You’ve got TikTok, you’ve got Instagram Reels, you’ve got YouTube Shorts, you’ve got Facebook Shorts. Everybody seems to want to host and share and disseminate your short-form video content. So if you know that you have audiences who are using YouTube Shorts, Facebook Shorts, Instagram Reels, or short-form video on any other platform, it makes a lot of sense to be getting your content onto those platforms. And as I’ve talked about before, creating purpose-made short-form videos always outperform videos that are cut down from longer segments because they are complete in and of themselves and don’t need extra context to be understood or to be valuable. But that doesn’t mean that you can’t have a micro podcast if the thought of video makes you want to run screaming for the hills to hide forever, which is a position I do have a great deal of empathy for. Ask me about our pretty filters that we use on the back end. But if you do want to make it just audio, you still can. You still can get a lot of value out of it if the main thing that you’re trying to get is the transcripts of the content that you’re creating. So a short-form audio podcast is something that somebody could subscribe to on Apple Podcasts, on Spotify. Many people will, and they will enjoy your little quick updates in the short-form audio that you’re making. But the real value is in the SEO, where you can make blog posts for the different things that you say, optimize them, interlink them, and all of that other good stuff that goes into a good content marketing strategy. And the reason this can be valuable for some business owners is some people are talkers, not writers. And if that’s who you are, and if that’s how you create content best, then an audio micro podcast could help you get all of the good stuff that’s in your brain that doesn’t come out easily through your hands when you’re typing. It can come out beautifully through your voice while you’re speaking and then still be used for people who are readers, who could be equally good clients as other people who are also writers. ## Watch Should Your Micro Podcast Be Video or Audio?: **Categories:** QandA --- ### [What Is Micro Podcasting and Why Does It Work So Well?](https://onestonecreative.net/what-is-micro-podcasting-and-why-does-it-work-so-well/) **Published:** June 9, 2026 **Author:** Megan **Content:** ### Micro podcasting is the authority-building shortcut nobody talks about. One key idea, 1-3 minutes, released at least twice a week. No guests, no 30-minute commitments, but structured content that answers real questions and feeds every platform you’re trying to dominate. ## Listen Now: Micro podcasting is one of the best strategies at your disposal to get a lot of high quality, topical thought leadership style content out the door really quickly. So a micro podcast is a short 1-3 minute podcast episode that talks about one key idea. And this is released on a frequent schedule. So at least two times a week is the normal cadence for a micro podcast. This is valuable because it lets you come up with content quickly because you’re following the same basic template again and again. And it creates structured content that’s going to be really easy for the internet robots to read. It’s also going to answer questions and provide insights that the actual humans who you would like to do business with someday are going to be able to take advantage of. Because it’s done in video, or even if it is done in audio, you’re going to be getting transcripts, multimedia content that you can share on the different platforms that are using them and build traction and hopefully build audiences there. The three styles of micro podcasts that tend to be the most successful are Q&A shows, sort of like this one that you’re watching right now, where every single episode is one answer to one question. These are great for use on social media. They’re great for LinkedIn newsletters, they’re great for email newsletters, and they are wonderful as blog posts. But equally valuable can be things like tips and tricks. If you’ve got short strategies or insights or thoughts of the day that you’d like to share on a regular basis, this format can work really well for them too. And if you’re in an industry where things are constantly changing, for example through new legislation or different innovations happening (I’m looking at you, lawyers), there’s always something going on to talk about – then this format of podcasting can allow you to comment on what is going on in your industry on a really regular basis. And that puts you in the position of being one of the people who others in your industry are turning to when they want the latest news, when they want the hottest takes, and when they want to understand what they should be thinking about or why. So if any of these is something that could be of value to your business, but you don’t want to invest in the whole 30 minute long podcast, interviews and guests and all of these things, micro podcasting is efficient and fast and it’s a great way to build a huge web of authority really quickly. ## Watch What Is Micro Podcasting and Why Does It Work So Well?: **Categories:** QandA --- ### [Are You Doing Podcast SEO Backwards?](https://onestonecreative.net/are-you-doing-podcast-seo-backwards/) **Published:** June 4, 2026 **Author:** Megan **Content:** ### Your podcast should be creating content that makes your business discoverable, not the other way around. ## Listen Now: Podcast SEO comes in two very exciting flavors. SEO to help people find your podcast, and using your podcast to help your main business SEO. One of them is more useful for most business owners. I’ll give you a second to guess which one it is. So most of the time when you look up or you research or you start getting into podcast SEO, what you’re going to find is information about how to make your podcast more discoverable. And that’s a good thing to do. It’s best practice to make sure that your podcast name is compelling, your episode titles are interesting, your descriptions have appropriate keywords and audience information in them. This is all important and good stuff to do. But what it’s going to do is help more people find your podcast. And that can be really, really valuable if you are trying to grow an audience, if one of your key metrics for success is the rate at which your downloads increase month over month, and what those people who are downloading or who are subscribers are doing once they have become a part of your community. In those cases focusing on podcast SEO and spending time doing digital PR and promotions for your podcast can be very, very important. But for a lot more business owners, the podcast is more useful as a tool to execute an SEO strategy than it should be as the kind of target for your SEO efforts. So for the vast majority of business owners that we work with, the podcast is a line item expense for a while before it becomes profitable. It’s a tool that you use to get other kinds of value for your business, rather than being something that is valuable in and of itself. And with that in mind, one of the ways that you can use your podcast really effectively and to get a lot of value is to create the content that you need to be putting out into the world to help the world understand that you can do what you say you’re going to do and that you’re an authority in your topic area. So using your podcast for SEO creation or SEO execution is all about understanding what people, real humans, not just the robots, are asking and talking and wondering about. What are the problems that people have? What do they search for? What help are they trying to find? And you can use your podcast to create that kind of content and make it available to them on the different places on the internet where they are looking. And of course, as you’re doing that, there’s no harm in making it easily readable to the robots. But that should be secondary to the actual humans that you want to connect with, because as of yet, AI is not purchasing high-end services, but people definitely still are. ## Watch Are You Doing Podcast SEO Backwards?: **Categories:** QandA --- ### [How Do You Build a Network When You Don't Know Anyone Yet?](https://onestonecreative.net/how-do-you-build-a-network-when-you-dont-know-anyone-yet/) **Published:** May 26, 2026 **Author:** Megan **Content:** ### Everyone says business is all about who you know, but what happens when you’re starting fresh and your network is empty? A podcast opens doors that cold emails never will. ## Listen Now: Everybody says that it’s all about who you know, but what do you do if you don’t know anybody yet? As a business owner, sometimes you’re going to want to break into new market segments, start selling new services, deal with a different type of clients, or maybe start a whole new business altogether. If that’s the case, you may find that your digital or virtual Rolodex is a little bit thin on the ground. As you grow a business, you build connections and you meet people who are doing something similar, complimentary business owners and other people who can help you grow, send referrals and give you the information and insight that you need to grow. But when you’re making a big change or you’re starting to do something new, you don’t have all of those deep years long, really valuable connections. One way that you can start to build a new network of connections in a new topic area or a new service area is by hosting a podcast in that topic. Most people are delighted to be invited to a podcast. It’s something that people very rarely say no to. And even if they do say no, no one’s going to be mad that you asked them. So it’s a great way to open the door. And when you do, you get all of the touch points in advance – the invitation, the prep work, the recording check (if you do that). You get time during the conversation itself before you record, while you’re recording, after you’re recording, and then you have as much follow up as you’re willing to do to continue building that relationship. If you use all of these touch points to genuinely get to know people who are in the new space that you want to be doing business in, then you can find that in just a matter of months, depending on the frequency of your release schedule, a lot can change. You can go from knowing nobody in the new topic area or a new industry to having dozens or even hundreds of connections who can help you grow your business, and who you’re going to be able to support as well. So if you are trying to break into a new space of some kind, consider a podcast as one of the strategies that you’re going to do to help you build the connections you need to be successful there. ## Watch How Do You Build a Network When You Don’t Know Anyone Yet?: **Categories:** QandA --- ### [Is Your Podcast Opening Doors You're Not Walking Through?](https://onestonecreative.net/is-your-podcast-opening-doors-youre-not-walking-through/) **Published:** May 19, 2026 **Author:** Megan **Content:** ### You researched them. You interviewed them. You edited and released their episode. Then you never spoke to them again. ## Listen Now: Do you want to take a wild guess as to what happens with most podcast guests after they’ve been interviewed on a podcast, maybe even when they were really excited about it? Absolutely nothing, and it is such a waste. So when you have a relationship building podcast, the connections that you’re making with other people are the most important part of the whole podcast. It’s more important than the notes, the video, the assets and anything else that you’re doing. And yet for so many podcasters, once they have gone to all of the trouble of inviting someone, researching them, interviewing them, post producing the interview and releasing it, they never follow up with the guest. Again, many of them don’t even let them know when their episode is live. A relationship is not built on one event alone, even an event like a podcast that has multiple different touch points that you can be optimizing. To build a real relationship, you have to be a human in the relationship, and that means making an ongoing effort to connect, to be involved and to be the kind of person somebody wants to be friends or professional colleagues with. So there’s a lot of different ways that you can do this. I’m taking the fact that you have a good podcast workflow, a great recording, wonderful assets, all of these things as sorted. But the other things that you should be doing are just being the kind of colleague and professional connection that somebody else would like to have. Follow them on social media, share their stuff, send them things that you think they will find interesting. When you see something that could help them, send it their way. And if you’ve got a referral for them, absolutely send that their way. A relationship building podcast is the beginning of the relationship. It can open door that might not have been able to be open to you otherwise, but you’ve still got to actually walk through it and build the relationship. The podcast is the beginning, but to take things to the next level and to start seeing real professional outcomes from your relationship building podcast, you’ve got to invest the time in actually building the relationship with your guests. ## Watch Is Your Podcast Opening Doors You’re Not Walking Through?: **Categories:** QandA --- ### [Podcast Show Notes](https://onestonecreative.net/podcast-show-notes/) **Published:** May 12, 2026 **Author:** Megan **Content:** # Podcast Show Notes ### Probably the most underused part of your show. ## What are Podcast Show Notes? Podacst Show Notes are the written material that goes along with each episode you release. You’ll find them in podcast players like Apple and Spotify when you’re looking at an episode, and, if the host is clever and strategic, you’ll also find them on individual web pages on their company website. They can also include graphics, quoteations, social media sharing copy, timestamps, resources mentioned, guest information, additional resources to consult, and next steps to take. There are four main types of show notes: Minimal, Description + Bullets, Paragraphs and Blog style, each with several varaitions and subtypes. ## Minimal Show Notes Minimal show notes will usually have a short description of the content of the show, links to any resources mentioned, and about the guest being interviewed if there was one. If they’re around or under 200 words, they’re minimal show notes. Sometimes, you see a single sentence about an episode that shares the key idea being discussed, and sometimes, you’ll see a few sentences about the guest and different topics. These show notes are the quickest to put together, and they are best for when your content really needs to be heard or seen to acheive your goals. Sometimes this is a relationship building podcast where most of the nurturing is happening ‘off air’, an entrepreneur who has always been audio or video first, or a conversion podcast where the notes are part of the premium access level. ## Description + Bullet Show Notes Bullet Show notes are probably the most common, and they are designed to get people to listen to the episode. They usually start with one or two paragraphs of description, followed by a list of key ideas, questions, highlights or quotations (or combinations of all of these!) from the episode in a bulleted list, followed by links to resources and the guest if there is one. The goal of each bullet is to give a compelling reason to listen and encourage people to engage with the content. For example, if we had a bullet point that said, “Then Guest X mentioned a strategy for podcast promotion, that absolutely knocked my socks off. I can’t wait to try it; it’s going to be a GAME CHANGER,” – odds are that you’ll want to listen to the show and find out what that strategy is. This style can work pretty well for all of the Blueprints and strikes a good balance between efficiency in production and having written content that is worth reading. ## Paragraph or Blog Style Show Notes Finally, paragraph or blog style show notes. This is where you will have a few paragraphs of description, generally without bullet highlights, or a full write-up about the episode with headings, subheadings and more. This is the style to use when you want a reader to get a similar experience to a watcher or listener. You can use a script if you write them in advance or a transcript of the recording that’s been edited to read well visually. Some people write whole blog posts based on the episode that are standalone pieces of content. Some people take it a step further and write a totally unique blog post expanding on one or more ideas from the episode, a totally unique piece of content that complements the episode Blog style show notes are far and away the best for enhancing your SEO. You can optimize for keywords, link to other content, and drive traffic to your opt-ins. Ultimately, if you don’t really care how someone gets the information as ong as they get it, then making it thoroughly available in as many formats as possible will maximize your results from it. ## Podcast Show Notes in the Data ![Graphic showing podcast show notes style percentages from the State of Business Podcasting Report. It shows Minimal show notes 23% 1-2 Paragraphes 33%, Description + Bullets 25%, Transcript Only 1% Blog Style 4% and 3+ Paragraphs 13%.](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2026/05/Show-Notes-Style-SOBP2025.jpg "Show Notes Style SOBP2025") ### Show Notes Style in the Top 100 Podcasts Podcast show notes are one of the things we look at every year in the [State of Business Podcasting Report](https://onestonecreative..net/eport), and it’s a really insteresting window into how businesses are prioritizing the written materials associated with their shows. This year e say that 50% of the shows were using Pragraph or blog style notes, which seems to indicate that the on-page SEO value of the podcasts is making an impact. ### Resources inclued in Show Notes Another thing we look at in the report is what resources are included with show notes. The most popular things to include are an opt-in of some kind, social links to connect elsewhere, resources mentioned in the episodes, and guest links. Each of these was used at least 30% of the time in the tip 100 shows. ### **AI Shownotes** At the time of this writing, the podcasting industry is obsessed with AI-generated show notes and other written content, and some of the providers are doing a decent job of it, as long as you have a real human diligently reviewing and correcting the content. The problem with AI notes and assets is that they can be pretty good, so good that the errors they do make are hard to see, and the kinds of errors they make can be embarrassing, like misspelled names or companies. I have found it takes about the same amount of time, or more, to verify that AI notes are accurate as it does just to write them from scratch, although they can make a usable first draft if you find editing easier than starting with nothing. ### **Different Destinations** You might want different versions of your show notes for different destinations. A blog style is going to be amazing on your website and for SEO, but it might be overkill when someone is scrolling Spotify. (There is also a 4000 character limit on some of the podcast hosts and players – they don’t display, or even let you upload more than that.) If you are doing extensive show notes, writing a short summary or description with a link to your full blog post for uploading to the host is a good way to get the best of both worlds. ### **Timestamps** Often, you’ll see a list of topics or keywords with timestamps or timestamps associated with different bullets from an episode. The idea here is to let people quickly navigate to the part of the content that is the most useful for them. Some people love them, and some people hate them, and when you’re deciding whether to include them or not, remember that static (not-clickable) notes cannot take into account dynamic ads. If I put in my notes that I share the meaning of life at minute 37, but I have pre-rolls and midrolls that come before it of varying lengths (that change every week!), that timestamp will not be accurate a lot of the time unless I verify and update it every time I change my ads. That won’t make anyone happy. It’s also really hard to validate if people actually use them or not. Getting feedback from your audience about when and if they use show notes can help you decide whether or not you should go to the trouble of them. Some alternatives are to create a video version of your show (audiogram style is fine!) and add “chapters” that can be identified in the player itself and directly linked to it. This lets people find and access content easily, and the chapter headings will always be correct. ### **Transcripts** Transcripts can be a valuable addition to your podcast; they make it accessible to people who do not or cannot listen to content, and some people just prefer reading! They also increase your potential for SEO and make it easier to search your own content for research and repurposing. AI transcripts are getting better and better, so the cost of creating them is going down. You can even ask an AI to correct the spelling and grammar in an automatically generated transcript! It will still need a human to read and review, but it is a major time saver! Avoid publishing an unedited transcript if you can. A little polish makes a big difference in terms of the reader experience and will reflect better on your brand. # Ready for the Next Level? If you’re wondering: *is my podcast actually doing what I need it to? Am I measuring the right things? Could I be getting more out of the time and money I’m already putting in?* then you might want to grab a FREE copy of [Podcasting for Business](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book)! Podcasting for Business outlines the entire Business Podcast Blueprints methdology and goes into detail about how to optimize your show for 15 different business outcomes, from more referral partners to a shorter sales cycle. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/PFB-Book-Mockups.png "PFB Book Mockups") # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. # Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet – and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you’re ready to launch or level up your show, let’s talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) **Categories:** Articles --- ### [How Do You Tell the AI Platforms About Your Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/how-do-you-tell-the-ai-platforms-about-your-podcast/) **Published:** April 3, 2026 **Author:** Megan **Content:** [![Where Do You Find Guests for Your Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2026/05/PFBQA0342-Feature-400x250.jpg)](https://onestonecreative.net/where-do-you-find-guests-for-your-podcast-2/) ## [Where Do You Find Guests for Your Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/where-do-you-find-guests-for-your-podcast-2/) For most podcasters, guest sourcing is the hardest part of the workflow. It doesn't have to be. Listen Now: For some... **Categories:** QandA --- ### [What Kind of Show Notes Should You Have?](https://onestonecreative.net/what-kind-of-show-notes-should-you-have/) **Published:** April 15, 2026 **Author:** Megan **Content:** [![Where Do You Find Guests for Your Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2026/05/PFBQA0342-Feature-400x250.jpg)](https://onestonecreative.net/where-do-you-find-guests-for-your-podcast-2/) ## [Where Do You Find Guests for Your Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/where-do-you-find-guests-for-your-podcast-2/) For most podcasters, guest sourcing is the hardest part of the workflow. It doesn't have to be. Listen Now: For some... **Categories:** QandA --- ### [Can You Use Different Episode Types in One Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/can-you-use-different-episode-types-in-one-podcast/) **Published:** April 13, 2026 **Author:** Megan **Content:** ### Mixing different episode types in your podcast can really expand the benefits you get from your show and elevate how it feels, or it can just confuse everybody who’s listening. ## Listen Now: So if you have different goals for your podcast and different things that you want to achieve with it, then having different episode types that you regularly release can help. Let’s say, for example, that you’re interested in both relationship building and establishing thought leadership. Well, then you might want to alternate doing solo episodes where you’re getting your own IP out there with guest episodes where you get the chance to network and get to know other people. Deciding which types you want to have really always does come back to your business goals. What’s important for your business to do and how do you structure the podcast to achieve that. If that does mean different episode types, then what you’re going to want to do is figure out a pattern for those episode types. Consistency is really important. So if you’re going to be adding variation, you want to have consistency in that variation. Maybe you want to do 3 episodes a month, guest interviews, and then 1 episode a month solo. Or maybe you want to usually have a solo show, and then occasionally have a panel discussion where you can meet a whole bunch of people at once. You want to keep in mind the additional logistics. The more people you add, the more time it’s going to take to schedule and probably the more time it’s going to take to produce. But once you figure out what you need from your show, if it turns out that different episode types serve those different needs better – it’s your podcast. You can have different episode types. The thing you want to have is consistency, and if possible, some kind of differentiation. So it’s easy for someone to tell when they’re looking at your list of episodes, what type it’s going to be. Some strategies for differentiation are to have alternate versions of your podcast title art or the graphics associated for each one, maybe with different colors or slightly different layout, but still using your branding so that it’s really easy to visually see which episode is which. And you might want to also have different playlists on your website, on YouTube, or on Spotify for the different episode types that you have, so it’s easy for people to find the type that they’re most interested in. Remember, even in your variety, consistency is key. ## Watch Can You Use Different Episode Types in One Podcast?: **Categories:** QandA --- ### [Where Do You Find Guests for Your Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/where-do-you-find-guests-for-your-podcast/) **Published:** April 10, 2026 **Author:** Megan **Content:** ### They call podcasts the magic calendar opener. Almost everyone is going to say yes to an invitation to appear on a podcast. But if you’re looking for guests, where do you find them? ## Listen Now: As podcasts are getting more and more common and they keep growing in popularity, more and more people are becoming familiar with the concept of being a podcast guest. And as I said, most people are thrilled to be invited to a show, and it doesn’t matter how big it is or how new it is, just the invitation is a compliment, and that’s a really nice way to open a relationship. If you’re struggling to find the right type of people for your show, there’s a couple of ways you can go about doing it. First, one of my favorite strategies is to look at similar, complimentary business or competing business podcasts that also have guests. The guests on those shows are probably going to have information that’s useful to your audience as well. They could be great professional connections for you. And you know that they like being a guest on podcasts. There’s also usually contact information in their episodes, either in the episode itself or in the show notes. So that’s one of my best strategies for getting new guests for a show, who’s guesting on other podcasts that are being built for a similar market. Great strategy there. You can also go with your colleagues and friends and family. If you’ve got people who are great referral partners or again, complimentary business owners, ask them who should be on your show. Most people are really thrilled to make an introduction too and to give someone the opportunity to be a guest on a podcast. That’s a lovely, warm thing to be doing. Similarly, on LinkedIn, who’s writing about the type of content that makes you think they’d be a good fit? The same type of research you do for anything else in your business, your competitor research, your new product research, your client research, all of those are going to turn up people and experts who are saying things and doing things, who could be great guests for your show. So don’t be shy about reaching out, even if you don’t know somebody. Like I said before -“will you be on my podcast?” is a really nice way to start a relationship. Most people are going to say yes, and even if they say no, they’re not going to be mad about it. ## Watch Where Do You Find Guests for Your Podcast?: **Categories:** QandA --- ### [What Is a Video-First Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/what-is-a-video-first-podcast/) **Published:** April 6, 2026 **Author:** Megan **Content:** ### Traditional podcasts are designed to be listened to, but if you’re designing your show to be seen as well as heard, then it’s a video first show. ## Listen Now: So, video, as we’ve talked about before, is becoming more and more popular among business owners and podcasters of all different kinds. More and more shows that we’re seeing when we do our research into the top 100 business podcasts, or when we start working with new clients, is that video is becoming more and more of a priority, and more of these shows are becoming video first shows. So, when we look at what a video first show is, it’s going to be something that was designed with the visuals in mind. It’s more often going to be shot in a studio space rather than something you see here – me in my home office. You might have chairs with mics in front of them or people are speaking like on a talk show or people sitting around a desk as if it were a conference. There’s usually going to be multi-camera angle shots – two different cameras from two different angles, capturing different views of what is going on. And it’s often going to have more complicated editing and visual and sound design associated with it. Basically, when you’re looking at a video for a show, you’re looking at something that was designed as if it could have been on TV. Sometimes it means YouTube is its primary place of distribution, although Apple and Spotify are both getting into the video game as well. But ultimately, a video first show is one that was designed to be seen from the ground up, and the decisions around how things looked were made intentionally, rather than just recording an audio show and happening to record the video, and sending that out to the different platforms. Both can be legitimate strategies. It depends on goals and where you want to invest your time and your production budget. ## Watch What Is a Video-First Podcast?: **Categories:** QandA --- ### [Can I Use My Podcast to Just Create Content for My Business?](https://onestonecreative.net/can-i-use-my-podcast-to-just-create-content-for-my-business/) **Published:** March 27, 2026 **Author:** Darla Fields **Content:** # Can I Use My Podcast to Just Create Content for My Business? ### Sometimes the value of a podcast isn’t the audience – it’s the content. ## Generate Material for Your Business with a Content-Focused Podcast Sometimes your podcast isn’t really about being a podcast. No matter what type of podcast you have or what your goals are, one of the things you will generate from podcasting is content. Piles and piles, mountains and mountains of content. It’s just a side effect of talking into a microphone and recording it. There are some businesses and business owners who podcast mainly or just for the content. If you’ve got a social media team constantly asking you for new material, or a large organisation where employees need to hear from you regularly, podcasting can be a great way to fill those channels. It can help you connect with members of your organisation. It can give your social media team the content they need. And over time it can build up a large enough library of episodes that you can create bigger projects from it – things like books, courses, or even entirely new websites. When those are your primary goals for podcasting, it doesn’t necessarily matter if anyone listens to the podcast itself. When we look at business podcast blueprints, it’s always about the business. What does the business need? If the business needs content, insight, and information from you as the owner or CEO – to help write books, train staff, onboard people, or fill social media calendars – then a podcast can be an effective and efficient way to create that at scale. It allows you to share ideas without spending all of your time writing notes, responding to emails, or repeating the same conversations one-on-one. So don’t worry if what you’re getting from your podcast is mostly content that can be used elsewhere in your business. Often, that’s a good enough reason to do it. ## Watch: Can I Use My Podcast to Just Create Content for My Business? # More Podcast Questions? More Podcast Answers: [What Is a Conversion Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/what-is-a-conversion-podcast/) [What Is a Thought Leadership Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/?p=4554) [What Is an Audience Engagement Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/what-is-an-audience-engagement-podcast/) # Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet – and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you’re ready to launch or level up your show, let’s talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. # Ready for the Next Level? If you’re wondering: *is my podcast actually doing what I need it to? Am I measuring the right things? Could I be getting more out of the time and money I’m already putting in?* then you might want to grab a FREE copy of [Podcasting for Business](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book)! Podcasting for Business outlines the entire Business Podcast Blueprints methdology and goes into detail about how to optimize your show for 15 different business outcomes, from more referral partners to a shorter sales cycle. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/PFB-Book-Mockups.png "PFB Book Mockups") **Categories:** Articles --- ### [What Is a Conversion Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/what-is-a-conversion-podcast/) **Published:** March 25, 2026 **Author:** Darla Fields **Content:** # What Is a Conversion Podcast? ### Podcasts and podcast episodes can actually be a direct part of the different funnels associated with your business. ## A Podcast Can be Part of Your Sales Funnel A conversion podcast is one of the lesser-used business podcast blueprints because it can be a little challenging to get up and running and make work effectively. A conversion podcast is a show where the most important thing it does is move people from one type of relationship with you to another. That might mean going from stranger to subscriber, from non-buying audience member to paying client, or from non-community member to community member. Usually, some part of the podcast or some aspect of the podcast is gated in some way. Podcast episodes might be private behind a paywall where people pay to listen. Or you might offer extra access to you as the host, additional content, bonus guest interviews, or extra episodes behind an email gate or payment gate. These can be really effective when you have a lower-dollar offer. This typically isn’t a high-ticket sales tool. For example, you might have a podcast where you talk about the benefits of your paid membership community. You might also reference bonus interviews or extra content that members get access to. Listening to that podcast then becomes a step in the sales process for joining the community. If you’re thinking about ways to enhance the systems you already have for growing your community or selling lower-ticket items – things like memberships, ebooks, or guides – your podcast can be part of that funnel. In some cases, a podcast becomes a conversion podcast simply because it’s private or pay-to-listen, meaning people have to pay or join your community before they can access the content. There are a lot of tools available to set this up, but it’s important to think carefully about whether that’s the most valuable use of your podcast for your business. Sometimes it is. But sometimes you may get more value by focusing on building relationships or engaging an audience for a higher-ticket offer further down the line. ## Watch: What Is a Conversion Podcast? # More Podcast Questions? More Podcast Answers: [What Is a Thought Leadership Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/?p=4554) [What Is an Audience Engagement Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/what-is-an-audience-engagement-podcast/) [What Is a Relationship Building Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/what-is-a-relationship-building-podcast/) # Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet – and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you’re ready to launch or level up your show, let’s talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. # Ready for the Next Level? If you’re wondering: *is my podcast actually doing what I need it to? Am I measuring the right things? Could I be getting more out of the time and money I’m already putting in?* then you might want to grab a FREE copy of [Podcasting for Business](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book)! Podcasting for Business outlines the entire Business Podcast Blueprints methdology and goes into detail about how to optimize your show for 15 different business outcomes, from more referral partners to a shorter sales cycle. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/PFB-Book-Mockups.png "PFB Book Mockups") **Categories:** Articles --- ### [What Is a Thought Leadership Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/what-is-a-thought-leadership-podcast/) **Published:** March 23, 2026 **Author:** Darla Fields **Content:** # What Is a Thought Leadership Podcast? ### A thought leadership podcast helps position you as the person creating the ideas others talk about. ## The Most Effective Way to Turn Your Knowledge into Authority. A thought leadership podcast is the business podcast blueprint people think about when they have a lot of IP, a lot of ideas, and a lot of content. They may have theories, systems, and methodologies that are fantastic, but not enough people know about them yet. Those ideas need to get out into the world under your brand as quickly as possible. It can be very easy to sit on giant mountains of really important content. When you keep it to yourself, or only share it with your clients, it isn’t doing nearly as much work as it could and should, and it doesn’t allow you to be treated as the expert you are. A thought leader isn’t someone who simply participates in their industry. A thought leader is someone who says the things, does the things, and creates the innovations that other people start talking about. Having a podcast designed for thought leadership is a way to make sure that people interested in your topic understand that you are one of the people creating the ideas others are discussing. In a podcast, this can be interesting because it requires strategic thinking about who you’re talking to and how. Often you’ll be doing solo episodes where you talk through ideas yourself. And instead of traditional interviews, you may be having conversations with peers or equals. In a thought leadership show, it’s important that you are clearly positioned as the thought leader, and that the spotlight is shining on you at least half of the time. So if you want to get your ideas out into the world – not necessarily to become famous through your podcast – but to share your information and IP in a consistent and easy-to-consume way, a thought leadership podcast is a powerful way to do it. ## Watch: What Is a Thought Leadership Podcast? ### More Podcast Questions? More Podcast Answers! [What Is an Audience Engagement Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/what-is-an-audience-engagement-podcast/) [What Is a Relationship Building Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/what-is-a-relationship-building-podcast/) [Do I Really Need Professional Editing for My Podcast? ](https://onestonecreative.net/do-i-really-need-professional-editing-for-my-podcast/) # Ready for the Next Level? If you’re wondering: *is my podcast actually doing what I need it to? Am I measuring the right things? Could I be getting more out of the time and money I’m already putting in?* then you might want to grab a FREE copy of [Podcasting for Business](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book)! Podcasting for Business outlines the entire Business Podcast Blueprints methdology and goes into detail about how to optimize your show for 15 different business outcomes, from more referral partners to a shorter sales cycle. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/PFB-Book-Mockups.png "PFB Book Mockups") # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. # Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet – and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you’re ready to launch or level up your show, let’s talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) # Keep Learning: ## [Podcast Show Notes](https://onestonecreative.net/podcast-show-notes/) Podcast Show NotesProbably the most underused part of your show.What are Podcast Show Notes?Podacst Show Notes are the... **Categories:** Articles --- ### [What Is an Audience Engagement Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/what-is-an-audience-engagement-podcast/) **Published:** March 21, 2026 **Author:** Darla Fields **Content:** # What Is an Audience Engagement Podcast? ### Do you wish that more people would buy from you faster? Then you need an audience engagement podcast. ## Shortcut the Buying Process with an Audience Engagement Podcast One of our most popular business podcast blueprints is audience engagement. When you first hear that term, you might think it means engaging a really big audience. But what does that actually mean? What it really means is nurturing, connecting with, and engaging people who are already aware of you in some way. Maybe they’ve been following you for years, they’re on your email list, or they’re current or past clients. Maybe they heard you give a keynote speech or appear as a guest on another podcast, and your podcast becomes the first kind of personal one-to-one connection they have with you. Or maybe they’re leads, website visitors, or people discovering you for the first time, and your podcast becomes the way they get to know you. What makes an audience engagement podcast so powerful is that it can shortcut the process of building know, like, and trust that you’re already trying to create in other ways. You’re getting to know people, putting out great content, offering advice, and solving real problems. Your podcast condenses that into something people can consume conveniently. They can understand how you think, how you work, what you do, who you help, and who you don’t. And they can self-select in or out of working with you. Optimising a show for audience engagement means thinking about who the different people are who are entering your orbit and what they need to make a decision about working with you. When you design your podcast with audience engagement in mind, you make it much easier for people to decide they want to talk to you and you will give them a really great way to do that. ## Watch: What Is an Audience Engagement Podcast? ### More Podcast Questions? More Podcast Answers! [What Is a Relationship Building Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/what-is-a-relationship-building-podcast/) [Do I Really Need Professional Editing for My Podcast? ](https://onestonecreative.net/do-i-really-need-professional-editing-for-my-podcast/) [Should My Podcast Have Its Own Website?](https://onestonecreative.net/should-my-podcast-have-its-own-website/) # Ready for the Next Level? If you’re wondering: *is my podcast actually doing what I need it to? Am I measuring the right things? Could I be getting more out of the time and money I’m already putting in?* then you might want to grab a FREE copy of [Podcasting for Business](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book)! Podcasting for Business outlines the entire Business Podcast Blueprints methdology and goes into detail about how to optimize your show for 15 different business outcomes, from more referral partners to a shorter sales cycle. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/PFB-Book-Mockups.png "PFB Book Mockups") # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. # Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet – and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you’re ready to launch or level up your show, let’s talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) # Keep Learning: ## [Podcast Show Notes](https://onestonecreative.net/podcast-show-notes/) Podcast Show NotesProbably the most underused part of your show.What are Podcast Show Notes?Podacst Show Notes are the... **Categories:** Articles --- ### [What Is a Relationship Building Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/what-is-a-relationship-building-podcast/) **Published:** March 18, 2026 **Author:** Darla Fields **Content:** # What Is a Relationship Building Podcast? ### If you need connections with others to grow your business, then you want a relationship-building podcast. ## Grow Your Business with a Relationship Building Podcast A relationship-building podcast is one of the business podcast blueprints. It’s a show where the primary reason for existing – the most important thing it does – is giving you as the host time to build, nurture, and develop relationships with your guests. There can be a lot of different reasons you want to build these relationships. Maybe you’re entering a new market segment or starting a new business and you need a lot of new connections in that space quickly. Your podcast can get them for you. Maybe you’re looking to build partnerships, collaborate on projects, or work with other people in different ways. Your podcast can make that happen. Or maybe you want to play a longer-term strategy, like account-based marketing, where you talk to potential clients about their problems and keep yourself top of mind with them through the process of recording. Over time, as you reshare those episodes again and again, your relationship-building podcast continues supporting those connections. So if, where you are in your business right now, the thing that could help you most is building more relationships with other people, then that’s what you should prioritise in your podcast. Focus on building those relationships, making those connections, and optimising your podcast process to make that as easy as possible. ## Watch: What Is a Relationship Building Podcast? ### More Podcast Questions? More Podcast Answers! [Do I Really Need Professional Editing for My Podcast? ](https://onestonecreative.net/do-i-really-need-professional-editing-for-my-podcast/) [Should My Podcast Have Its Own Website?](https://onestonecreative.net/should-my-podcast-have-its-own-website/) [What Is a Podcast Host?](https://onestonecreative.net/what-is-a-podcast-host/) # Ready for the Next Level? If you’re wondering: *is my podcast actually doing what I need it to? Am I measuring the right things? Could I be getting more out of the time and money I’m already putting in?* then you might want to grab a FREE copy of [Podcasting for Business](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book)! Podcasting for Business outlines the entire Business Podcast Blueprints methdology and goes into detail about how to optimize your show for 15 different business outcomes, from more referral partners to a shorter sales cycle. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/PFB-Book-Mockups.png "PFB Book Mockups") # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. # Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet – and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you’re ready to launch or level up your show, let’s talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) # Keep Learning: ## [Podcast Show Notes](https://onestonecreative.net/podcast-show-notes/) Podcast Show NotesProbably the most underused part of your show.What are Podcast Show Notes?Podacst Show Notes are the... **Categories:** Articles --- ### [Do I Really Need Professional Editing for My Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/do-i-really-need-professional-editing-for-my-podcast/) **Published:** March 16, 2026 **Author:** Darla Fields **Content:** # Do I Really Need Professional Editing for My Podcast? ### Only if you really need to sound professional. ## Professional Podcast Editing Raises the Bar for Your Show Let’s be honest, there are a lot of expenses involved with starting a podcast, whether it’s audio or video. You’ve got to figure out the content, find guests if you have them, get the infrastructure, pay for hosting, probably pay for recording. And on top of that, now you’ve also got to pay for professional editing, and that can be pretty expensive. There’s a wide range of prices you could pay to have your audio or video edited. From a couple hundred dollars an episode, up to many hundreds or even thousands, depending on the complexity of the work. Deciding where to invest your budget for your podcast is challenging. For most people, though, it is worth getting professional editing. Having someone who can listen for audio issues – if people are speaking at different volumes, if there are mistakes that need to be taken out, or if you’ve got background noise — all of these things a professional editor can take care of. You should get that done if it’s important for you to be putting a really good professional face forward. It’s not that speaking naturally isn’t valuable or interesting. For some use cases you can go pretty light with the editing and just have the basics taken care of. If you already have an audience who are really fans of your work and they’re going to love anything you do, and you just want more time with them, then you can skimp on the editing a little bit. You can do lives or push things out fairly raw. People just want that time with you, and that’s great. But if you’re trying to establish thought leadership, or if you’re trying to build relationships with your guests, how the episodes are edited is going to reflect on you. It’s going to reflect on your brand and influence what people think about what you’re saying. The days of being able to just turn on your mic and release whatever comes out and still be taken seriously are mostly past. There’s so much competition now, and so many shows are really well edited. If people have the choice between something where the volume is good, where it sounds clean and polished, and something that isn’t, they’re going to choose the better one – even if your content is better. So if you need to look a certain way, or create a certain impression with your brand or with your guests, then investing in editing is something you’ll want to prioritise as soon as possible. If you’ve already got that brand, the audience, and the awareness, you can be a little more flexible with where you’re putting that budget to start. But good editing should still be on the list. ## Watch: Do I Really Need Professional Editing for My Podcast? ### More Podcast Questions? More Podcast Answers! [Should My Podcast Have Its Own Website?](https://onestonecreative.net/should-my-podcast-have-its-own-website/) [What Is a Podcast Host?](https://onestonecreative.net/what-is-a-podcast-host/) [Should Your Podcast Include a Transcript?](https://onestonecreative.net/should-your-podcast-include-a-transcript/) # Ready for the Next Level? If you’re wondering: *is my podcast actually doing what I need it to? Am I measuring the right things? Could I be getting more out of the time and money I’m already putting in?* then you might want to grab a FREE copy of [Podcasting for Business](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book)! Podcasting for Business outlines the entire Business Podcast Blueprints methdology and goes into detail about how to optimize your show for 15 different business outcomes, from more referral partners to a shorter sales cycle. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/PFB-Book-Mockups.png "PFB Book Mockups") # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. # Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet – and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you’re ready to launch or level up your show, let’s talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) # Keep Learning: ## [Podcast Show Notes](https://onestonecreative.net/podcast-show-notes/) Podcast Show NotesProbably the most underused part of your show.What are Podcast Show Notes?Podacst Show Notes are the... **Categories:** Articles --- ### [Should My Podcast Have Its Own Website?](https://onestonecreative.net/should-my-podcast-have-its-own-website/) **Published:** March 14, 2026 **Author:** Darla Fields **Content:** # Should My Podcast Have Its Own Website? ### Almost certainly not. ## A Separate Website Is Rarely Required for Your Podcast Should your podcast have its own website? Almost certainly not. As you’re starting to plan a new show, one of the things you’ll think about is where on the internet your podcast is going to live. Where are you going to put the episodes? What are you going to point people to when you tell them, “Hey, I’ve got a podcast, you should listen to it?” You’ll have different pages available to you. Your podcast host will have a page where your podcast lives. You’ll have your Apple and Spotify pages. But many people also wonder if they should have a specific website designed just for their podcast to hold all of their episodes and all of the podcast-related content. Those can be really helpful if you don’t already have a business website where you’re doing other things, sharing information, and hosting your other content. For most business owners, you want to integrate your podcast into the website you already have. That’s where you want to send people instead of Apple, Spotify, or any other platforms. You want listeners going to your website to consume your content so that when they decide, “Hey, I really like what I’m hearing or seeing. I need to get on the phone with these people,” they’re already in the right place. They can opt in, call you, read another blog post, or find out about your services. It’s all in the environment that you already own. There might be cases where you don’t want your podcast associated with your main business website. If it’s a side project, something experimental, or a little off-brand, you might want a new domain and a separate website to keep some distance between those parts of your business. But if your podcast is connected to what you generally do for work, you want everything in one place as much as possible. Investing time, money, and infrastructure in building a whole new site usually isn’t worth the effort. It could actually prevent you from generating sales, growing your email list, or achieving the other goals you hope your podcast will support. ## Watch: Should My Podcast Have Its Own Website? ### More Podcast Questions? More Podcast Answers! [What Is a Podcast Host?](https://onestonecreative.net/what-is-a-podcast-host/) [Should Your Podcast Include a Transcript?](https://onestonecreative.net/should-your-podcast-include-a-transcript/) [What Kind of Music Can I Use in My Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/what-kind-of-music-can-i-use-in-my-podcast/) # Ready for the Next Level? If you’re wondering: *is my podcast actually doing what I need it to? Am I measuring the right things? Could I be getting more out of the time and money I’m already putting in?* then you might want to grab a FREE copy of [Podcasting for Business](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book)! Podcasting for Business outlines the entire Business Podcast Blueprints methdology and goes into detail about how to optimize your show for 15 different business outcomes, from more referral partners to a shorter sales cycle. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/PFB-Book-Mockups.png "PFB Book Mockups") # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. # Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet – and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you’re ready to launch or level up your show, let’s talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) # Keep Learning: ## [Podcast Show Notes](https://onestonecreative.net/podcast-show-notes/) Podcast Show NotesProbably the most underused part of your show.What are Podcast Show Notes?Podacst Show Notes are the... **Categories:** Articles --- ### [What Is a Podcast Host?](https://onestonecreative.net/what-is-a-podcast-host/) **Published:** March 11, 2026 **Author:** Darla Fields **Content:** # What Is a Podcast Host? ### It turns out a podcast host is two different things. ## A Podcast Host Is Not Just a Human Talking In the 20-odd years since podcasting has been around, there is one piece of confusing nomenclature that I am baffled no one has proposed a clear solution for it yet. A podcast host is two different things. First, it is the talent: the warm, welcoming person who invites you to the show, shares the information, asks the interview questions, or delivers the monologue. I am the host of the *Podcasting for Business Q&A* show. That is probably the first thing that comes to mind when you think about what a podcast host is. But if you’re starting to actually plan and develop your own show, you will soon realize there is another type of host you need to be aware of. The podcast host, in the technical or technological sense, is the service on the internet where you upload your audio. That service makes the connection to the different podcast players like Apple, Spotify, and Amazon, and communicates with those platforms via an RSS feed. It’s where you put the audio, where you put the show notes, and where you put the artwork if you have it. If you have a sponsorship strategy, it’s also where you manage the different ads that play on the podcast. So the host is basically the online home and main source of your podcast. It’s where you add the content and make any changes, and where all the other platforms go to pull new information from. In that sense, it’s just as important as the human host, and for some reason it’s still called the same thing. ## Watch: What Is a Podcast Host? ### More Podcast Questions? More Podcast Answers! [Should Your Podcast Include a Transcript?](https://onestonecreative.net/should-your-podcast-include-a-transcript/) [What Kind of Music Can I Use in My Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/what-kind-of-music-can-i-use-in-my-podcast/) [Should I Try to Get Sponsors for My Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/should-i-try-to-get-sponsors-for-my-podcast/) # Ready for the Next Level? If you’re wondering: *is my podcast actually doing what I need it to? Am I measuring the right things? Could I be getting more out of the time and money I’m already putting in?* then you might want to grab a FREE copy of [Podcasting for Business](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book)! Podcasting for Business outlines the entire Business Podcast Blueprints methdology and goes into detail about how to optimize your show for 15 different business outcomes, from more referral partners to a shorter sales cycle. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/PFB-Book-Mockups.png "PFB Book Mockups") # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. # Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet – and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you’re ready to launch or level up your show, let’s talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) # Keep Learning: ## [Podcast Show Notes](https://onestonecreative.net/podcast-show-notes/) Podcast Show NotesProbably the most underused part of your show.What are Podcast Show Notes?Podacst Show Notes are the... **Categories:** Articles --- ### [Should Your Podcast Include a Transcript?](https://onestonecreative.net/should-your-podcast-include-a-transcript/) **Published:** March 11, 2026 **Author:** Darla Fields **Content:** # Should Your Podcast Include a Transcript? ### If your podcast is in audio or video, why would you want a transcript to go along with it? ## Increase Your Podcast’s Discoverability with a Transcript If your podcast is in audio or video, why would you want a transcript to go along with it? If you’ve got a podcast that you’ve been doing for a while and you always have your audio or video episodes, having a transcript as well, especially one that is edited by a human, might feel like an excessive amount of work for an unclear amount of value. But there’s some really good reasons you might wanna consider having a written version of your podcast as well. Not the least of which is that almost 60 % of the top 100 business podcasts do include a transcript with their finished episodes. Having a transcript adds a whole new method of communication to your podcast. You’ve got your audio, your video, and now you’ve also got the written word. And there’s a lot of reasons this can be really valuable for your business. The first of which is accessibility. There are some people who don’t or can’t listen. Or who don’t or can’t watch, and who are going to be able to read or consume the written word in a way that’s gonna be easier for them. And if you do want to reach as many people as possible, then making it accessible in as many versions as possible is absolutely the way to go. And accessibility, of course, is most important for humans, but it’s also important for the internet infrastructure that we find ourselves in. Text is very often and for many tools easier to use, to search, to source and to cite by different generative AI tools, Google search robots or whoever else on the internet is looking to find and refer your content. When you have it organized in your audio, video and text, you’re making it as easy as possible for as many people as possible to find your show. So if search discoverability, repurposing and accessibility are goals for your podcast, then having a fully edited transcript can be a really valuable addition. And if you’ve got other things that are more important, for example just getting the content out there, relationship building or networking, and the written searchability aspect isn’t as important – even an unedited transcript is going to possibly push you over the line to be discovered a little bit more. So it’s usually worth investing in one way or the other. ## Watch: Should Your Podcast Include a Transcript? ### More Podcast Questions? More Podcast Answers! [What Kind of Music Can I Use in My Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/what-kind-of-music-can-i-use-in-my-podcast/) [Should I Try to Get Sponsors for My Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/should-i-try-to-get-sponsors-for-my-podcast/) [When Are Podcast Seasons a Good Idea?](https://onestonecreative.net/when-are-podcast-seasons-a-good-idea/) # Ready for the Next Level? If you’re wondering: *is my podcast actually doing what I need it to? Am I measuring the right things? Could I be getting more out of the time and money I’m already putting in?* then you might want to grab a FREE copy of [Podcasting for Business](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book)! Podcasting for Business outlines the entire Business Podcast Blueprints methdology and goes into detail about how to optimize your show for 15 different business outcomes, from more referral partners to a shorter sales cycle. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/PFB-Book-Mockups.png "PFB Book Mockups") # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. # Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet – and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you’re ready to launch or level up your show, let’s talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) # Keep Learning: ## [Podcast Show Notes](https://onestonecreative.net/podcast-show-notes/) Podcast Show NotesProbably the most underused part of your show.What are Podcast Show Notes?Podacst Show Notes are the... **Categories:** Articles --- ### [What Kind of Music Can I Use in My Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/what-kind-of-music-can-i-use-in-my-podcast/) **Published:** March 8, 2026 **Author:** Darla Fields **Content:** # What Kind of Music Can I Use in My Podcast? ### There is one risk you should absolutely not take with your podcast. ## Choosing the Wrong Music for Your Podcast Is Risky Something I really strongly caution people against in their podcast is using licensed and copy written materials in their final productions. It can be really tempting to want to use a little bit of a popular song, something that just absolutely catches the vibe, or a clip of a video that really illustrates the point that you want to make. But when you are starting to dabble in playing with licensed and copyrighted materials, you are putting yourself at risk of DMC takedowns, having your content/account flagged and all other manners of legal issues. Now, I am not a lawyer and this is not legal advice, but I do feel pretty confident in saying – it is better to be safe than sorry when it comes to copy written material. And there are lots of royalty free options available. And lots of options for easily licensable music, sound effects, images and videos. All of these things are available in different marketplaces, where you can get an account, or you can pay for credits, and then get content that you do have the legal right to use. And that’s going to completely eliminate the worries of having your videos taken down, your accounts flagged and all of those things. If you are absolutely set on having a show where you are dealing with copy written media – your next call should be to an IP lawyer or a marketplace that does license the exact specific media that you want to use – from the owners of those copyrights/products. This is your professional reputation. It is also your access to the different platforms that you’re using. So this is an area where you really want to be careful and always on the side of caution when it comes to copyright materials. And if you are working with a producer, or you’re signed on with an agency who is handling the different music, sound, video and image elements of your show, they need to be accountable for this as well. Anything that is used in your podcast that they didn’t create manually, absolutely from scratch, they should be able to provide a license for. And you should have copies of those licenses that you’re able to keep for your own records in case it ever does come up. ## Watch: What Kind of Music Can I Use in My Podcast? ### More Podcast Questions? More Podcast Answers! [Should I Try to Get Sponsors for My Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/should-i-try-to-get-sponsors-for-my-podcast/) [When Are Podcast Seasons a Good Idea?](https://onestonecreative.net/when-are-podcast-seasons-a-good-idea/) [Where Should CTA’s be in a Podcast Episode?](https://onestonecreative.net/where-should-ctas-be-in-a-podcast-episode/) # Ready for the Next Level? If you’re wondering: *is my podcast actually doing what I need it to? Am I measuring the right things? Could I be getting more out of the time and money I’m already putting in?* then you might want to grab a FREE copy of [Podcasting for Business](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book)! Podcasting for Business outlines the entire Business Podcast Blueprints methdology and goes into detail about how to optimize your show for 15 different business outcomes, from more referral partners to a shorter sales cycle. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/PFB-Book-Mockups.png "PFB Book Mockups") # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. # Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet – and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you’re ready to launch or level up your show, let’s talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) # Keep Learning: ## [Podcast Show Notes](https://onestonecreative.net/podcast-show-notes/) Podcast Show NotesProbably the most underused part of your show.What are Podcast Show Notes?Podacst Show Notes are the... **Categories:** Articles --- ### [Should I Try to Get Sponsors for My Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/should-i-try-to-get-sponsors-for-my-podcast/) **Published:** March 4, 2026 **Author:** Darla Fields **Content:** # Should I Try to Get Sponsors for My Podcast? ### For most businesses, most of the time, trying to get sponsors for the podcast is one of the biggest mistakes they’re going to make in the whole project. ## Most of the Time Chasing Sponsors Is the Wrong Goal. It’s a really common story. Company thinks – I’m going to start a podcast. It’s going to be great. We’re going to build our audience. Everyone’s going to listen to it. We’re going to get sponsors that are going to cover the cost of production, we’re going to get clients from it, and we’re going to just make money hand over fist with this media that we’re creating. And it’s a beautiful dream. I understand it. I really get the appeal. But it’s almost never going to happen for a business podcast. The shows that are sponsored were designed to be sponsored. They were set from the ground up to build big audiences and connect those audiences with companies that were willing to pay for the privilege. And there was usually a lot of planning, a lot of budget, and more staff than you would imagine involved in that process. For most smaller business owners, that doesn’t make sense. And it’s for one really, really, really important reason – you already have a business. You don’t need another one. Your business is the primary monetization strategy for your podcast, and the podcast is just a tool to help you achieve it. When you have products and services that you sell, or maybe a speaking career or books that you want to make available, these are the things that are really important for you to get in front of other people. Your podcast is just one of the ways that you’re doing it, not something that you monetize in itself. The sponsorship math is not very tilted in favor of smaller businesses that don’t have existing, really huge audiences. When you get a sponsor – whether it’s through a personal negotiation or ads through a marketplace – you’re going to be getting something in the range of typically $15 to $30 per thousand downloads. And those are great rates. If you can get them. But when you look at what your actual downloads are, if you’re getting $2,000 – $3,000 a month, that’s not a lot of money for your downloads and all of that work that you’re putting in. And in order to get the audience size that is going to command the prices, or have the scale where that money is going to make sense, is basically another full time job. You’ve already got a business to run that is ideally already making money. So what you want to do, instead of trying to get sponsors for your podcast, is think about the different ways that your podcast can help make your business better, more efficient, and more profitable. And ultimately, that is going to make you a lot more money, a lot faster, than trying to build a whole new revenue generating stream from the ground up in a hyper competitive marketplace. ## Watch: Should I Try to Get Sponsors for My Podcast? ### More Podcast Questions? More Podcast Answers! [When Are Podcast Seasons a Good Idea?](https://youtu.be/kvMcuSTYeQc) [Where Should CTA’s be in a Podcast Episode?](https://onestonecreative.net/where-should-ctas-be-in-a-podcast-episode/) [How Much Time Will a Weekly Podcast Take Me?](https://onestonecreative.net/how-much-time-will-a-weekly-podcast-take-me/) # Ready for the Next Level? If you’re wondering: *is my podcast actually doing what I need it to? Am I measuring the right things? Could I be getting more out of the time and money I’m already putting in?* then you might want to grab a FREE copy of [Podcasting for Business](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book)! Podcasting for Business outlines the entire Business Podcast Blueprints methdology and goes into detail about how to optimize your show for 15 different business outcomes, from more referral partners to a shorter sales cycle. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/PFB-Book-Mockups.png "PFB Book Mockups") # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. # Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet – and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you’re ready to launch or level up your show, let’s talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) # Keep Learning: ## [Podcast Show Notes](https://onestonecreative.net/podcast-show-notes/) Podcast Show NotesProbably the most underused part of your show.What are Podcast Show Notes?Podacst Show Notes are the... **Categories:** Articles --- ### [When Are Podcast Seasons a Good Idea?](https://onestonecreative.net/when-are-podcast-seasons-a-good-idea/) **Published:** March 2, 2026 **Author:** Darla Fields **Content:** # When Are Podcast Seasons a Good Idea? ### Not everybody needs to podcast forever. ## Podcast Seasons Make Sense for Some Business Goals So when you think of a podcast, you’re probably going to imagine like the proto podcast or the Erb podcast, which is a weekly release. Maybe it’s a host and a guest talking for about 45 minutes every Tuesday for the rest of time. And that is the most common type of podcast. Most podcasts that we see are interview podcasts, where the host is talking to a guest about a topic of mutual interest and of interest to the audience, and it releases on a weekly or more often basis. That’s great. It’s a really good, really effective cadence to be releasing your episodes at. It’s enough time and enough releases to get traction quickly and to build momentum with your audience. But it’s not so much that it takes over your complete entire workweek. That said, it can be too much for a lot of business owners. A weekly release schedule can be a little grueling, especially at the beginning when you’re getting used to things. And knowing that it’s a project that’s going to go on and on and on, without an end, also has its own sort of wariness attached to it. I know sometimes I think about a podcast that might go on forever, and it feels like – “Maybe you’d better not start that. There’s other things going on.” I’ve definitely had that feeling. Maybe you’ve had too. And something that is really interesting about podcasting is that they are just tools. If something about a podcast doesn’t work for you or for your business, you don’t have to do it. And that includes having a weekly release schedule. Something that we found over the years that we’ve been producing, is that a lot of businesses need maybe 12 episodes to do a couple of things. To explain some things, share some stories, get some objections out of the way, and share some important information that their future clients are really going to need. And that’s all they need. That gets the job done. And so releasing a season of podcast episodes is a great way to test the waters. 6, 10, 12 episodes of a podcast are going to do some heavy lifting in your business. It’s content you’re going to use again, that you’re going to refer back to, that people can use. It gets you the title of podcaster. If you’re a guest on other shows, it gets you a chance to say – ”now subscribe to my own podcast while you’re at it, love to have you there”. And it can really help you in a lot of different ways, like your sales enablement and your relationship building with new leads. Podcasts are great for that. And a season can often do as much work as an ongoing podcast will do, depending on your business goals. Now, the caveat here is that if you’re podcasting for relationship building, you pretty much got to be ongoing. You’re never not going to need to do more networking or get more connections into your orbit. But for a lot of other business goals a season, either one or an annual one, or a couple of seasons a year, is going to be plenty. And if you are not sure that podcasting is going to be a fit for you, because the truth is you might try it and hate it – there’s a really big difference – conceptually, energetically and professionally – between planning and completing a podcast season of 12 episodes, and starting a project that’s meant to be ongoing and then quitting. So test the waters with the season, see if it fits your needs, see if you like it. And then make a decision, after that first season, about whether or not you want to go on. ## Watch: When Are Podcast Seasons a Good Idea? ### More Podcast Questions? More Podcast Answers! [Where Should CTA’s be in a Podcast Episode?](https://onestonecreative.net/where-should-ctas-be-in-a-podcast-episode/) [How Much Time Will a Weekly Podcast Take Me?](https://onestonecreative.net/how-much-time-will-a-weekly-podcast-take-me/) [Does My Podcast Need to be Video?](https://onestonecreative.net/does-my-podcast-need-to-be-video/) # Ready for the Next Level? If you’re wondering: *is my podcast actually doing what I need it to? Am I measuring the right things? Could I be getting more out of the time and money I’m already putting in?* then you might want to grab a FREE copy of [Podcasting for Business](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book)! Podcasting for Business outlines the entire Business Podcast Blueprints methdology and goes into detail about how to optimize your show for 15 different business outcomes, from more referral partners to a shorter sales cycle. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/PFB-Book-Mockups.png "PFB Book Mockups") # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. # Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet – and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you’re ready to launch or level up your show, let’s talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) # Keep Learning: ## [Podcast Show Notes](https://onestonecreative.net/podcast-show-notes/) Podcast Show NotesProbably the most underused part of your show.What are Podcast Show Notes?Podacst Show Notes are the... **Categories:** Articles --- ### [Podcast Episode CTA's](https://onestonecreative.net/podcast-episode-ctas/) **Published:** February 28, 2026 **Author:** Darla Fields **Content:** # Where Should CTA’s be in a Podcast Episode? ### If you have just one call to action in your podcast and it is at the end, you might be missing out on some important conversions from your show. ## You Need More Than One CTA in Your Podcast Calls to action are important to have in pretty much any piece of marketing copy that you put out into the world. That’s as true for your podcast as it is for your blog post and your sales pages and everything else. After somebody consumes the content that you’ve created for them, you usually want them to *do something*. What you want them to do is going vary based on your business and your goals, and the thing that you ask them to do should be different at the different places in your podcast. ### **Possible CTA Placements** There are a vareity of places you can have a call to action in your show, and different ones work best in different places. High level we’ve got: - Pre-Rolls - Welcome - Body/Ad Spots - Pre-Outro - Sign Off Let’s look at each of these. You can have a ***pre-roll*** where you let some people know what’s going on at the beginning of the show. Maybe if you’ve got a time sensitive event – that can be really interesting to put as a pre-roll that plays on all of your episodes. Then you’ve got your ***welcome*** to your audience, maybe after your intro or after you’ve welcomed the guests and you say: ”Hello, everyone. Thank you for joining us here on the show”. This can be a great time to ask for something small and easy, like: ”Hey, make sure you don’t miss any episodes because they’re awesome. Subscribe on your favorite platform.” Then you’ll have the ***body*** of the episode. If you have ads and sponsors there, you can also (or instead of!) have a calls to action, ads or promotions for your own things tha require a little more discussion or information. The most common place for a CTA is the one that feels the most natural – the end. You’ve got two spots to have a call to action towards the end of your show. There is the ***pre-outro*** call to action, and that’s when you’re saying goodbye to your guest or you’re wrapping up your final thoughts if it’s a solo show. That is a great, and the most popular place to ask for something, ot tell people about something. And then you’ve got the very end of the ***sign off*** – that’s typically the ”Share and subscribe, leave a rating and review” that you hear at the end of episodes. When we are conducting the [State of Business Podcasting Report](https://onestonecreative.net/report), we look at the different places CTAs can be and what they are. Over the year’s we’ve been doing this, we’ve noticed something really interesting. ### **The bigger the ask, the more embedded in the content it should be.** The CTA’s at the beginning and the very end of your show – the welcome and signoff – should be easy for someone to do. They should be frictionless. It should be subscribe. It should be share. It should be leave a rating and review. Something that people may or may not do. And it’s not a *huge* deal to you whether or not they do it. But if you’ve got something big like a new course, a book launch or an event you want people to attend – this is something that you’re going to want to embed more in the content and make more personal. Or, if it’s time sensitve and you want to make sure absolutely everyone hears it, then it can be a pre-roll. You also want to do it *before* the very end of the show (the signoff) when a lot of people have already clicked off or mentally moved on to the next thing that they’re doing anyway. So make sure that you’ve got calls to action at different points within your episodes. You can invite people to join your email list in your welcome, talk about your book launch in a body-ad, and ask for ratings and reviews in your signoff. Now, you might be thinking: ”Right, wait a second, I don’t want to repeat myself too much. I don’t want to come off as completely salesy.” Don’t worry about it. You don’t want to make every other thing you say a call to action, of course, but you can mention 2 or 3 different things over the course of a 40 minute episode without sounding like a broken record. And if you’re so shy that you don’t want to bother people with promoting your own stuff and sharing your own activities and getting people to connect with you in different ways – well, then they’re not going to know you want them to do it. You have to ask for what you want. No one is going to feel obligated – if they don’t want to do it – they won’t. It is *perfectly* acceptable in the show that you own and pay for and produce to talk about your own stuff. ## Watch: Where Should CTA’s be in a Podcast Episode? ### More Podcast Questions? More Podcast Answers! [How Much Time Will a Weekly Podcast Take Me?](https://onestonecreative.net/how-much-time-will-a-weekly-podcast-take-me/) [Does My Podcast Need to be Video?](https://onestonecreative.net/does-my-podcast-need-to-be-video/) [When Is a Good Time of the Year to Launch a Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/when-is-a-good-time-of-the-year-to-launch-a-podcast/) # Ready for the Next Level? If you’re wondering: *is my podcast actually doing what I need it to? Am I measuring the right things? Could I be getting more out of the time and money I’m already putting in?* then you might want to grab a FREE copy of [Podcasting for Business](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book)! Podcasting for Business outlines the entire Business Podcast Blueprints methdology and goes into detail about how to optimize your show for 15 different business outcomes, from more referral partners to a shorter sales cycle. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/PFB-Book-Mockups.png "PFB Book Mockups") # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. # Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet – and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you’re ready to launch or level up your show, let’s talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) # Keep Learning: ## [Podcast Show Notes](https://onestonecreative.net/podcast-show-notes/) Podcast Show NotesProbably the most underused part of your show.What are Podcast Show Notes?Podacst Show Notes are the... **Categories:** Articles --- ### [How Much Time Will a Weekly Podcast Take Me?](https://onestonecreative.net/how-much-time-will-a-weekly-podcast-take-me/) **Published:** February 25, 2026 **Author:** Darla Fields **Content:** # How Much Time Will a Weekly Podcast Take Me? ### Before you start podcasting, there’s one thing that you really need to know, and that is how much time it’s actually going to take you. ## Podcast Production Time Depends on Many Things So there can be a huge variance in the amount of time that you, as the host, are going to spend on a podcast episode every week. And what goes into that calculation is going to be the type of episode that it is. Do you have guests? Are you doing solo? Are you doing video? Are you doing audio only? Each of those is going to change the amount of time it takes. Another thing you’re going to have to consider is how much preparation you need to do for every single episode. Do you need to find an invite a guest? You need to research them? Do you need to read a book? Do you need to organize your thoughts? Do you need to write a script? These are all things that can alter how long the process is going to take, and some of them you can hand off and have other people support you with, some things you are going to have to do yourself. So for an example, let’s look at a weekly interview show. This is one of the most popular and common types of podcasts. It’s going to be great for your business. How long is it realistically going to take? For every episode, you can assume that you’re going to have to find and invite a guest. That’s probably going to take you, let’s say conservatively, half an hour to 45 minutes to find someone really good, write the nice personal invitation and then follow up and actually do the scheduling with them. Then you’re probably going to want to prep. You’re going to want to look at their body of work. What have they published recently? What are they doing on socials? What are the interesting questions you want to ask them? If you want bonus points, check out some other podcasts they’ve been on so that you’re not repeating everything for the 18th time. That you can assume is probably going to take up to about an hour, maybe an hour and a half. And it’s something that you can definitely get team member support with, if you have a team available to help you with that kind of thing. Then there’s going to be the recording itself. And that is going to be probably about 20% longer than your finished episodes are going to be. So if you’re going to be aiming for a 30 minute episode, plan for about 40 minutes of pre and post show chatter, and then the actual conversation itself. After the episode you’re going want to spend a little bit of time following up with a guest saying thank you, communicating with your production team, whoever’s doing the editing. Some people are doing the editing themselves. And for that you can probably expect to spend double or triple the length of the episode on editing it down into a proper show. That time will decrease as you get more skills. And then it comes to promotion. And that’s one of really the biggest variables when it comes to how much time you’re going to spend on your show, because you can spend an unlimited amount of time on promoting your show. But a good rule of thumb is to spend as much time promoting each episode as you spend recording it. That’s going to be typically a good balance of time that you spend creating the content, and time you spend trying to share the content. Again, it’s something that a team or other professional vendors can help you with. So the best way to figure out how long things are really going to take for you on a regular basis is simply to do it. Do the first one. Do not count the time anything takes on the very first episode. Nail some processes down. Find out what works. Find out what doesn’t. Do it again for the second show. And that’s going to give you a good baseline for how long podcast episodes take. And you can usually shave that down over time as you get more comfortable with all of the elements of production. ## How Much Time Will a Weekly Podcast Take Me? ### More Podcast Questions? More Podcast Answers! [Does My Podcast Need to be Video?](https://onestonecreative.net/does-my-podcast-need-to-be-video/) [When Is a Good Time of the Year to Launch a Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/when-is-a-good-time-of-the-year-to-launch-a-podcast/) [Can I Do My Podcast Live?](https://onestonecreative.net/can-i-do-my-podcast-live/) # Ready for the Next Level? If you’re wondering: *is my podcast actually doing what I need it to? Am I measuring the right things? Could I be getting more out of the time and money I’m already putting in?* then you might want to grab a FREE copy of [Podcasting for Business](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book)! Podcasting for Business outlines the entire Business Podcast Blueprints methdology and goes into detail about how to optimize your show for 15 different business outcomes, from more referral partners to a shorter sales cycle. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/PFB-Book-Mockups.png "PFB Book Mockups") # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. # Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet – and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you’re ready to launch or level up your show, let’s talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) # Keep Learning: ## [Podcast Show Notes](https://onestonecreative.net/podcast-show-notes/) Podcast Show NotesProbably the most underused part of your show.What are Podcast Show Notes?Podacst Show Notes are the... **Categories:** Articles --- ### [Does My Podcast Need to be Video?](https://onestonecreative.net/does-my-podcast-need-to-be-video/) **Published:** February 24, 2026 **Author:** Darla Fields **Content:** # Does My Podcast Need to be Video? ### Okay, let’s talk about the video elephant in the room. ## When to Video Is a Good Idea for Your Podcast One of the things that made me the most angry and frustrated over my career as a producer was something that I learned the first time we did the State of Business Podcasting report. At that time, I was a very firm believer that podcasts were podcasts and they were audio, and that was good. And video was video, and they lived on YouTube and on Vimeo and other places, and that was good. But when I started doing the research and looking at the top business podcasts, the ones that do perform the best, the ones that get the most attention, the ones that are doing the best for the companies that run them – a really big percentage of them were also on video. And over the six years we’ve been doing the report, that number has climbed year after year. More and more podcasts are becoming video first, which means that they are designed, filmed and produced with video in mind and audio as a still important but not primary focus. What does that mean for you as a potential producer? Not much, to be completely honest. I’m still a big believer that if you want to do an audio only podcast, you can do an audio only podcast. In fact, I have an audio only podcast, the Business Podcast Spotlight. We record the video, but we don’t release the whole video of that episode. That’s different from what you’re watching right now, which is a different type of podcast – designed to be video first and it has different goals. That’s what it really comes down to. What are your goals for the podcast and is video the best way to achieve them, or can you get all of what you need with audio? Now that’s a big conversation. It’s something that is worth some time and doing some thinking about. If you’ve got a relationship building show for example, and the most important thing that you want to do with your podcast is just connect with other people – it doesn’t have to be on video. You can do that just fine with an audio only show. If you want to get a lot of conversions, and if you want to get a lot of audience engagement on different platforms, then the data pretty much does indicate that you want to have video, because that is the most engaging of the media types that we have available to us. It’s worth experimenting with. It’s worth trying. It’s worth trying different methods. It’s really different, which I can say from very personal experience, to try and record video by yourself alone and then doing it with someone, with having a producer to actually help you through the process. It makes a world of difference. And for me it was the difference between possible and impossible. So if you decide that video is the most effective way for you to reach your business goals, which of course is the reason that we’re doing this, then experiment with different methods to try and make it as easy on yourself as possible. ## Does My Podcast Need to be Video? ### More Podcast Questions? More Podcast Answers! [When Is a Good Time of the Year to Launch a Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/when-is-a-good-time-of-the-year-to-launch-a-podcast/) [Can I Do My Podcast Live?](https://onestonecreative.net/can-i-do-my-podcast-live/) [How Long Should Podcast Episodes Be?](https://onestonecreative.net/how-long-should-podcast-episodes-be/) # Ready for the Next Level? If you’re wondering: *is my podcast actually doing what I need it to? Am I measuring the right things? Could I be getting more out of the time and money I’m already putting in?* then you might want to grab a FREE copy of [Podcasting for Business](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book)! Podcasting for Business outlines the entire Business Podcast Blueprints methdology and goes into detail about how to optimize your show for 15 different business outcomes, from more referral partners to a shorter sales cycle. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/PFB-Book-Mockups.png "PFB Book Mockups") # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. # Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet – and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you’re ready to launch or level up your show, let’s talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) # Keep Learning: ## [Podcast Show Notes](https://onestonecreative.net/podcast-show-notes/) Podcast Show NotesProbably the most underused part of your show.What are Podcast Show Notes?Podacst Show Notes are the... **Categories:** Articles --- ### [When Is a Good Time of the Year to Launch a Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/when-is-a-good-time-of-the-year-to-launch-a-podcast/) **Published:** February 22, 2026 **Author:** Darla Fields **Content:** # When Is a Good Time of the Year to Launch a Podcast? ### As a producer, it pains me to say this, but there are times of the year when nobody cares about a podcast, not even yours. ## Picking the Right Time to Launch Your Podcast Does Matter So the first and most important consideration for when you’re launching a podcast is when does it work for your business? When does it work for you personally to have the time to prep and do all of the work that goes into starting, when you have the time to get the editing done and do promotion around it, and actually get it out into the world in a way that works with all of the other work that you have to do in a year. So before I say anything else, understand that this is consideration one. And if the best time to launch for you ends up being something that is not what I’m about to tell you, don’t worry about it. Launch when it makes sense. But that being said, we have noticed over the years that we have been producing podcasts that there are times when launches go better and there are times when launches go worse. One of the best times to launch a new podcast is at the beginning of the year. New me, new year, new show. The energy is really good and a lot of shows launch at that time. A lot of listeners are looking for something new to inspire them, to help them achieve their goals. It’s a great time to podcast. If you want to launch in January, hopefully you started back in November or December, but if you didn’t, that’s okay, because basically the whole first half of the year really is pretty good for launching podcast. The next most popular time after the January/February/New year is going to be the end of the school break for Western countries, so it’s going to be when school lets out. It’s May or June depending on where you live. And suddenly a lot of people have a lot more time. And that’s awesome. There’s that kind of the freedom, the excitement around schools being out. Even as we’re grown up, we still have that energy. That’s a really good time to launch a show. We have seen a lot of shows launch and that kind of April/May/June time slot. Less good is over the summer. August, July. It’s hot. People are bored. People are going on vacation. It can be hard to book with guests. Everyone’s got stuff going on. Not the best time of year to launch a new show. September? Same deal as in the spring. Back to school. Energy. It’s a great time to start a podcast. There’s so much going on, so exciting. And the idea of something new at that time of the year just feels appropriate. As we move towards the end of the year – that’s when I start telling people absolutely no go. I really do not like to see anybody launch a podcast between the end of November and the new year. People are busy. It’s the holidays. There’s just too much going on. It’s not a great time to launch. Now, not every podcast needs to have a big popular launch that a lot of people are paying attention to. And if that is you, if it’s not really important that a lot of people are going to be involved in your launch – you launch whenever you like. And as I said at the beginning, whenever works for you best personally is better than no launch at all. So if you’ve got the option – pick January, the spring or September. If you don’t need that kind of attention on your lunch – whatever works for you. ## Watch: When Is a Good Time of the Year to Launch a Podcast? ### More Podcast Questions? More Podcast Answers! [Can I Do My Podcast Live?](https://onestonecreative.net/can-i-do-my-podcast-live/) [How Long Should Podcast Episodes Be?](https://onestonecreative.net/how-long-should-podcast-episodes-be/) [What Do I Do If a Podcast Interview Is Terrible?](https://onestonecreative.net/what-do-i-do-if-a-podcast-interview-is-terrible/) # Ready for the Next Level? If you’re wondering: *is my podcast actually doing what I need it to? Am I measuring the right things? Could I be getting more out of the time and money I’m already putting in?* then you might want to grab a FREE copy of [Podcasting for Business](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book)! Podcasting for Business outlines the entire Business Podcast Blueprints methdology and goes into detail about how to optimize your show for 15 different business outcomes, from more referral partners to a shorter sales cycle. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/PFB-Book-Mockups.png "PFB Book Mockups") # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. # Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet – and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you’re ready to launch or level up your show, let’s talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) # Keep Learning: ## [Podcast Show Notes](https://onestonecreative.net/podcast-show-notes/) Podcast Show NotesProbably the most underused part of your show.What are Podcast Show Notes?Podacst Show Notes are the... **Categories:** Articles --- ### [Can I Do My Podcast Live?](https://onestonecreative.net/can-i-do-my-podcast-live/) **Published:** February 18, 2026 **Author:** Darla Fields **Content:** # Can I Do My Podcast Live? ### Doing your podcast live might feel really, really efficient, but there are some hidden downsides that you need to be aware of. ## Doing a Podcast Live is Possible… with the Right Energy The question of whether or not you can do your podcast live comes up pretty regularly when we’re chatting with prospective hosts. It usually sounds like this: “I want to do my podcast live so that I can engage my audience, get my content on different platforms at the same time, and have this really dynamic, easy process where I’m not going to have to do any editing and only prep once and only promote once, and that will be that.” Sounds awesome, eh? It really does *sound* like the most efficient way to podcast. And for some situations in some businesses it can be a really good option for a show. But there’s a danger you need to be aware of when you are doing a live stream and hoping to port that directly onto an RSS feed to become your podcast. ### Live Podcasting is about Two-Way Communication And that’s all about energy. When you’re doing a live stream, there is bi-directional communication happening between you and the people who are watching live. You may be having an actual live audience chat, or you just may know that there are people who are with you in the moment, listening to what you say and responding to what you say. And that’s really good energy. It’s fun. There can be fantastic business use cases for doing it. But what it doesn’t do is translate well when somebody is listening to it on their podcast app, when they’re at the gym or when they’re doing their dishes later. And that could be a really big part of your audience. It can actually be really alienating for somebody who is listening to something that was recorded live and is now being broadcast to a wider audience. It’s not really for them, and they can tell. Another issue you might run into, and this is especially true when you’ve got guests or a panel or a bunch of different people that you want to have on your show – the audio and video quality on a live recording. Unless everybody is using a professional mic and good recording platform and dialing in from places with great internet, the quality is going to be variable at best, and even in the best of circumstances, livetream recording quality is nowhere near as good as recording in a studio, virtual or otherwise. And that’s fine on a live because people are there and they understand, they’ve all seen this. That is how lives go. On YouTube or on the podcast apps, however, you don’t get any grace when it comes to your audio and video quality just because it was a live first. It’s got to be top notch in order to look professional and that can be really hard to do with reurposed livestreams, especially if you’ve got a lot of different people involved in your lives. So one thing that we really recommend to people, if they do want to have that kind of dynamic back and forth with their audience, is to do it as an addition to their podcast rather than make every episode live that they’re porting then onto their RSS feed. What you can do is do your podcast normally, record it in your virtual studio, edit it, make your notes and release. But then once in a while, maybe every month or every quarter, do a live event for your audience. And this can be a time when you do Q&A. Maybe you get guests to come back and give more feedback and do their own Q&A. Or you can answer audience questions live. It can be really, really fun to have sort of a live office hours type of event that gets you some of the benefits of doing live without compromising your overall show quality. Just remember that what you save in time with a live show, you may lose in impact or outcome. ## Watch: Can I Do My Podcast Live? ### More Podcast Questions? More Podcast Answers! [How Do I Get My Podcast Guests to Share Their Episodes?](https://onestonecreative.net/?p=4335) [How Long Should Podcast Episodes Be?](https://onestonecreative.net/how-long-should-podcast-episodes-be/) [What Do I Do If a Podcast Interview Is Terrible?](https://onestonecreative.net/what-do-i-do-if-a-podcast-interview-is-terrible/) # Ready for the Next Level? If you’re wondering: *is my podcast actually doing what I need it to? Am I measuring the right things? Could I be getting more out of the time and money I’m already putting in?* then you might want to grab a FREE copy of [Podcasting for Business](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book)! Podcasting for Business outlines the entire Business Podcast Blueprints methdology and goes into detail about how to optimize your show for 15 different business outcomes, from more referral partners to a shorter sales cycle. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/PFB-Book-Mockups.png "PFB Book Mockups") # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. # Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet – and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you’re ready to launch or level up your show, let’s talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) # Keep Learning: ## [Podcast Show Notes](https://onestonecreative.net/podcast-show-notes/) Podcast Show NotesProbably the most underused part of your show.What are Podcast Show Notes?Podacst Show Notes are the... **Categories:** Articles --- ### [How Long Should Podcast Episodes Be?](https://onestonecreative.net/how-long-should-podcast-episodes-be/) **Published:** February 17, 2026 **Author:** Darla Fields **Content:** # How Long Should Podcast Episodes Be? ### Length matters. ## Episode Length Matters More Than You Think One of the first questions that comes up when you are starting to plan your podcast is how long should your podcast episodes be? And the answer to that is really similar to the answer to the question how long is a piece of rope? A podcast episode needs to be as long as it needs to be to do the job that it has to do. And that is going to vary a lot from business to business, from podcast to podcast, and even for the different episodes that you’re producing over your kind of production career. Deciding how long it should be really comes down to what are you trying to convey with the episode? What is the really important information that you want to make sure anybody listening is able to get? The episode needs to be long enough to do that, and hopefully not too much longer and contain a bunch of kind of fluff or tangents or stuff that doesn’t really help you get to the point. Newer podcasters often benefit from tightening their schedule down a little bit and giving themselves less time. So if they’re recording with a guest or they’re planning a solo episode when you know you have 45 minutes to fill, it can feel like you’ve got all the time in the world to explore all these different tangents and ideas, but that can often mean you’re going to be paying for it, either in production to tighten up the episode or releasing episodes that have as much fluff as they have good content. So give yourself a shorter time frame as you’re getting going. 30 minutes can be pretty good. We’ve seen that be really effective as someone is getting into the habit of interviewing. Now, of course, solo episodes are going to be typically shorter. Most of us can’t just kind of turn on the camera and talk for an hour, without any support or guidance or any breaks. So the episodes tend to be in the shorter range in the 2, 5, 10, 15, maybe 20 minutes as you get into things. When we look at the top performing podcasts in the State of Business Podcasting report, we see there’s been a really consistent result over the years that we’ve been doing this and podcast episodes tend to be about 45, 44, 46 minutes long. And that, of course, includes the really short daily episodes that are 2 or 3 minutes. And it also includes the long, 2 hour Mayor of Thorns with four guys sitting around a conference table. And the best bet for you is going to be somewhere in between those, probably, unless you’re doing a micro podcast, which is going to be naturally short. So experiment with different styles as you’re getting going. Maybe you’ll release them, maybe you won’t. But try talking for different amounts of time by yourself or with others to see what ends up working for you. And if you’re ever in doubt, aim on the side of shorter. ## Watch: How Long Should a Podcast Episode Actually Be? ### More Podcast Questions? More Podcast Answers! [What Do I Do If a Podcast Interview Is Terrible?](https://onestonecreative.net/what-do-i-do-if-a-podcast-interview-is-terrible/) [How Do I Get My Podcast Guests to Share Their Episodes?](https://onestonecreative.net/?p=4335) [How Much Do Podcast Downloads Matter?](https://onestonecreative.net/how-much-do-podcast-downloads-matter/) # Ready for the Next Level? If you’re wondering: *is my podcast actually doing what I need it to? Am I measuring the right things? Could I be getting more out of the time and money I’m already putting in?* then you might want to grab a FREE copy of [Podcasting for Business](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book)! Podcasting for Business outlines the entire Business Podcast Blueprints methdology and goes into detail about how to optimize your show for 15 different business outcomes, from more referral partners to a shorter sales cycle. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/PFB-Book-Mockups.png "PFB Book Mockups") # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. # Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet – and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you’re ready to launch or level up your show, let’s talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) # Keep Learning: ## [Podcast Show Notes](https://onestonecreative.net/podcast-show-notes/) Podcast Show NotesProbably the most underused part of your show.What are Podcast Show Notes?Podacst Show Notes are the... **Categories:** Articles --- ### [What Do I Do If a Podcast Interview Is Terrible?](https://onestonecreative.net/what-do-i-do-if-a-podcast-interview-is-terrible/) **Published:** February 14, 2026 **Author:** Darla Fields **Content:** # What Do I Do If a Podcast Interview Is Terrible? ### At some point in your interview in podcasting journey something really unpleasant is going to happen. I’m so sorry, but there’s no way to avoid it. ## Bad Interviews Can Happen in Every Podcast So this happens to every podcaster eventually, or at least every podcaster who deals with guests on their show (so the solo podcasters do not have to worry about this particular thing happening). When you talk to other humans and it’s a major part of your work, and you’re doing it a lot, every now and then you’re going to get a dud. And when it comes to your podcast, a dud could be a couple of different things. Maybe it’s somebody who came onto your show completely unprepared, or they came onto your show with an agenda to sell something or to get some message across that you didn’t know about or agree to. Maybe you just had awful chemistry, and this was just a person that you could not have an effective conversation with. Maybe you were having a bad day and did not make your best appearance the way that you normally would for guests that you have on your show. There’s a lot of different reasons that it can happen, but everyone gets a really bad interview from time to time. And when you start to realize when you’re in that situation of having this conversation, you realize ‘’I’m not going to be able to air this. There’s no way’’. That’s awkward because what do you do in that scenario? How do you respond in the moment? There’s a couple of strategies. I have tried several of them with varying degrees of success. You’re going to have to figure out what works best for you in each situation that you find yourself in. So one thing you can do is just end the conversation as you normally would, as if it were a normal, perfectly good episode that you’re really excited to share and then never speak of it to anyone ever again. This is the avoidance technique and sometimes it is the best way to go. More straightforward is to, if you want to really preserve the relationship that you have with this guest, if this is somebody that you really want to have as a partner for your business in some way or another or if it’s really important that you are on good terms with them, you can do a couple of things. One, you can suck it up and run the episode to preserve the relationship. That is a legitimate choice for a business owner to make. Or you can honestly say – ‘’Hey, you know what? This conversation didn’t go in exactly the way I was hoping it would. It’s not going to hit with my audience the way I want them to be introduced to you. Could we make a, B and C modification and do it again?’’. Sometimes people are going to be really responsive to that, because they want to do a good job for your content as well. Other times, you might press the mic off when things get a little snippy. It’s been known to happen. And finally, what you can do is be very transparent and say – ‘’Hey, thank you for your time. Unfortunately, this isn’t a fit. It’s not something I’m going to be able to run. I thank you, but ultimately it just didn’t work’’. And you can do this in the moment if you want or by email afterwards. Whatever is best for you. That can be difficult to hear and difficult to say. It would be. In a perfect world, we’re all grown ups who can take that kind of feedback or get that kind of news gracefully. That is not the reality we live in. So you’re going to have to kind of figure out what the best way for you to manage it is in the moment. And depending on the type of person that you’re talking to. If in doubt, a little distance from being in the moment is usually better than trying to do things right there. When you’ve got time to craft an email that comes across really gently, it can be easier than saying – ‘’Actually, that sucks. We’re not using it’’. So when it inevitably happens that you have an interview that you’re not really happy with or that you can’t run for whatever reason, it’s nice if you can have a plan in advance for how you’re going to manage that. And all things being equal, the best plan is probably going to be ending the call, thanking them for the time and then following up with the next steps, whatever they are, via email. Another thing you can do, especially if you have a really clear idea of what you want to be covering and what you want the episode to be like, is to stop the recording for a moment, or just stop the conversation as it is. Assure your guests that you’re going to fix/alter this in post-production and say – ‘’I’m loving what you’re saying. I’m really enjoying having this conversation, but I would like us to focus a little more on A, B or C, or I would like us to change and focus a little bit less on this thing that we’re talking about. Can we pick up from the last question, and I’ll guide you to what I want you to say. And then kind of doing that direction over the course of a call to make sure that you’re getting the type of content that you need for your podcast. Most people are pretty receptive to that because they want to show up well for your audience as well. ## Watch: What Do I Do If a Podcast Interview Is Terrible? ### More Podcast Questions? More Podcast Answers! [How Do I Get My Podcast Guests to Share Their Episodes?](https://onestonecreative.net/?p=4335) [How Much Do Podcast Downloads Matter?](https://onestonecreative.net/how-much-do-podcast-downloads-matter/) [How Do I Build Thought Leadership with a Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/how-do-i-build-thought-leadership-with-a-podcast/) # Ready for the Next Level? If you’re wondering: *is my podcast actually doing what I need it to? Am I measuring the right things? Could I be getting more out of the time and money I’m already putting in?* then you might want to grab a FREE copy of [Podcasting for Business](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book)! Podcasting for Business outlines the entire Business Podcast Blueprints methdology and goes into detail about how to optimize your show for 15 different business outcomes, from more referral partners to a shorter sales cycle. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/PFB-Book-Mockups.png "PFB Book Mockups") # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. # Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet – and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you’re ready to launch or level up your show, let’s talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) # Keep Learning: ## [Podcast Show Notes](https://onestonecreative.net/podcast-show-notes/) Podcast Show NotesProbably the most underused part of your show.What are Podcast Show Notes?Podacst Show Notes are the... **Categories:** Articles --- ### [How Do I Get My Podcast Guests to Share Their Episodes?](https://onestonecreative.net/how-do-i-get-my-podcast-guests-to-share-their-episodes/) **Published:** February 12, 2026 **Author:** Darla Fields **Content:** # How Do I Get My Podcast Guests to Share Their Episodes? ### What do you think is the most common complaint the podcasters have? ## Guest Sharing Is a Bonus to the Time They Gave You As a producer and someone who works in podcast education, one of the most common complaints I hear from podcasters – across all industries and formats – is that they put so much time and energy into creating great swipe copy. Then the episode goes live…and their guests don’t share it. These are people who showed up, shared their knowledge, and were fantastic. So yes, I get why that’s frustrating. It feels like it should be a really win win scenario, right? Someone came on your show, you had a great conversation. You’ve created some materials to help them share it with their own communities. It seems baffling as to why they wouldn’t. But when you think about it a little more, it actually can make a lot of sense why someone isn’t able to share their content. There’s a couple of reasons and I’d like to get into them. The first is that people who are on podcasts a lot are probably pretty busy being on podcasts, and they’ve got a lot of content to share. They may be on four podcasts the week that yours comes out, and they just don’t have room on the promotional calendar to talk about all of them. That’s the reality of talking to other business owners who have active social media presences. Sometimes there just isn’t room to promote your show, even if they enjoyed it and they would like to. It might also be the case that even though they came on your podcast and shared interesting content, it’s new and fresh and exciting for your audience. Well, they’re an expert in that topic for a reason. They talk to their own audience about that stuff all of the time. So unless they’ve got something totally new that they’ve never said before, that it’s never been revealed to their audience in any way before your show, it might not make sense for them to do it. First – sharing it might be more repetition than helpful for their own communities and expecting them to do that just because it was new for your audience isn’t necessarily reasonable. On top of that it’s combined with the fact that, simply, people do have busy promotional calendars. Sometimes with other things, with their own products, services, other stuff they’ve got going on. Sometimes it’s just not a fit. So when someone is on your show and then they do share their podcast episode, consider that a bonus. It’s awesome. But if they don’t, then remember that they gave you half an hour, 45 minutes or an hour of their time to make content for your business completely for free. They don’t need to share in order for that to be a valuable exchange. Now, if you’ve been guesting at all, you may have noticed that you’ve filled in an application where you have to commit to share or you are required to make a pledge of some kind to show the episode once it’s live. And if you want to do that, you can. It’s your podcast. But it also is sending a message to your guest that you’re not actually interested in what they have to say, you’re interested in how they’re going to promote you, and that may or may not be the type of relationship that you want to be creating with a guest that you’re having on your show. If your goals for your podcast are all about growth and all that reach and all about, getting in front of new audiences – cool. That could be a strategy that might work for you. But if it is about building relationships, then it might be something to really think twice about before you do. Because the relationship that you have with that person, if it is, you know, kind of flexible and generous and without big expectations associated with it is probably going to be a lot stronger than if they get the sense that you’re only in it for the for the social share. So again, to recap, it’s great when guests share, it’s fine to ask them to do it, and it’s a great idea to make it really easy for them if they want to, by providing awesome materials that show you care about them and want them to look good. Hope that they do. But don’t be too mad if they don’t. There are lots of good reasons, none of which are personal. ## Watch: Why Don’t Podcast Guests Always Share the Episode They Were On? ### More Podcast Questions? More Podcast Answers! [How Often Should I Release Episodes of My Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/how-often-should-i-release-episodes-of-my-podcast/) [How Do I Build Thought Leadership with a Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/how-do-i-build-thought-leadership-with-a-podcast/) [How Much Do Podcast Downloads Matter?](https://onestonecreative.net/how-much-do-podcast-downloads-matter/) # Ready for the Next Level? If you’re wondering: *is my podcast actually doing what I need it to? Am I measuring the right things? Could I be getting more out of the time and money I’m already putting in?* then you might want to grab a FREE copy of [Podcasting for Business](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book)! Podcasting for Business outlines the entire Business Podcast Blueprints methdology and goes into detail about how to optimize your show for 15 different business outcomes, from more referral partners to a shorter sales cycle. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/PFB-Book-Mockups.png "PFB Book Mockups") # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. # Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet – and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you’re ready to launch or level up your show, let’s talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) # Keep Learning: ## [Podcast Show Notes](https://onestonecreative.net/podcast-show-notes/) Podcast Show NotesProbably the most underused part of your show.What are Podcast Show Notes?Podacst Show Notes are the... **Categories:** Articles --- ### [How Much Do Podcast Downloads Matter?](https://onestonecreative.net/how-much-do-podcast-downloads-matter/) **Published:** February 9, 2026 **Author:** Darla Fields **Content:** # How Much Do Podcast Downloads Matter? ### The podcast metric that most people and companies and providers in the podcasting space are completely obsessed with is practically useless for most business owners who are podcasting. ## Podcast Downloads Matter Less Than You Think So the topic of downloads comes up a lot for podcasters or any business owner who’s thinking about getting into podcasting, or even more likely, who has been podcasting for a while and seeing that number is either not changing very much, not going up fast enough, or possibly even going down, and they’ve been podcasting for a little while. And that can be stressful. Podcast downloads are a lot of things, and it’s important to be aware of them. You want to keep an eye on what your download numbers are. It tells you interesting things, but it doesn’t tell you a lot of really meaningful information about your business and how the work that you’re doing with your podcast is impacting that business. And as a business owner, that’s the most important thing. That’s what you want to be paying attention to. So when we think about what podcast downloads can actually tell us, they’re the number of people who effectively have listened to at least a minute of an episode on one of the podcast platforms (not counting YouTube or any of the social media sites). And that’s good to know. It can let you know what your reach really is, broadly speaking. It can let you know if you have a particular topics that are really interesting to your audience or if you get a really big uptick. Cool. More content like that. Or it can let you know who’s sharing your episodes. There’s tons of information in downloads. Good to know. But they don’t tell you how much money you’re going to make next year. And so when you are thinking about what to track, yes, downloads should be on that list of things to track. But there are better, more important ones you should be worrying about as well. And if the other metrics such as – new referral partners that you meet, new clients that you sign, the length of your sales cycle or the number of conferences you’re invited to speak at – are all going up, but your downloads aren’t – that’s fine. Because you’re getting what really matters for your business, and that’s actual business outcomes that are going to move the needle for your business over time. The time that you want to pay attention to downloads and when that is a really meaningful statistic or metric for you to be tracking, is when there’s a direct relationship between the downloads to something else. So for example if you did want to get sponsorship for your show, or if you had a funnel where you know that a certain number of podcast listeners are absolutely going to join your email list or your membership community. You’ve done the work on that. You’ve done the attribution. You know that 100 downloads means two new members of the community. If you know that, then absolutely pursue downloads, because you’ve got a real reason to think that more downloads is going to mean more success of other kinds for your business. Similarly, with sponsorship, if you know that you’re going to get $100 for every thousand downloads, absolutely pursue more downloads really aggressively and make that an important part of your strategy. But if you are like most business podcasters and you’re getting other things out of your podcast, like relationships, sales or labor cost savings, that’s what you should be tracking and treat the downloads as just some interesting information that guides your content making decisions. ## Watch: Q and A Title ### More Podcast Questions? More Podcast Answers! [How Do I Build Thought Leadership with a Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/how-do-i-build-thought-leadership-with-a-podcast/) [How Often Should I Release Episodes of My Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/how-often-should-i-release-episodes-of-my-podcast/) [What Are the Business Podcast Blueprints?](https://onestonecreative.net/what-are-the-business-podcast-blueprints/) # Ready for the Next Level? If you’re wondering: *is my podcast actually doing what I need it to? Am I measuring the right things? Could I be getting more out of the time and money I’m already putting in?* then you might want to grab a FREE copy of [Podcasting for Business](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book)! Podcasting for Business outlines the entire Business Podcast Blueprints methdology and goes into detail about how to optimize your show for 15 different business outcomes, from more referral partners to a shorter sales cycle. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/PFB-Book-Mockups.png "PFB Book Mockups") # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. # Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet – and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you’re ready to launch or level up your show, let’s talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) # Keep Learning: ## [Podcast Show Notes](https://onestonecreative.net/podcast-show-notes/) Podcast Show NotesProbably the most underused part of your show.What are Podcast Show Notes?Podacst Show Notes are the... **Categories:** Articles --- ### [How Do I Build Thought Leadership with a Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/how-do-i-build-thought-leadership-with-a-podcast/) **Published:** February 9, 2026 **Author:** Darla Fields **Content:** # How Do I Build Thought Leadership with a Podcast? ### There is a huge mistake that most business owners make when they try to establish thought leadership using their podcasts. ## How to Build a Thought Leadership Podcast Here’s how it usually goes. A business owner knows that they need to get more authority in their space. They want to be mentioned more. They want to be a change maker. They want to be referenced by others. They want to be seen as one of the thinkers in their space. Usually it’s because they’ve got great ideas, and they’re bringing really interesting things to the table. So they think about different ways that they can do it. How are they going to get their message out there into the world? You do any research on that whatsoever and podcasting is going to come up as a possibility for how you can do it. Then what happens is you look at it and think ‘’okay, I want thought leadership, I’m going to have a podcast. What’s a podcast?’’ And very often what a podcast seems to be, or what the most popular podcasts are, is a host and a guest having a conversation about some kind of topic. And that’s the show. That’s the podcast. It’s what we think of when we think of podcasting. And so a new podcast or a business owner is going to find great guests, and they’re going to have really interesting conversations, and they want their guest feel comfortable and to be happy that they spent the time and to get some attention on their own work. So the interview is going to be really largely focused on the guest. And you, as the host, will be asking questions of the guest. They’ll be answering. It can be great content, but there’s one really important thing that that show is not doing, and that is putting the spotlight on your own IP. When you, as the host, are talking to a guest and you are asking them about their business and their ideas and what they would do in this situation, and what’s their story and how they came to be doing what they’re doing – you’re doing a great job at building a relationship. And maybe you’re making great content to engage your audience. But you are not getting your IP out there. To get your ideas out there, you need to be talking. And often this means you’re going to have to suck it up and do a solo episode once in a while, or you’re going to have to be really careful to make sure that you’re talking to business owners who are at a similar professional level as you are. At a level where you can have a sophisticated conversation that goes two ways on a topic of mutual interest to you and your audiences, rather than kind of being an interviewer, running down a list of questions and extracting information from the guests that you’re speaking with. And this can be a little challenging, especially when you’re first getting started. No one is born knowing how to have a really great conversational style podcast. It takes practice. But if what you want to have is thought leadership, then I strongly recommend you make sure that at least either half of your episodes are solos, or that when you’re having conversations, you’re talking for at least half of the time. Because if you’re not, then while you may be getting really great things out of your podcast for a lot of different areas of your business, the thing that it’s not doing is the reason you started it in the first place. Getting your own thought leadership out there. ## Watch: # How Do I Build Thought Leadership with a Podcast? ### More Podcast Questions? More Podcast Answers! [How Often Should I Release Episodes of My Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/how-often-should-i-release-episodes-of-my-podcast/) [What Are the Business Podcast Blueprints?](https://onestonecreative.net/what-are-the-business-podcast-blueprints/) [How Do You Use a Podcast to Get Business Referrals?](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-get-referrals-from-your-podcast/) # Ready for the Next Level? If you’re wondering: *is my podcast actually doing what I need it to? Am I measuring the right things? Could I be getting more out of the time and money I’m already putting in?* then you might want to grab a FREE copy of [Podcasting for Business](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book)! Podcasting for Business outlines the entire Business Podcast Blueprints methdology and goes into detail about how to optimize your show for 15 different business outcomes, from more referral partners to a shorter sales cycle. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/PFB-Book-Mockups.png "PFB Book Mockups") # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. # Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet – and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you’re ready to launch or level up your show, let’s talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) # Keep Learning: ## [Podcast Show Notes](https://onestonecreative.net/podcast-show-notes/) Podcast Show NotesProbably the most underused part of your show.What are Podcast Show Notes?Podacst Show Notes are the... **Categories:** Articles --- ### [How Often Should You Release Episodes of You Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/how-often-should-you-release-episodes-of-your-podcast/) **Published:** February 4, 2026 **Author:** Darla Fields **Content:** # How Often Should I Release Episodes of My Podcast? ### There is a fine line to walk between getting a lot of traction with your podcast and a lot of attention on your podcast, and being able to actually manage all of the work that goes into it on a week by week basis. ## There Is an Ideal Release Candence A common question from new hosts is how often you should release episodes of your podcast. And it’s an important consideration. Your release cadence is one of those decisions that is going to make a really big impact on your ultimate success with podcasting. All things being equal, there is actually an ideal release cadence – and it’s at least weekly. Now, if you’ve been podcasting for a while and maybe you’re even releasing multiple episodes a week**,** you might be saying, “Of course, that’s easy. It’s no problem.” Of course, that is how often you release podcasts. And if you’re in that situation, my hat is off to you. Congratulations. Weekly release cadences are the most popular for a reason. In the [State of Business Podcasting Report](https://community.c-suitenetwork.com/communities/groups/contributor-membersfor-executi/onestonecreative.net/report), we see that over 90% of the top 100 Business podcasts release weekly or more. It’s enough content that people stay engaged, they’re interested, they wait for the next episode, and they know what’s coming. They fit you into their schedule, and you become a part of the lives of your listeners when you’re releasing on that every week basis. And that is an amazing relationship to have with your listeners. With every release, you are effectively spending one-on-one time with people who feel like they know you, and the more you can teach, engage and nurture them, the more disposed they are going to be to reach out to you and refer other people you’re way. ## Why it’s a Challenge to Regularly Release Episodes of Your Podcast It can be challenging though, once you get into it. The reality of finding guests if you have them, or coming up with topics if you’re doing solos and actually doing the recording and post-production can quickly become a challenging grind and sometimes can burn you right out. And, of course, you actually have a whole other business to run, which presumably requires at least some of your time and attention. So it can be tempting to think about releasing a lot less frequently, at least when you’re getting started with podcasting. And you can, of course. You’re the boss of your podcast. You can release as often as you want to. It’s your show. But if you can’t do at least weekly, then you really need to moderate your expectations about what your results are going to be, because it does take a lot longer to get any traction. And that’s if you get any at all. Podcast listeners are very, very loyal until they aren’t. And so if you’re only releasing once or twice a month, people are going to forget you and move on to other things and consume content from creators who are releasing a little bit more regularly. But if you know that it just doesn’t work for your business to be releasing content every single week for the rest of time, that’s okay. There’s an alternative that works very well. ## Releasing in Seasons Releasing in seasons rather than doing an ongoing show where you release every Tuesday for the rest of time, is plenty of podcasting for a lot of businesses! Instead, maybe twice or three times a year you’re going to release a season of six / eight / ten / twelve episodes that you recorded in advance when you had time. You can release them as a batch, netflix style or get that weekly cadence for the entire length of the season. An because you set the expectation for yourself and for your audience that this is a season of a show, there isn’t going to be any surprise or disappointment when there is some time between seasons. We create a lot of this type of show using our [Business Podcast Sprint](https://community.c-suitenetwork.com/communities/groups/contributor-membersfor-executi/onestonecreative.net/sprints) process. Some of the most popular goals for a podcast season are: - Sales Enablement/shorter sales cycles - Case Study development - Targeted networking - Fast IP release - Lean or new customer onboarding - Book/Event launch This can really be the best of both worlds for a lot of business owners, because you’re getting that ‘every week’ traction a few times a year, and plenty of other target benefits for your business without the show taking over your working life. All of that said, for certain things weekly is always going to be best. If your primary goal is networking and building relationships, or your have a large audience who is hungry for more content from you, weekly podcasting is usually the best bet. Likewise, if you’re commenting on current events, you’ll want to have space to share frequently. Finally, if you’re looking to build a large audience and become a top podcaster, you must release consistently, and often. So try to get weekly if that is the best way to reach your goals. If you can’t, consider going with a seasonal format instead to preserve your sanity and also be getting the results that your business deserves. # Watch: How Often Should You Release Podcast Episodes? # Ready for the Next Level? If you’re wondering: *is my podcast actually doing what I need it to? Am I measuring the right things? Could I be getting more out of the time and money I’m already putting in?* then you might want to grab a FREE copy of [Podcasting for Business](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book)! Podcasting for Business outlines the entire Business Podcast Blueprints methdology and goes into detail about how to optimize your show for 15 different business outcomes, from more referral partners to a shorter sales cycle. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/PFB-Book-Mockups.png "PFB Book Mockups") # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. # Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet – and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you’re ready to launch or level up your show, let’s talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) # Keep Learning: [![Where Do You Find Guests for Your Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2026/05/PFBQA0342-Feature-400x250.jpg)](https://onestonecreative.net/where-do-you-find-guests-for-your-podcast-2/) ## [Where Do You Find Guests for Your Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/where-do-you-find-guests-for-your-podcast-2/) For most podcasters, guest sourcing is the hardest part of the workflow. It doesn't have to be. Listen Now: For some... **Categories:** Articles --- ### [What Are the Business Podcast Blueprints?](https://onestonecreative.net/what-are-the-business-podcast-blueprints/) **Published:** February 2, 2026 **Author:** Darla Fields **Content:** # What Are the Business Podcast Blueprints? ### There’s a reason that some business owners drive serious revenue with their podcasts, and others waste a lot of time, energy, and resources on theirs. ## Protect Your Podcast Investment with Business Podcast Blueprints The best way to protect your investment in podcasting is by using a methodology that my team and I have developed over years of working with business owners in different industries, and years of studying the top performing business podcasts out there. It’s called the [Business Podcast Blueprints](https://onestonecreative.net/business-podcast-blueprints/), and it’s a method for you to design a show that’s going to work for your business and drive measurable outcomes that you can see, over time and directly related to the work that you’re doing with the show. A business podcast blueprint is the prime directive for your show. It’s the single most important reason it exists. It’s not the only good thing it’s going to do for your business. You’re going to get all sorts of good things from it, but it’s the most important one. And it’s the decision filter that you use for every choice you have to make about your show. You’re going to ask – ‘’will it help me achieve my blueprint?’’. There are five of them. The first is **relationship building**, and these are podcasts where the most important thing that they do is connect you one-to-one with other people. Could be clients, could be other business owners, could be general networking, but what they do is connect you with other people in the form of guests. Next are **audience engagement** podcasts, and these are podcasts where you are creating, knowing, liking, and trusting with a whole lot of people at scale. These are great for if you’ve got an audience already, if you’ve got traffic coming to your website, if you’re getting introductions all the time, if you’ve got people filling in your calendar to get on discovery calls with you. These are all people who can really benefit from an audience engagement podcast where you can talk to a lot of people at once who will need the same kind of information. Then you’ve got **thought leadership** podcasts, and the most important thing that a thought leadership podcast does is get your information from your brain or from your company archives out into the world so that other people can understand it, see it, and know that you came up with it. Then you’ve got **conversion** podcasts, and the most important thing that they do is change listeners or watchers from one type of relationship with you to another type, usually through some kind of paywall or gated content. And last but not least, there are **content** podcasts. Now, any podcast that you create is going to make content. That’s just a natural side effect of the process, but it is also perfectly legitimate for a podcast to exist only to create content. These can be great internal shows. They can create the content that goes on social media. They can be filler content or seeder content for longer-term projects like books, courses, other things that you might be creating. If that’s the thing that you want to get out of a podcast, it’s a perfectly legitimate reason to go about it. So when you look at your business, you want to figure out what your most important goals are, and then figure out which of those blueprints is the most aligned with those most important business goals. And that is going to be the starting place for all of the other good things that are going to come from your podcast. And choosing that one thing, again, it’s not going to be the only thing that you get out of your podcast, but it’s going to make you faster, more effective, and more focused on getting those results and seeing that return on your investment quickly. ## Watch: What Are the Business Podcast Blueprints? # Ready for the Next Level? If you’re wondering: *is my podcast actually doing what I need it to? Am I measuring the right things? Could I be getting more out of the time and money I’m already putting in?* then you might want to grab a FREE copy of [Podcasting for Business](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book)! Podcasting for Business outlines the entire Business Podcast Blueprints methdology and goes into detail about how to optimize your show for 15 different business outcomes, from more referral partners to a shorter sales cycle. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/PFB-Book-Mockups.png "PFB Book Mockups") # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. # Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet – and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you’re ready to launch or level up your show, let’s talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) # Keep Learning: ## [Podcast Show Notes](https://onestonecreative.net/podcast-show-notes/) Podcast Show NotesProbably the most underused part of your show.What are Podcast Show Notes?Podacst Show Notes are the... **Categories:** Articles --- ### [Do You Need to Use a Headshot For Your Podcast Cover Art?](https://onestonecreative.net/do-you-need-to-use-a-headshot-for-your-podcast-cover-art/) **Published:** February 8, 2026 **Author:** Megan **Content:** # Do You Have to Use Your Headshot on Your Podcast Cover Art? ### Are you planning to start a podcast but afraid that you’ve got a face for radio and don’t want your headshot on the cover art? ## People Like Listening to People If you’re worried about having your face on your podcast cover art, you’re not alone. There can be a lot of reasons that people feel that way. Maybe they feel it’s a little bit too vain to have their own face front and center. Maybe they don’t love the way they take photographs. But all of these concerns, as valid as they are aside, it’s usually a good idea for most business podcasts to have some kind of visual representation of themselves on their podcast cover art. When we look at the top performing business podcasts in our State of Business Podcasting Report, we find that about 71% of those podcasts have a person in some way or another on the art. It can be a headshot, it can be a body shot, it can be some kind of graphic art. But what it comes down to is that people like listening to people. And especially if you’ve got an audio only show, or if you have your name itself associated with your brand in any way, then you want to be able to put a face to that name and a face to the voice that people are listening to so they can imagine seeing you while they’re hearing your voice. It can be a little bit less important for a video show if somebody’s going to be watching you. But honestly, if that’s the case, you probably won’t worry about having your face on the cover art anyway. So even if you’re not normally comfortable having pictures of yourself out there, if you can manage it, if you can overcome the weirdness of seeing your own face on Apple Podcasts or Spotify, you should try to put a picture of yourself on your cover art. Maybe you can make it graphical, get a graphic designer to add a couple of layers, a couple different filters to make it look a little bit less human if that makes you more comfortable. But get your face on there so that people know who they’re listening to. ## Watch: Do You Need to Use Your Headshot On Your Podcast Cover Art? ### More Podcast Questions? More Podcast Answers! [How Do You Use a Podcast to Get Business Referrals?](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-get-referrals-from-your-podcast/) [What Are the Business Podcast Blueprints?](https://onestonecreative.net/what-are-the-business-podcast-blueprints/) [How Often Should I Release Episodes of My Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/how-often-should-i-release-episodes-of-my-podcast/) # Ready for the Next Level? If you’re wondering: *is my podcast actually doing what I need it to? Am I measuring the right things? Could I be getting more out of the time and money I’m already putting in?* then you might want to grab a FREE copy of [Podcasting for Business](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book)! Podcasting for Business outlines the entire Business Podcast Blueprints methdology and goes into detail about how to optimize your show for 15 different business outcomes, from more referral partners to a shorter sales cycle. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/PFB-Book-Mockups.png "PFB Book Mockups") # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. # Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet – and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you’re ready to launch or level up your show, let’s talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) # Keep Learning: ## [Podcast Show Notes](https://onestonecreative.net/podcast-show-notes/) Podcast Show NotesProbably the most underused part of your show.What are Podcast Show Notes?Podacst Show Notes are the... **Categories:** Articles --- ### [How Do You Use a Podcast to Get Business Referrals?](https://onestonecreative.net/how-do-you-use-a-podcast-to-get-business-referrals/) **Published:** January 28, 2026 **Author:** Megan **Content:** # How to Get Business Referrals From Your Podcast ### When people think about using their podcast to get clients for their business, they’re usually thinking about selling to their guests. And that is usually a mistake for the vast majority of business podcasters. ## Use Your Podcast to Build Referral Relationships If you want to get more referrals and build the kind of relationships that lead to referrals using your podcast, then what you’ve got to do is use what we call a relationship building podcast framework. And this means that you’re going to strategically design a show and look for guests that are working with complimentary or that are complimentary business owners who are working with a similar audience to yours. And the point of the show isn’t that the people that you have on as your guests become your clients. It’s that you’re talking to the same audience and you serve the same type of people. And what you’ve got can help their audience and what they’ve got can help yours. This way you can create content together that’s going to be really, really interesting and valuable for both of your audiences. And you’re setting the foundation for a relationship that over time can be one where you pass referrals back and forth to each other. So when you’re designing this kind of show and when you’re doing that nurturing work to get to know the different business owners that you’re talking to, the most important thing to remember is that your real audience for the podcast is actually your guest rather than the listening public. And that’s not to say that you shouldn’t be investing in making great, interesting content that anyone would love to listen to. You absolutely should. But it’s even more important if your goal is building referral networks It’s to really impress your guests with your insight, with your attention to detail, with how much care you’re putting into their experience with you, because that’s going to translate in their mind to how you would treat any referrals that they sent your way. So if you’re looking to build up those referral relationships in your business, then the most important thing you can do is be talking to the type of people who can send you referrals and treating them like an absolute prince or princess and really demonstrating your value and giving them a chance to get to know you and the work that you and your team does. Want more details on exactly how to do this? Check our the full Article: [How to Get More Referrals From Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-get-referrals-from-your-podcast/)! ## Watch: How Do You Get Business Referrals From Your Podcast? ### **More Podcast Questions? More Podcast Answers!** [What Should You Name Your Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/what-should-you-name-your-podcast/) [What Are the Business Podcast Blueprints?](https://onestonecreative.net/what-are-the-business-podcast-blueprints/) [How Often Should I Release Episodes of My Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/how-often-should-i-release-episodes-of-my-podcast/) # Ready for the Next Level? If you’re wondering: *is my podcast actually doing what I need it to? Am I measuring the right things? Could I be getting more out of the time and money I’m already putting in?* then you might want to grab a FREE copy of [Podcasting for Business](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book)! Podcasting for Business outlines the entire Business Podcast Blueprints methdology and goes into detail about how to optimize your show for 15 different business outcomes, from more referral partners to a shorter sales cycle. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/PFB-Book-Mockups.png "PFB Book Mockups") # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. # Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet – and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you’re ready to launch or level up your show, let’s talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) # Keep Learning: ## [Podcast Show Notes](https://onestonecreative.net/podcast-show-notes/) Podcast Show NotesProbably the most underused part of your show.What are Podcast Show Notes?Podacst Show Notes are the... **Categories:** Articles --- ### [What Should You Name Your Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/what-should-you-name-your-podcast/) **Published:** January 26, 2026 **Author:** Megan **Content:** # How Do You Choose a Name For Your Podcast? ### Are you worried that if you don’t get the name of your new podcast right, the entire project is going to be doomed to expensive public failure? ## Your Podcast Name is Your First Impression Choosing a name for your podcast is one of those things that feels incredibly high stakes. It feels like this is the first impression that your show is going to be making to the world, and if you don’t get it right, everything that comes after it is going to be equally flawed. And the name is important, but it’s not as important as several other decisions you’re going to have to make throughout the process. Podcast names ultimately need to be three things more than anything else. 1. They need to be short, 2. They need to be simple, and 3. They need to be sticky. So, what does that mean? Short means it’s five words or less, four words or less, if you can manage it. When we look at the State of Business Podcasting Report, we see that over 60% of the top performing podcasts have shows that are four words or less. You want them to be that number because they’re easy to remember. That’s the other thing that you want to be. It was short, simple, and sticky. And simple means it’s really easy for somebody to remember and to understand immediately. You’re not going to get good traction with your podcast, you’re not going to acquire a whole bunch of new listeners if somebody sees the name of your podcast and can’t parse it, if they can’t understand it right away, if they don’t look at it and say: “oh, that’s what this is about. I’m interested in that. I should listen to this or I should watch this.” The more explaining you have to do before someone agrees to listen, the fewer people are actually going to invest that time in doing it unless they already know and like you already. And those people, you’ve already got. Now, the final thing that it needs to be, if at all possible, is sticky. And that means it’s got a concept or it’s an idea that sticks in the mind of your ideal listeners. And that can really vary a lot depending on you and your audience and your sense of humor and the shared literary references that you all have together. But what you want to make sure that you’re doing with your podcast name is that it is something that people can remember and be able to repeat when they are talking about it or be able to instantly recognize when they see it out in the wild. So just remember those three things. It should be short – four words or less if you can manage it, simple – it needs no explanation and sticky, – it’s interesting enough that someone remembers it. ## Watch: How Do You Name Your Podcast? ### **More Podcast Questions? More Podcast Answers!** [How Do You Use a Podcast to Get Business Referrals?](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-get-referrals-from-your-podcast/) [What Are the Business Podcast Blueprints?](https://onestonecreative.net/what-are-the-business-podcast-blueprints/) [How Often Should I Release Episodes of My Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/how-often-should-i-release-episodes-of-my-podcast/) # Ready for the Next Level? If you’re wondering: *is my podcast actually doing what I need it to? Am I measuring the right things? Could I be getting more out of the time and money I’m already putting in?* then you might want to grab a FREE copy of [Podcasting for Business](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book)! Podcasting for Business outlines the entire Business Podcast Blueprints methdology and goes into detail about how to optimize your show for 15 different business outcomes, from more referral partners to a shorter sales cycle. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/PFB-Book-Mockups.png "PFB Book Mockups") # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. # Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet – and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you’re ready to launch or level up your show, let’s talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) # Keep Learning: ## [Podcast Show Notes](https://onestonecreative.net/podcast-show-notes/) Podcast Show NotesProbably the most underused part of your show.What are Podcast Show Notes?Podacst Show Notes are the... **Categories:** Articles --- ### [Q and A Template](https://onestonecreative.net/q-and-a-template/) **Published:** January 20, 2026 **Author:** Megan **Content:** # Q and A Title ### Hook Content ## Reworded Title Edited Transcript ## Watch: Q and A Title # More Podcast Questions? More Podcast Answers: [![Where Do You Find Guests for Your Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2026/05/PFBQA0342-Feature-400x250.jpg)](https://onestonecreative.net/where-do-you-find-guests-for-your-podcast-2/) ## [Where Do You Find Guests for Your Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/where-do-you-find-guests-for-your-podcast-2/) For most podcasters, guest sourcing is the hardest part of the workflow. It doesn't have to be. Listen Now: For some... **Categories:** Blog --- ### [How to Get More Referrals From Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-get-referrals-from-your-podcast/) **Published:** January 9, 2026 **Author:** Megan **Content:** # Turn Your Podcast Into A Referral Machine ### How to Get Referrals From Your Podcast ## Referrals Matter. A Lot. Referrals are one of the most powerful sales tools at the disposal of most businesses. There is nothing like getting that email from a friend or colleague introducing you to someone they think would be a perfect fit. As you (hopefully!) know, those are often the easiest sales and the best customers. What business couldn’t use more of them? A podcast can help you build relationships with referral partners, so they can directly refer business to you by making personal introductions. A referral partner might also share your content to people they think can find it valuable and work with you on any large campaigns you may be running, like book and product launches. This is one of the most popular (and profitable!) Relationship Building optimizations from the [Business Podcast Blueprints](https://onestonecreative.net/business-podcast-blueprints/). ## Referrals Don’t Happen By Magic To get more referrals, you have to ask for them. But you can’t exactly write a fellow business owner a note that says: “Hey, I want you to come on my podcast so you’ll like me enough to send me referrals.” It would be weird and gross. A good referral partner is someone who likes and respects you, and more than that; *they believe that you can deliver on the promises your business makes*. They need a little time to get to know you. They need to see how you are going to treat them so they know how you would treat any referrals they send your way. To get those referrals you need a couple of things: you need to know *who you want to have referred to you*, and you need to *create the opportunities* to comfortably and politely ask for them. Hopefully, you already have clarity on your niche and ideal customer avatars, and a rock solid quick explanation of your key offers, so to get more referrals what you need from your podcast is: - access to the people who can refer you new business, and - a good enough relationship that they are happy to help you. Usually, this means adding a few steps to your workflow to give yourself the chance to make a really excellent impression. ### It’s Amazing When It Works You see, just like there are [different parts of a podcast episode](https://onestonecreative.net/podcast-episode-parts/), there are different parts of your podcast workflow that give you a chance to build real relationships. Here’s an example. For my old podcast, The Company Show (which is the show I hosted before the [Business Podcast Spotlight](https://www.notion.so/Business-Podcast-Spotlight-130871d80d52807c86d8cc214e8fe47b?pvs=21)) I usually had a prep, or pre-interview call with potential guests. This gave us a chance to get to know each other a little and workshop an amazing episode topic together. During one of these prep calls, I was talking to my future guest and mentioned that we’d recently adjusted our niche and targeting, and how that was going to impact the podcast, and our conversation. She asked who we were specifically looking to work with going forward, and when I told her – her eyes lit up! “I have the pefect story about that!” She had a great insight for our episode that would speak directly to our new ideal customer, which made our conversation much more vibrant and engaging and valuable to those listeners, which was amazing. But it didn’t end there. After we got off the call, I received an email where she introduced me directly to someone from her own network who fit our new niche, and she thought we could help. And that’s how it’s done. ## Creating a Podcast Workflow that Invites Referrals When you have a really well-optimized relationship building podcast, you have a great reason to talk to your guests about who you want to work with any why, and enough touchpoints with them that making a request for referrals is natural – and sometimes, you don’t even have to ask! But you should, and that means making sure you have the opportunity to do it through multiple touchpoints over the lifecycle of an episode. Like: - The invitation, - Connecting on social media, - A prep call, - The episode recording, including chatting before and after - A thank you note - The ‘your episode is ready’ announcement - A follow up with feedback and audience comments If you haven’t yet broken down your podcast workflow into indvidual steps – that is your first task. Then, you’ll want to experiment with making the actual request at different points. Find out what feels comfortable for you and your guests, and what results in the best outcomes. I like the post-interview chat for that, as well as the message letting them know your episode is live, and maybe when sharing a little feedback you’ve received from listeners, but you may find different places make more sense. Then you need to make sure you are doing your share when it comes to demonstrating your value. You have the skills and offers to genuinely help people, and you’re running a reliable, professional operation. This means that your conversations include chances for you to share your own insight, you pay attention to details, you give the guest a chance to really shine, and you invest in high-quality post production. How you treat your guest is how they will assume you treat anyone they send your way. Finally, You also want to make it an easy ask. That means providing things like a description of your ideal client, your key offers and who they are best for and a little swipe copy they can use. If you offer a referral payment or commission, you can be upfront about that as well. Try to get into the habit of following up with your past guests about referrals, and if you have the chance to make one – don’t hestitate for a moment! ## Build A Referral-Generating Machine! This can all feel a little awkward the first few times you do it, but if you are: - sincerely approaching the relationship as one that is mutually beneficial, - making sure to do “your share” in terms of highlighting them and their work (don’t skip this part!), - being consistent in your requests and follow ups, and - supporting your guests through sharing their content and sending referrals back at them when you can… …then it can become quite seamless, and your podcast will become the referral-generating machine of your dreams. # Ready for the Next Level? If you’re wondering: *is my podcast actually doing what I need it to? Am I measuring the right things? Could I be getting more out of the time and money I’m already putting in?* then you might want to grab a FREE copy of [Podcasting for Business](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book)! Podcasting for Business outlines the entire Business Podcast Blueprints methdology and goes into detail about how to optimize your show for 15 different business outcomes, from more referral partners to a shorter sales cycle. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/PFB-Book-Mockups.png "PFB Book Mockups") # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. # Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet – and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you’re ready to launch or level up your show, let’s talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) # Keep Learning: ## [Podcast Show Notes](https://onestonecreative.net/podcast-show-notes/) Podcast Show NotesProbably the most underused part of your show.What are Podcast Show Notes?Podacst Show Notes are the... **Categories:** Articles, Blog --- ### [Podcast Episode Parts](https://onestonecreative.net/podcast-episode-parts/) **Published:** December 18, 2025 **Author:** Megan **Content:** # The Anatomy of a Podcast Episode ### What Makes a Podcast Sound Like a Podcast? ## What Are the Parts of a Podcast Episode? A podcast for your business needs a thoughtful structure – one that helps you acheve your specific goals as efficiently as possible. This means haveing a combination of different podcast episode parts that is easy to produce, and easy to listen to. A good podcast episode has *anatomy*, and understanding the different options for parts can help you to make the best possible choices for your business. At a very high level a podcast will contain: 1. Introductory Content (usually called the *Intro*) 2. Body Content 3. Closing Content (usually called the *Outro*) Each of these main sections can be composed of one or more pieces, and together they make up what we call Standard Podcast Parts. Some pieces are necessary others are just nice to have, and some you may not want to use, but if you have all or most of them in your show, then your podcast is going to sound like a podcast. Everything else is optional, and you can take it or leave it depending on your specific goals for your show. ## Standard Podcast Episode Parts ### **Hook, Sizzle Clip, Cold Open** This is what plays before a produced intro. This can be a clip from the audio that comes later, or you can write and record something yourself to open the show, maybe asking the question the episode will answer or giving your own strong take that will be backed up by later content. This isn’t strictly required in a podcast, but it is good practice – there is a lot of competition for podcasts out there, and it’s really easy for someone to click over to the next one if the first 30 seconds aren’t that interesting, unless they already really know you and like you (which, to be fair, your loyal listeners will!) ***Your hook/sizzle clip/cold open should be:*** 45 seconds or less. ### **Produced Intro** Your Produced Intro is a piece of audio branding that usually has theme music and a voice-over – it will be the same for every episode. It should also be short and explain briefly what the show is, why it’s valuable, and who it’s for. You might also want to introduce yourself as the host – or have your voice actor do so! (Alternatively, your personal introduction can be in your Welcome below) A lot of shows choose to have the music slowly fade out during the welcome to the episode, which sounds lovely. Some hosts also choose to forgo the pre-produced element and have the same basic intro format they do live when recording their calls and laying the music underneath it. This gives them a little flexibility to shake up the verbiage while maintaining consistency in the format and branding. It’s your choice! The key reason to have a produced intro is to sound professional while creating a clear, repeatable signal that “the show is beginning now! The good stuff is almost here!” ***Your produced intro should be:*** 30 seconds or less, set to background music, and give a clear message: This podcast is going to do XYZ, and it’s for this particular type of person. ### **Welcome** After the Produced Intro, it is time for you to personally welcome your listeners and your guest, if you have one, to the show. This can be a good opportunity to greet your audience, introduce yourself and the show if you forgo the produced intro, provide any news or updates your community might be interested in, banter a little if you have a co-host – anything that isn’t technically the main body content. This is also an opportunity to introduce your guest, if you prefer to handle the “who this person is and why they matter” bit by yourself, which can often be better than having guests share their own bios. ***Your welcome should be:*** About 45-75 seconds long, clear and warm. You don’t want to go on and on with who you are and what you’re doing, but you do want to keep in mind that some listeners will be new, and they need a little information about what they’re in for. It can be an extension of the produced intro but a little more personal. Sometimes the question: “Do I need to introduce myself and the show every episode?” comes up. The answer is yes – new listeners need an orientation to what is going on. It should be short however, so it’s not boring for old listeners. Everything I’ve talked about so far makes up the TOP of your show – and you have plenty of wiggle room! If you want your intro and welcome to take the place of the hook, then just transition with a little music – go for it! If you want to start with a sizzle clip, then have music play over your welcome and save the VO for the end right before you start the body content – you can do that, too! You’re the boss of your show intro. 😉 A key thing to remember, however, is that you do want to let your listener go from pressing play to hearing interesting, meaty content within about 45 to 90 seconds, two minutes on the outside. ### **Main Body Content** This is the meat of your show. It can be an interview (and it will be if you want to [get referrals from your podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-get-referrals-from-your-podcast/)!), it can be a solo, it can be a panel discussion – it can be whatever you want, but it’s going to take up most of the time, and it’s going to deliver most of the value. There are segments you can add to the main body content, and you might want to include advertisements in it, which I’ll be getting to in the Optional Elements section. ***Your body content should be:*** Whatever you like! Your show can be as long or as short as makes sense for your content and your audience, and it can be composed of anything we’ve talked about so far in this training series. If you want to go by the data, in the [State of Business Podcasting Report](https://onestonecreative.net/report2021/) over the last 4 years, we’ve found that the average business podcast is about 44 minutes long, and that result has been very consistent over time – but that isn’t a hard and fast rule. Many popular shows are longer or shorter. ### **Closing** A closing, goodbye, or soft call to action is an optional part of the show. Some shows go from the main body of the content directly into a produced outro without a specific closing segment (like when they thank the guest, say bye, and the music plays), but if you have things that you generally like to do, like ask your audience to engage with you a certain way, or provide some final thoughts of your own, then a closing is the place to do it. It can also be fun to use this space to tease upcoming episodes and to give people an idea of what’s coming down the pipe. If you don’t want to have a produced outro, you can play music over your closing segment and let it play for a few seconds after you finish speaking. ***Your closing should be:*** up to a few minutes, depending on how much content you are including, and if you are using a Produced Intro as well, it should have unique content. ### Produced Outro Just like a produced Intro, this is a standard pre-produced piece that you include at the very end of each episode. This is often where you’ll hear “Leave a rating and a review!” or “Like, Share and Subscribe!” If you have a catchphrase or slogan that you regularly use, it can be included as well. The content is up to you, just make sure it is different than what you include in your Closing, if you are using one. ***Your Produced Outro Should be***: About 30 seconds long, set to music, and the last thing people hear in your show. These will be the bones of your show – the frame that you can alter and enhance to meet your specific goals. If standard elements will get you to where you need to be – amazing – there’s no need to mess around with it. From a strategic perspective, however, you might want to consider adding regular segments and different elements to your show to give you more content to easily repurpose, meet specific audience or networking objectives, or just because it’s fun. ## Optional Podcast Episode Parts ### **Ads** Lots and lots of podcasts have ads. They can be for your own products and services, for sponsors, they can be swaps or promotional exchanges with other podcasters, or even in support of causes and charities you’re involved with. Whatever the content of the ad is, you have to make a few decisions about it: do you want ads to be ‘baked in’ as a permanent part of the episode, or do you want them to be dynamically inserted and subject to change at a later date? (Dynamic ads are more popular – and on balance, better for you as the podcast owner. Your podcast host should let you know if they have that capability!) For both baked-in and dynamic ads, you can have them either produced or host-read. Produced means it is recorded separately, often by the person purchasing the ad, with its own music and voicing. Host-read means you, as the host, are reading the ad. Because of the relationship you have with your audience, host-reads are more valuable. The three main places ads tend to go are: - Pre-roll: before the episode, - Midroll: within the content (there can be multiple midroll placements), and - Post-roll: after the episode. Pre-rolls and midrolls tend to be heard the most – it’s easy to just stop listening to an episode when an ad starts a minute before the end. You also need to plan your transitions to and from ads for both baked-in and dynamic placements. That might mean including a note in your main body content that ‘you’ll be right back!’ and then ‘back to the show!’ or some equivalent. Some people like to use transitional sounds, called stingers, instead or in addition to a verbal note. ***Your ads should be:*** planned as a part of your show structure if you are going to have them! It takes a little extra work and a little extra communication with your production team if you have one, but it’s going to sound better if you have created space for them within your episodes. People don’t love ads, but they are expected in many podcasts. ### **Topical Segments** These are segments that will add some important benefit to your show, either strategic or aesthetic – and these are where you can get really, really creative. You might place them at the top of your show, immediately before or after an ad transition or before the closing of the episode. You should try to be consistent from week to week, however. Here are some ideas: **News:** What is going on in your industry? If there is often something juicy to talk about, but your main show format isn’t all news all the time, having a “what’s happening” segment can be very valuable to your regular listeners and help you establish your place as a source for news and commentary. **Q and A:** This is a particularly strong strategy for audience engagement shows, but all show types can make use of them. They can be either the host reading a question and then answering it or going a little fancier and getting people to record questions that you add to the show, followed by your answer. Some entire podcasts are Q and A shows – or it’s one of two alternating formats. They are also extremely easy and effective to repurpose on your site or on social media – do them long enough, and you’ll have a veritable library of questions you don’t have to answer via email anymore. **Standard Question/Speed Round:** I’ve heard these on a lot of shows, and they can be really fun – possibly as icebreakers, maybe towards the end of the main body content. A really fun strategy is to have a standard question you ask every guest so, over time, you compile an amazing list of different takes on a key issue. Repurposing gold. **Action Steps:** Provide a specific action your listeners can take. This is one of my favorites as a listener, especially when I’m listening-with-intent-to-learn as opposed to listening-with-intent-to-be-entertained. Something really clear and specific that your listener can do to either get some of the benefits they have just heard about or really solidify the learning that just happened **Reviews/Recommendations:** Use a little of your air time to promote others: podcasts you like, books you’re reading – and it certainly doesn’t hurt to tell them you’ve done so! Now, with the exception of ads that are going to be dynamic (changing over time) you don’t have to record all of these bits separately! They can all be recorded AS the body content of your episode. The main reason to think about them and plan them is to provide yourself with the editorial structure and consistency to record high-quality shows quickly. It also makes it really easy to extract parts of episodes for repurposing and reusing later on. The only thing to really keep in mind is that the more disparate pieces you have, the more effort you are going to expend fitting them all together. It can be totally worthwhile, but there is a strong argument to be made for a simple show you can create and produce quickly. ***Your Topical Segments Should Be:*** No more than a few minutes in length and provide a clear value to your audience or to the optimization of your show for specific metrics. It’s too much work to include them just for the sake of inclusion, so make sure you go into them with a plan. If you’re wondering: *is my podcast actually doing what I need it to? Am I measuring the right things? Could I be getting more out of the time and money I’m already putting in?* then you might want to grab a FREE copy of [Podcasting for Business](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book)! Podcasting for Business outlines the entire Business Podcast Blueprints methdology and goes into detail about how to optimize your show for 15 different business outcomes, from more referral partners to a shorter sales cycle. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/PFB-Book-Mockups.png "PFB Book Mockups") # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. # Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet – and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you’re ready to launch or level up your show, let’s talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) # Keep Learning: ## [Podcast Show Notes](https://onestonecreative.net/podcast-show-notes/) Podcast Show NotesProbably the most underused part of your show.What are Podcast Show Notes?Podacst Show Notes are the... [read more](https://onestonecreative.net/podcast-show-notes/) **Categories:** Articles --- ### [Article Template](https://onestonecreative.net/4119-2/) **Published:** December 18, 2025 **Author:** Megan **Content:** # Article Title ### Subtitle with SEO Phrase ## Hook Content ## Subheads Every podcaster reaches a point where they wonder, *“Is this the best way to do it, or could I try something different?”* That’s exactly what Karen Covy, divorce coach and host of *Off the Fence,* decided to find out. She came back on the *Business Podcast Spotlight* to talk about the changes she’s made to her show since our first conversation and the surprising results she’s seen because of them. ### From Spare Room to Studio Paragraph Content ## Additional Experiments ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/09/BPS027_Blog-Quote-Card_Karen-Covy-scaled.jpg "BPS027_Blog Quote Card_Karen Covy") ### Side Image Content Paragraph ### Making Solo Content Work Like a lot of hosts, Karen found solo episodes tough. Talking straight into the camera felt awkward, even though the episode itself performed really well. Her solution? Structure and support. Having someone prompt her with questions makes it easier to stay on track and sound natural and it keeps the editing from turning into a nightmare. ### Repurposing for Reach Karen doesn’t just let her podcast live as a podcast. Each episode becomes clips for TikTok, YouTube Shorts, and Instagram Reels. Some shows turn into dozens of great snippets, others just a handful – but every time, it helps extend the life and reach of her content. She’s also using her episodes to promote what she’s working on, adding short pre-rolls and post-rolls to invite listeners into her programs, books, or free coaching opportunities. ### The Big Lesson Podcasting doesn’t have to stay the same forever. A small experiment – like adding a mini-series, testing live coaching, or upgrading your setup – can lead to lasting growth. And you don’t have to double your workload to see results. Once your systems are in place, it’s about making smart tweaks, not starting from scratch. # Ready for the Next Level? If you’re wondering: *is my podcast actually doing what I need it to? Am I measuring the right things? Could I be getting more out of the time and money I’m already putting in?* then you might want to grab a FREE copy of [Podcasting for Business](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book)! Podcasting for Business outlines the entire Business Podcast Blueprints methdology and goes into detail about how to optimize your show for 15 different business outcomes, from more referral partners to a shorter sales cycle. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/PFB-Book-Mockups.png "PFB Book Mockups") # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. # Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet – and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you’re ready to launch or level up your show, let’s talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) # Keep Learning: ## [Podcast Show Notes](https://onestonecreative.net/podcast-show-notes/) Podcast Show NotesProbably the most underused part of your show.What are Podcast Show Notes?Podacst Show Notes are the... **Categories:** Blog --- ### [If You Want Something Different, Do Something Different](https://onestonecreative.net/if-you-want-something-different-do-something-different/) **Published:** September 25, 2025 **Author:** Darla Fields **Content:** # If You Want Something Different, Do Something Different With Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast Spotlight What Happens When You Experiment With Your Podcast? # Listen to the Episode Now: Subscribe on [Apple Podcasts](https://podcasts.apple.com/ca/podcast/the-business-podcast-spotlight/id1801282981), [Spotify](https://open.spotify.com/show/0t8M5xTxALwoGe8sues7kw), your [your favorite other podcast player](https://pod.link/1801282981)! # What Happens When You Experiment With Your Podcast? Every podcaster reaches a point where they wonder, *“Is this the best way to do it, or could I try something different?”* That’s exactly what Karen Covy, divorce coach and host of *Off the Fence,* decided to find out. She came back on the *Business Podcast Spotlight* to talk about the changes she’s made to her show since our first conversation and the surprising results she’s seen because of them. # From Spare Room to Studio Karen thought turning a spare basement room into a studio would be simple. A little paint, a couple of foam panels, and done, right? Not quite. Her first recording sounded like it was happening in a tin can. After a lot of trial and error (and some soundproofing on the ceiling), she finally got the audio right. Add better lighting, a dedicated camera and mic, and suddenly she had a space that not only worked beautifully but also made recording easier. And that matters. Because when your studio is ready to go, you actually use it. No setting up gear every time, no fussing with lights – just sit down, plug in, and record. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/09/A04723C7-300x225.jpg) Inside Karen’s New Studio! ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/09/FA4D1B1C-300x225.jpg) The Guest’s Perspective – Beautiful View and Background # Additional Experiments ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/09/BPS027_Blog-Quote-Card_Karen-Covy-scaled.jpg "BPS027_Blog Quote Card_Karen Covy") ### Testing New Formats One of the biggest changes Karen made was trying out a mini-series on her podcast. Instead of replacing her regular weekly episode, she added a second one for four weeks in a row. The result? A 40% bump in downloads during the series. And when it ended, her audience didn’t drop back down to where it started – she kept about a 25% lift overall. That’s huge. Now, she’s running a new experiment: live coaching sessions on air. Real people, real challenges, and real-time advice. It’s a little vulnerable, but it’s already proving to be a powerful way to connect with listeners. ### Making Solo Content Work Like a lot of hosts, Karen found solo episodes tough. Talking straight into the camera felt awkward, even though the episode itself performed really well. Her solution? Structure and support. Having someone prompt her with questions makes it easier to stay on track and sound natural and it keeps the editing from turning into a nightmare. ### Repurposing for Reach Karen doesn’t just let her podcast live as a podcast. Each episode becomes clips for TikTok, YouTube Shorts, and Instagram Reels. Some shows turn into dozens of great snippets, others just a handful – but every time, it helps extend the life and reach of her content. She’s also using her episodes to promote what she’s working on, adding short pre-rolls and post-rolls to invite listeners into her programs, books, or free coaching opportunities. ### The Big Lesson Podcasting doesn’t have to stay the same forever. A small experiment – like adding a mini-series, testing live coaching, or upgrading your setup – can lead to lasting growth. And you don’t have to double your workload to see results. Once your systems are in place, it’s about making smart tweaks, not starting from scratch. # Ready for the Next Level? If you’re wondering: *is my podcast actually doing what I need it to? Am I measuring the right things? Could I be getting more out of the time and money I’m already putting in?* then you might want to grab a copy of [Podcasting for Business](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book)! Podcasting for Business outlines the entire Business Podcast Blueprints methdology and goes into detail about how t optimize your show for 15 different business outcomes, from more referral partners to a shorter sales cycle. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/PFB-Book-Mockups.png "PFB Book Mockups") # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. ## Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet - and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you're ready to launch or level up your show, let's talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) ### Keep Learning: [![How to Build Your Framework Into Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2026/07/BPS030_Paul-Pape_featureimage-400x250.webp)](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-build-your-framework-into-your-podcast/) ## [How to Build Your Framework Into Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-build-your-framework-into-your-podcast/) How to Build Your Framework Into Your PodcastWith Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast SpotlightIf you have a... **Categories:** Blog, Podcast --- ### [What Are Your Podcast Tentpoles?](https://onestonecreative.net/what-are-your-podcast-tentpoles/) **Published:** September 18, 2025 **Author:** Darla Fields **Content:** # What Are Your Podcast Tentpoles? With Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast Spotlight Every podcaster hits this wall sooner or later: you want every episode to land, but you don’t want to spend hours scripting or editing yourself into the ground. So how do you keep it consistent, valuable, and – let’s be honest – fun? # Listen to the Episode Now: Subscribe on [Apple Podcasts](https://podcasts.apple.com/ca/podcast/the-business-podcast-spotlight/id1801282981), [Spotify](https://open.spotify.com/show/0t8M5xTxALwoGe8sues7kw), your [your favorite other podcast player](https://pod.link/1801282981)! # How Do You Keep a Podcast Consistent Without Burning Out? Every podcaster hits this wall sooner or later: you want every episode to land, but you don’t want to spend hours scripting or editing yourself into the ground. So how do you keep it consistent, valuable, and – let’s be honest – fun? That’s exactly what I got into with Mike Montague, founder of Avenue9 and host of the *Human-First AI Marketing Podcast.* Mike’s been around the block more than a few times. He started back in the radio days, rode the wave into internet radio, built massive company shows with millions of downloads, and still finds time to do passion projects just for fun. The man knows how to stick with it. # Iron Man, Not Terminator Mike has this great way of explaining his approach to AI. Instead of the “Terminator” model (robots running wild), he leans on the “Iron Man” version – human in the middle, wrapped in tech, using AI as backup. That’s how he runs Avenue9. He helps businesses turn one good conversation into a whole lot of content – blog posts, newsletters, graphics, clips – the stuff most of us groan about doing. The key is the human voice stays front and center. AI just fills in the gaps. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/09/BPS026_Blog-Quote-Card_Mike-Montegue-scaled.jpg "BPS026_Blog Quote Card_Mike Montegue") ### The Podcast Is the Engine For Mike, the podcast isn’t just a fun side project. It’s the thing that keeps his whole marketing machine running. One guest conversation = a new LinkedIn post, a blog, an email, and a fresh podcast episode. That also means he’s never sitting there thinking, *“Ugh, what do I post this week?”* There’s always something useful coming out of those interviews. And bonus: he gets to learn directly from other experts in AI and marketing, which makes his own work sharper. ### Tentpoles, Not Scripts Here’s the advice I think every podcaster should steal: Mike sets up three “tentpoles” for every show. He doesn’t script the whole thing, but he knows what three big ideas he wants to hit. As long as those get covered, the episode works – even if the conversation wanders. On his fun side project (*Playful Humans*), his tentpoles were as simple as: crack a joke, learn about the guest, play a game. It worked because he stuck with it. It’s repeatable, it’s simple, and it’s why he’s still podcasting decades later while others burn out after six episodes. ### Say It Again (And Again) Mike’s last bit of wisdom really stuck with me: just when you feel like you’re sick of saying something, that’s when your audience is finally starting to hear it. Consistency – not constant reinvention – is what builds trust and makes your podcast work long-term. # Ready for the Next Level? If you’re wondering: *is my podcast actually doing what I need it to? Am I measuring the right things? Could I be getting more out of the time and money I’m already putting in?* then you might want to grab a copy of [Podcasting for Business](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book)! Podcasting for Business outlines the entire Business Podcast Blueprints methdology and goes into detail about how t optimize your show for 15 different business outcomes, from more referral partners to a shorter sales cycle. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/PFB-Book-Mockups.png "PFB Book Mockups") # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. ## Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet - and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you're ready to launch or level up your show, let's talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) ### Keep Learning: [![How to Build Your Framework Into Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2026/07/BPS030_Paul-Pape_featureimage-400x250.webp)](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-build-your-framework-into-your-podcast/) ## [How to Build Your Framework Into Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-build-your-framework-into-your-podcast/) How to Build Your Framework Into Your PodcastWith Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast SpotlightIf you have a... **Categories:** Blog, Podcast --- ### [Sometimes You Just Need a New Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/sometimes-you-just-need-a-new-podcast/) **Published:** September 4, 2025 **Author:** Darla Fields **Content:** # Sometimes You Just Need a New Podcast With Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast Spotlight Sometimes the best move for your business is letting go of a show that’s worked well in the past so you can create one that speaks directly to the people you need to reach right now. # Listen to the Episode Now: Subscribe on [Apple Podcasts](https://podcasts.apple.com/ca/podcast/the-business-podcast-spotlight/id1801282981), [Spotify](https://open.spotify.com/show/0t8M5xTxALwoGe8sues7kw), your [your favorite other podcast player](https://pod.link/1801282981)! # The Situation When Lisa Mulligan joined me on the Business Podcast Spotlight, she’d already recorded close to 150 episodes of A Dog Called Diversity. The show had helped her build her personal brand, expand her understanding of inclusion, and even bring in new clients who felt like they already knew her. But as her consulting business, The Culture Ministry, started focusing more on senior leaders and board-level work, Lisa realized the podcast she loved wasn’t quite reaching the people she most wanted to connect with. Now, with a book in the works and a new show on the horizon, she’s making the brave choice to close one chapter and open another. # About Lisa Mulligan From steel plants to boardrooms, Lisa Mulligan has seen workplace culture from every angle. She’s the founder and CEO of The Culture Ministry, where she helps organizations build more inclusive, human-centered environments. With a background in global corporate leadership, she brings practical know-how to senior teams, employee groups, and executives who want to lead better. Lisa is also the host of A Dog Called Diversity podcast, where she’s recorded nearly 150 conversations about what it really means to be different at work and in the world. Outside of her work, she’s based in New Zealand with her family, loves to travel, and enjoys the constant energy of raising two teenage boys. # What’s Happened So Far ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/09/BPS024_Blog-Quote-Card_Lisa-Mulligan-scaled.jpg "BPS024_Blog Quote Card_Lisa Mulligan") Looking at Lisa’s journey, she’s built something really special with *A Dog Called Diversity*. Close to 150 episodes, hundreds of meaningful conversations, and an entire network of people she now considers friends. Along the way, the show has done double duty: expanding her own knowledge of inclusion and culture, while also bringing in clients who felt like they already knew her before they ever booked a call. Not bad for a podcast that started as a side project during lockdown brainstorming on WhatsApp. Like most of us, Lisa started with curiosity and a desire to learn. She knew her own perspective was limited and decided the best way to fill in those gaps was by listening directly to people whose experiences were different from hers. Turns out, that instinct was exactly right – not only did it deepen her own understanding, it gave her language and tools she could bring into boardrooms and workshops around the world. To get an example of the kind of learning and connection that can come from a podcast, listen to “[I’m exhausted and I want to know why with Michael Lints](https://adogcalleddiversity.buzzsprout.com/1588180/episodes/8236192-i-m-exhausted-and-i-want-you-to-know-why-with-michael-lints)” “[Mum, am I Black](https://adogcalleddiversity.buzzsprout.com/1588180/episodes/7212862-mum-am-i-black)” with Sarah Hempstead and Megan Karigambe and “[The Best Diversity and Incluson Energy with Devon Michelle](https://adogcalleddiversity.buzzsprout.com/1588180/episodes/9426941-the-best-diversity-and-inclusion-energy-with-devon-michelle).” These episodes are well worth a listen to expand your own understanding, and for if you ever find yourself in positions where you need help finding the words to communicate different viewpoints to those who, despite being well intentioned, don’t quite get it. Now, while the show has been generous, insightful, and great marketing tool, her business has shifted. These days, Lisa is focusing less on broad conversations about inclusion and more on senior leaders, boards, and executives who need to learn how to lead differently. Which raises a few big questions: Is the current podcast still the right vehicle to reach those people? Can the audience that loves *A Dog Called Diversity* follow her into this new chapter? And maybe most pressing: how do you gracefully wrap up a project that’s still working, but no longer aligned with where you’re going? As Lisa put it herself, it might be time to celebrate what’s been built and then have the courage to start fresh. # The New Plan As you’ll have heard in the conversation, after reflecting on what’s worked with *A Dog Called Diversity* and what she needs for her business now, Lisa has decided it’s time to sunset the show and start something new. The next podcast will be closely tied to her upcoming book, giving her a clear structure to build from and a natural way to reach the senior leaders and boards she wants to connect with. The plan is to create a first season that mirrors the book – short solo episodes built around each chapter or theme, with a few guest conversations sprinkled in to show what these ideas look like in practice. Keeping episodes around 10–15 minutes means busy executives can actually fit them in, and Lisa can record the whole batch in just a few sessions, leaving her free to focus on the book launch. Once the foundation is set, later seasons can feature leaders who’ve already made the shift from “talking at” to listening and leading differently. These stories will not only resonate with Lisa’s target audience, they’ll also help her build relationships directly with the kinds of clients she wants most. And while it’s never easy to close the door on a show you love, Lisa’s taking the best parts of what she’s learned so far – the intimacy of podcasting, the power of a good story, and the ability to spark real change – and channeling them into something that’s aligned with the next stage of her business. # Business Podcast Blueprints Analysis Lisa’s new podcast is a classic **Thought Leadership Podcast** strategy. The main goal isn’t just to keep her existing audience engaged; it’s to position her directly in front of senior leaders and boards as someone with the expertise and perspective they need right now. Her book will provide the foundation for the first season, giving her a clear structure and strong intellectual property to showcase. Short solo episodes will highlight her ideas in a way that’s easy for busy executives to consume, and guest interviews will reinforce her reputation by connecting her with other leaders who’ve already made the shift from “talking at” to truly listening. What this show will do best is increase Lisa’s influence and authority at the very top levels of organizations. It’s not about building a wide audience – it’s about creating the right reputation with the right people. That reputation leads to invitations to speak, chances to get in the room with boards and executive teams, and the kind of brand awareness that shortens the path from first introduction to signed client. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/A-Step-By-Step-Guide.jpg "A-Step-By-Step-Guide") [Get Your Copy Today!](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book) With the *Thought Leadership Blueprint* guiding the show, Lisa can be confident every decision – from episode length to guest selection to promotion strategy – is working toward her most important business goal: being recognized as a trusted advisor to the leaders shaping workplace culture. # How to Use This Strategy So if you want to follow a Thought Leadership strategy like Lisa, here are a few questions to guide you: - What are the big ideas or frameworks you want to be known for in your industry? - Do you already have a book, keynote, or workshop that could provide a structure for your first season? - Who are the people you most want to influence, and what format or length of episode would make it easiest for them to actually listen? - Which guests could reinforce your credibility by showing how your ideas play out in the real world? That’s the foundation of a Thought Leadership show. You don’t need dozens of episodes to start, just a focused first season that clearly demonstrates your perspective and expertise. If you’re short on time, batch recording is your best friend. Write and record your solos in a couple of sessions, then add in a handful of interviews with people whose stories support your main themes. Once you’ve got the season ready, package it neatly alongside your book or other IP, and you’ve instantly got both a thought leadership platform *and* a marketing tool. Done well, this kind of podcast positions you as the person others want to call when they need real answers. If you’re looking for a partner to help you figure out and deploy a strategy that will work for your business, we can help! [Book a call](https://calendly.com/onestone/strategysession), and let’s talk! # How to Track Success Here are the numbers to keep an eye on for a Thought Leadership podcast built to raise your profile with senior leaders and boards: 1. How many executives, boards, or leadership teams invite you to speak, coach, or consult after engaging with the show. 2. The number of new relationships you form directly through guest interviews. 3. Mentions, backlinks, or interview requests that come your way because of the podcast. 4. Invitations to panels, events, or media appearances tied to the ideas you’re sharing. 5. And if you’re curious, you can still track downloads but the real measure of success here is whether the show gets you into the rooms and conversations that matter most. # Connect with Lisa Lisa is moving ahead with the wrap-up of *A Dog Called Diversity* and the early stages of her new podcast and book and we’ll be inviting her back to the Spotlight once it’s live so we can hear how it all comes together. In the meantime, check out her work at [The Culture Ministry](https://thecultureministry.com/?utm_source=chatgpt.com), and if you’re a leader looking to build stronger, more inclusive teams, she’s absolutely someone you’ll want to connect with. Follow Lisa on [LinkedIn](https://www.linkedin.com/in/lisa-ann-mulligan/?originalSubdomain=nz), [The Culture Ministry LinkedIn](https://www.linkedin.com/company/the-culture-ministry/), and catch up on past episodes of [A Dog Called Diversity](https://www.thecultureministry.com/a-dog-call-diversity-podcast) while they’re still available! # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. ## Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet - and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you're ready to launch or level up your show, let's talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) ### Keep Learning: [![How to Build Your Framework Into Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2026/07/BPS030_Paul-Pape_featureimage-400x250.webp)](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-build-your-framework-into-your-podcast/) ## [How to Build Your Framework Into Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-build-your-framework-into-your-podcast/) How to Build Your Framework Into Your PodcastWith Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast SpotlightIf you have a... **Categories:** Blog, Podcast --- ### [That Interview Sucked. Now What?](https://onestonecreative.net/that-interview-sucked-now-what/) **Published:** August 28, 2025 **Author:** Darla Fields **Content:** # That Interview Sucked. Now What? With Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast Spotlight You prep, you plan, you send the emails… and then you sit down with a guest and realize about five minutes in that this conversation is going nowhere good. # Listen to the Episode Now: Subscribe on [Apple Podcasts](https://podcasts.apple.com/ca/podcast/the-business-podcast-spotlight/id1801282981), [Spotify](https://open.spotify.com/show/0t8M5xTxALwoGe8sues7kw), your [your favorite other podcast player](https://pod.link/1801282981)! # What Do You Do When an Interview Goes Terribly Wrong? It happens. You prep, you plan, you send the emails… and then you sit down with a guest and realize about five minutes in that this conversation is going nowhere good. On this week’s *Business Podcast Spotlight,* I’m talking about the nightmare scenario every host eventually faces: the bad interview. The one where questions don’t land, answers don’t make sense, and both you and your guest leave the call wondering what just happened. (Yes, I recently had one. No, you’ll never hear it.) On this show, I help business podcasters create smart, sustainable, and profitable shows. And sometimes that means figuring out how to recover – or at least learn – from the not-so-great episodes. # Why Interviews Bomb (and It’s Not Always You) Sometimes guests don’t prepare. They don’t listen to an episode, skim the prep email, or don’t really understand the purpose of your show. That’s frustrating, but it’s not always malicious. People are busy, nervous, or just not used to the medium. Other times? They’re more interested in pitching themselves than in having an actual conversation. That’s when you smile politely, hit stop, and vow never to release the recording. (Pro tip: keep an “emergency solo episode” in your back pocket for exactly this situation.) And of course, sometimes hosts mess it up, too. I’ve caught myself sounding impatient or explaining things in ways that didn’t land. Interviewing is a skill, and like any skill, you only get better by practicing, usually with real humans who don’t always say exactly what you hoped they would. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/BPS023_Quote-Card_Interview-Sucked-scaled.jpg "BPS023_Quote Card_Interview Sucked") ### How to Steer a Conversation Back on Track If you’ve got a structured show with a set format, there’s less room to improvise – but you can still: - Pause and give more context about your audience. - Ask for stories or examples instead of one-word answers. - Share what kind of response would be helpful (without sounding like a teacher handing back homework). If you’ve got a looser, conversational format, you’ve got more wiggle room. You can detour into their personal stories, ask for advice, or even joke your way through the awkwardness. The important part is making your guest feel comfortable enough to share something worth listening to. ### Prep Matters (But You Can’t Control Everything) A few things that make a big difference: - **Prep calls.** A quick 15-minute chat before the real recording helps everyone relax and sets expectations. - **Clear emails.** Share your outline, your goals, and maybe a note that, yes, you really do expect them to listen to an episode or two. - **Boundaries.** If your guest doesn’t align with your show’s format, it’s better to find out early. But here’s the kicker: you can’t force people to prepare. You can only set the stage as best you can and then do your best in the moment. ### Lessons from the Rough Ones The hardest interviews are usually the ones that teach you the most. I can’t control if someone listens to an episode or reads the prep email, but I can control how I respond when things start going sideways. In this case, I probably could have explained things in a way that felt less sharp and more collaborative. I also realized I might need to make it clearer, right from the booking form, that *listening to at least one episode is not optional.* So yes, bad interviews happen. They’re uncomfortable in the moment, but they’re not the end of the world. You learn, you adjust, and you’re a better host the next time around. # Ready for the Next Level? If you’re wondering: *is my podcast actually doing what I need it to? Am I measuring the right things? Could I be getting more out of the time and money I’m already putting in?* then you might want to grab a copy of [Podcasting for Business](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book)! Podcasting for Business outlines the entire Business Podcast Blueprints methdology and goes into detail about how t optimize your show for 15 different business outcomes, from more referral partners to a shorter sales cycle. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/PFB-Book-Mockups.png "PFB Book Mockups") # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. ## Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet - and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you're ready to launch or level up your show, let's talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) ### Keep Learning: [![How to Build Your Framework Into Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2026/07/BPS030_Paul-Pape_featureimage-400x250.webp)](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-build-your-framework-into-your-podcast/) ## [How to Build Your Framework Into Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-build-your-framework-into-your-podcast/) How to Build Your Framework Into Your PodcastWith Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast SpotlightIf you have a... **Categories:** Blog, Podcast --- ### [Making Podcast Numbers Work for You](https://onestonecreative.net/making-podcast-numbers-work-for-you/) **Published:** August 14, 2025 **Author:** Darla Fields **Content:** # Making Podcast Numbers Work for You With Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast Spotlight Knowing what’s really landing with your listeners gets a whole lot easier when you start tracking the right numbers and use them to shape your content, connect with your audience, and grow the parts of your business that matter most. # Listen to the Episode Now: Subscribe on [Apple Podcasts](https://podcasts.apple.com/ca/podcast/the-business-podcast-spotlight/id1801282981), [Spotify](https://open.spotify.com/show/0t8M5xTxALwoGe8sues7kw), your [your favorite other podcast player](https://pod.link/1801282981)! # The Situation When Emily Aborn came on the Business Podcast Spotlight to speak to me, she’d been running Content with Character for years and had the numbers to prove it was pulling its weight – bringing in clients, building collaborations, and even covering its own costs through affiliate income. Now, with a full rebrand to Small Business Casual on the horizon, she’s using her data to guide the shift, double down on what’s working, and create a show that reflects both her business goals and her cozy, human-first approach. # About Emily Aborn From hypnosis to carabiners… our guest today has written it all! Emily Aborn is a Copywriter, Content Marketing Consultant, and Podcast Host. An entrepreneur for over a decade, she’s collaborated with 1,000’s of individuals in over 113 industries as a copywriter. With each one, she unlocks their distinct personality, creativity, and message as she guides them to build cohesive, relationship-based businesses. For fun, she enjoys spending time with her husband, playing word games (are you surprised?), reading, listening to podcasts, and hiking. # What’s Happened So Far ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/BPS022_Blog-Quote-Card_Emily-Aborn-scaled.jpg "BPS022_Blog Quote Card_Emily Aborn") Emily has built *Content with Character* into a show that not only connects with her audience but also feeds directly into her business. She’s used it to share practical, human-centered marketing ideas, repurpose content across platforms, and keep relationships warm, whether that’s with current clients, potential clients, or collaborators. The show has even covered its own costs through steady affiliate income. Over the years, Emily has gotten very intentional about tracking her numbers. She looks at listen-through rates to see which topics land best, keeps an eye on geographic trends to spot growth opportunities, and pays attention to what listeners actually buy after hearing the show. Those insights have shaped her content and helped her align the podcast with her business goals. She’s also experimented with format and workflow – learning where she likes to polish, where she’s fine leaving in a blunder, and how to make her recording process efficient. And while *Content with Character* has been working, Emily’s ready to take it further. Now she’s rebranding the show to *Small Business Casual* to better reflect her approach and give herself more space to talk about the realities of entrepreneurship. The question is how to use everything she’s learned so far to make the rebrand not just a name change, but a growth move. # The New Plan As you’ll have heard in the conversation, Emily’s goal with the rebrand is to keep everything that’s already working – her engaged audience, her clear data tracking, and her efficient solo production – while giving herself more room to talk about the broader realities of running a small business. With her current workflow dialed in and her content strategy fueled by actual listener behavior, there’s no need to start from scratch. The rebrand to *Small Business Casual* will happen on the same RSS feed, with fresh cover art, updated show notes, and a revised bio to match the new direction. Emily will use the launch as a reason to reach out to her email list and social followers, inviting them to check out the “new look” and explore episodes that blend marketing insights with real-world entrepreneurship stories. By continuing to track listen-through rates, geographic data, and conversions, she can test new topics and formats over the next few months and lean into the ones that land best. This keeps the transition low-risk but high-reward, and gives her audience time to grow with the show. The rebrand also doubles as a business development tool – something to mention in collaborations, speaking gigs, and networking as a fresh, timely resource. And because the backend processes are already in place, the focus can stay on creating thoughtful, relevant episodes that deepen connections and keep the business moving forward. # Business Podcast Blueprints Analysis Emily’s podcast is an **Audience Engagement** show, designed to serve and connect with people who already know her through email, social media, speaking, and collaborations. By tracking listen-through rates, geographic data, and conversions, she’s able to see exactly what topics land best and use that insight to keep her listeners engaged until they’re ready to work with her. The upcoming rebrand to *Small Business Casual* will give her more room to explore the realities of running a business alongside marketing and copywriting, which means even more ways to meet her audience where they are. Over time, this consistent, personality-driven approach will build stronger relationships, shorten the sales cycle, and keep the right clients coming through the door. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/A-Step-By-Step-Guide.jpg "A-Step-By-Step-Guide") [Get Your Copy Today!](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book) # How to Use This Strategy If you want to use an Audience Engagement approach like Emily’s, start by asking yourself: - Who is already in my world that I want to keep connected to me? - What kind of content has gotten the best response from them so far? - How can I use my podcast to make it easier for them to take the next step toward working with me? Look at your numbers, which can be listen-through rates, topics with the most downloads, and even which episodes lead to people reaching out. That’s your guide for what to do more of. You don’t have to reinvent everything. You can repurpose older episodes, add a new intro or outro to fit your current focus, and group them in a way that makes sense for your audience right now. If you’re light on back catalog, think about the most common questions you get from potential clients, the advice you repeat most often, or the challenges your audience is dealing with. Build episodes around those. You’ll end up with a show that’s useful to the people who already trust you – and that also works quietly in the background to move them closer to becoming paying clients. If you’re looking for a partner to help you figure out and deploy a strategy that will work for your business, we can help! [Book a call](https://calendly.com/onestone/strategysession), and let’s talk! # How to Track Success Here’s what to keep an eye on if you’re running an Audience Engagement show like Emily’s and want to see if it’s doing its job: 1. How many people from your existing audience are listening – track this through email click-throughs, social engagement, or direct mentions from listeners. 2. The number of inquiries, bookings, or event signups that come from people who reference the podcast (ask them directly or use a specific link for listeners). 3. The revenue generated from those podcast-connected clients or customers. 4. Your listen-through rates and top-performing topics. These tell you what’s keeping people engaged so you can double down on it. # Connect with Emily Emily is moving ahead with her rebrand to *Small Business Casual*, and we’ll be checking back in a few months to hear how the new direction is landing with her audience. In the meantime, you can explore her work, catch up on *Content with Character*, and see how she’s using her podcast to connect with and serve her community. Connect with Emily on [Instagram](http://www.instagram.com/emilyaborn) or [LinkedIn](http://www.linkedin.com/in/emilyaborn), and visit [emilyaborn.com](http://www.emilyaborn.com/) to find her podcast and services. # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. ## Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet - and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you're ready to launch or level up your show, let's talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) ### Keep Learning: [![How to Build Your Framework Into Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2026/07/BPS030_Paul-Pape_featureimage-400x250.webp)](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-build-your-framework-into-your-podcast/) ## [How to Build Your Framework Into Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-build-your-framework-into-your-podcast/) How to Build Your Framework Into Your PodcastWith Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast SpotlightIf you have a... **Categories:** Blog, Podcast --- ### [You Are Your Own Benchmark for Success](https://onestonecreative.net/you-are-your-own-benchmark-for-success/) **Published:** August 7, 2025 **Author:** Darla Fields **Content:** # You Are Your Own Benchmark for Success With Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast Spotlight Figuring out whether your podcast is “working” gets a lot easier when you stop chasing industry benchmarks and start paying attention to what’s bringing clients back, shortening sales cycles, and actually moving the needle in your business. # Listen to the Episode Now: Subscribe on [Apple Podcasts](https://podcasts.apple.com/ca/podcast/the-business-podcast-spotlight/id1801282981), [Spotify](https://open.spotify.com/show/0t8M5xTxALwoGe8sues7kw), your [your favorite other podcast player](https://pod.link/1801282981)! # The Situation When Gwen Bortner and Tonya Kubo came on the Business Podcast Spotlight, they were a year into The Business You Really Want – a show that started as a way to make their private strategy convos public, and quickly turned into their favorite marketing tool. With clients coming back, referrals arriving pre-sold, and a podcasting system that works, they were looking at what’s next: how to track success on their own terms, keep the content sharp, and make even better use of the show in their sales process. # About Gwen Bortner and Tonya Kubo **Gwen Bortner** is a business advisor who provides outside perspective and unwavering accountability. She’s also the one to ask the hard questions others won’t. After four decades of working across 47+ industries, Gwen has learned that marketing and sales have built-in feedback loops – you know quickly if they’re working. But the behind-the-scenes engine that runs your business? That’s where the blind spots live. That’s where successful businesses secretly start breaking down, even when everything looks fine from the outside. Gwen works with women who appear successful but are privately wondering how long they can maintain their current pace before something breaks. Her clients are doing “all the right things” yet find themselves overwhelmed and secretly questioning if this is what success is supposed to feel like. **Tonya Kubo** is a community strategist, fractional chief marketing officer who helps business owners build thriving online communities rooted in connection, not conformity. In addition to co-hosting The Business You Really Want with Gwen, she also hosts Find Your Freaks, the podcast for people who never quite fit the mold. # What’s Happened So Far ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/BPS021_Blog-Quote-Card_Gwen-Bortner-and-Tonya-Kubo-scaled.jpg "BPS021_Blog Quote Card_Gwen Bortner and Tonya Kubo") Gwen and Tonya have built something pretty special with *The Business You Really Want*. What started as a way to capture their strategic conversations and make them public has grown into a consistent, well-loved podcast that’s doing exactly what they hoped it would – bringing former clients back, helping new ones feel ready to buy, and making Gwen’s deep expertise accessible without having to spend hours on one-to-one calls. They kicked things off with a smart live-stream test to figure out what worked (and what didn’t), scrapped their first co-host idea, and leaned fully into their own dynamic – one part operations brain, one part marketing strategist. That balance is a big part of why the show works so well, and why they never seem to run out of things to talk about. They’ve tested production teams, adjusted hosting platforms, navigated a winter dip in downloads, and still managed to keep a four-week content buffer almost all year. Most importantly, they know what role the podcast plays in the business: it’s not top-of-funnel, it’s *nurture*. It’s what turns warm-ish leads into ready-to-go clients. Now that the show is over a year in and gaining traction again, they’re looking at how to double down: track success in a way that actually matters to them, use the content more actively in the sales process, and find a few small ways to make it even easier for people to say yes. # The New Plan As you’ll have heard in the conversation, Gwen and Tonya have a clear sense of what’s working – the show nurtures leads, brings clients back, and shortens the sales cycle – but they haven’t quite built the system around it to *actively* use that content in day-to-day sales and referral conversations. So the plan isn’t about changing the podcast itself. It’s still working, and they love making it. Instead, it’s about making it easier to use. First step: build a simple internal reference sheet for Gwen with episode titles, topics, and quick links, so when she’s in a conversation or discovery call, she’s got her best episodes at her fingertips. Eventually, that can turn into a public-facing episode index or curated landing pages for specific topics like scaling, delegation, or team-building. Second, they’re going to experiment with a warm lead call-to-action – something small and specific, like a bonus strategy session or returning client discount – and mention it lightly in an upcoming episode or two, just to test response. These are easy wins that don’t require a huge time investment or production shift, just small tweaks that help the show do what it’s already doing, even better. # Business Podcast Blueprints Analysis *The Business You Really Want* is a textbook Audience Engagement podcast. It’s designed to connect with people who already know Gwen’s work – past clients, referrals, warm leads – and keep them close, curious, and ready to take the next step. This is where the podcast shines. Former clients come back because the show reminds them what they were missing. Referrals show up almost fully sold, because they’ve spent hours with Gwen and Tonya in their ears. And when someone reaches out after listening, the sales cycle is shorter, easier, and more effective. That’s classic Audience Engagement. They’re not chasing top-of-funnel traffic or industry buzz, but rather they’re creating consistent, thoughtful content that supports their ecosystem and keeps their people warm. The next evolution is about making that content easier to share, track, and plug into conversations, which will only increase the value the show brings to the business. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/A-Step-By-Step-Guide.jpg "A-Step-By-Step-Guide") [Get Your Copy Today!](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book) # How to Use This Strategy So if you want to use your podcast the way Gwen and Tonya are – as a tool to nurture leads and support your sales process – here are a few things to think about: - When someone reaches out to work with you, what questions do they usually have? - Are there parts of your discovery or sales process that could be handled with a well-chosen episode instead of another email or call? - Do your past clients ever “forget” what it was like to work with you, and could a few episodes help remind them? Once you’ve got a few answers to those, go take a look at your episode archive. Find the ones that speak to those moments. Then create a simple doc, spreadsheet, or private landing page with links and short descriptions. Bonus points if you include timestamps so people know exactly where to listen. You don’t need a new season or a whole new show, just a smart way to get your best content into the hands (and ears) of the people who are already almost ready to buy. If you’re looking for a partner to help you figure out and deploy a strategy that will work for your business, we can help! [Book a call](https://calendly.com/onestone/strategysession), and let’s talk! # How to Track Success Here’s what you’ll want to track if your podcast is all about nurturing warm leads and making your sales process smoother: 1. How many people mention the podcast when they reach out to you, whether they’re returning clients or brand-new referrals. 2. How much faster the sales process goes for someone who’s been listening. That can be fewer calls, less back-and-forth, quicker yes. 3. The number of episodes you’re actually using during sales conversations, and which ones get the most traction. 4. And sure, if you like having the data, you can keep an eye on downloads, but the real wins are in the deals that close faster and feel easier because of what your podcast already did for you. # Connect with Gwen Bortner and Tonya Kubo Gwen and Tonya are keeping *The Business You Really Want* going strong and now they’ve got a plan to make it even more useful in their sales process. We’ll be checking back in with them down the line to see how the new systems are working and what tweaks they’ve made along the way. In the meantime, go listen to the show at [Apple Podcasts](https://podcasts.apple.com/gb/podcast/the-business-you-really-want/id1758552890), [Spotify](https://open.spotify.com/show/2K1dQVpRzeygVsBefYt9cy), [YouTube](https://www.youtube.com/@EverydayEffectiveness1), especially if you’re a woman founder or leader who’s building a business that *actually* fits your life. You can also find Gwen and Tonya at [Everyday Effectiveness](https://everydayeffectiveness.com/) – Gwen’s business that is focused on working with women entrepreneurs to really help them build a business that they really want, and where Tonya is the MOO (Marketing and Operations Officer, which definitely deserves spelling out). Connect with Gwen on [LinkedIn](https://www.linkedin.com/in/gwen-bortner/), and find Tonya at [LinkedIn](https://www.linkedin.com/in/tonyakubo/) too — they’re both always happy to talk shop with fellow podcasters and business owners. # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. ## Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet - and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you're ready to launch or level up your show, let's talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) ### Keep Learning: [![How to Build Your Framework Into Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2026/07/BPS030_Paul-Pape_featureimage-400x250.webp)](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-build-your-framework-into-your-podcast/) ## [How to Build Your Framework Into Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-build-your-framework-into-your-podcast/) How to Build Your Framework Into Your PodcastWith Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast SpotlightIf you have a... **Categories:** Blog, Podcast --- ### [Working Towards That T-Shirt Cannon](https://onestonecreative.net/working-towards-that-t-shirt-cannon/) **Published:** July 31, 2025 **Author:** Darla Fields **Content:** # Working Towards That T-Shirt Cannon With Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast Spotlight Getting clear on what success looks like for your show makes it a whole lot easier to decide where to put your time, energy, and money next. # Listen to the Episode Now: Subscribe on [Apple Podcasts](https://podcasts.apple.com/ca/podcast/the-business-podcast-spotlight/id1801282981), [Spotify](https://open.spotify.com/show/0t8M5xTxALwoGe8sues7kw), your [your favorite other podcast player](https://pod.link/1801282981)! # The Situation When Wayne Pratt and Bernie Franzgrote joined Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast Spotlight, they were three years and more than 400 episodes into Knack 4 Business – a show that started over breakfast and grew into a powerful platform for connection, visibility, and real business growth. With a steady 6,000 downloads a week and new opportunities on the horizon, they were thinking through what comes next: how to grow the audience, streamline production, and start turning all that momentum into meaningful revenue. # About Wayne Pratt and Bernie Franzgrote Wayne Pratt is a life and business coach who specializes in helping professionals and entrepreneurs overcome roadblocks, clarify their goals, and take actionable steps to achieve success. Through personalized coaching, he empowers his clients to break through challenges and unlock their full potential. If you’re looking for guidance to move your business forward with purpose and confidence, Wayne is the person to connect with! Bernie Franzgrote, a synergy architect with a robust entrepreneurial networking capacity and 35 years of institutional healthcare experience, has the insight, skills, and operational background to manage and deploy complex projects. A co-founder of Kreative Insight Consultants, and the Knack 4 Business podcast. Also engaged with Phoenix Business Exchange, East Trade Winds, and The Indus Entrepreneurs. He helps businesses starting afresh or launching new products, or services get creatively connected to other companies globally. # What’s Happened So Far ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/07/BPS020_Blog-Quote-Card_Bernie-Franzgrote-scaled.jpg "BPS020_Blog Quote Card_Bernie Franzgrote") Wayne and Bernie have built something pretty special with *Knack 4 Business*. What started as a casual Friday podcast experiment has grown into a well-oiled machine with consistent production, great guests, and thousands of downloads every single week. The show has become a real business asset – helping them build community, make new connections, and open doors to projects and opportunities they wouldn’t have had otherwise. They’ve kept the workflow lean: Bernie handles the editing and production himself using tools like Descript and ChatGPT, and they’ve stuck to a format that lets conversations flow naturally while still giving listeners plenty of value. Between the two of them, they’re managing the full pipeline, from guest outreach to publishing to promotion, and it’s working. But it’s also getting harder to manage as the show grows and new ideas keep coming up. They’ve already seen that the podcast drives results. It sparks conversations that lead to client work, keeps them visible in their networks, and gives them a steady rhythm of content that supports their other ventures. But with growth comes pressure: more listeners means more expectations, and more opportunities mean more decisions to make. Now, they’re asking: *how do we take this to the next level without breaking what’s already working?* And under that question are a bunch of smaller ones: Should we start monetizing more intentionally? Is it time to bring in help with editing? How do we turn the archive into something searchable and valuable? And what will finally get us to that 100,000-download milestone – and maybe even that t-shirt cannon? # The New Plan As you’ll have heard in the episode, Wayne and Bernie have a strong foundation and a lot of good stuff already in motion – so the next steps don’t need to be a total overhaul. It’s more about tightening things up, reclaiming some time, and setting the stage for long-term growth. The first part of the plan is to get some help with editing, just a first pass to clean up the audio, tighten the pacing, and handle the technical bits so Bernie can stay focused on content and strategy. This small shift frees up hours that can go into building relationships, growing their audience, or even launching new offers. They’re also going to create a searchable episode directory right on the website. With more than 400 episodes already out there, that archive is incredibly valuable – but only if people can find what they need. A simple plugin can make it easy for listeners to search by topic or guest, and it doubles as a tool Wayne and Bernie can use to support their coaching and consulting work. For monetization, the next move is formalizing some of the referrals and connections they’re already making. Creating short, natural-sounding ad spots for partners or affiliate links gives them useful data they can show to future sponsors and adds a new revenue stream without changing the feel of the show. And because they’re already thinking creatively about engagement, a listener contest is also on the table. Something small and fun – like a reward for tuning into multiple episodes or sharing their favorite takeaways – can boost interaction and help deepen those community ties they care so much about. # Business Podcast Blueprints Analysis *Knack 4 Business* is a classic **Relationship Building** podcast. The main driver of the show is connection – with potential clients, referral partners, collaborators, and peers across different industries. Wayne and Bernie are using the podcast to meet people they’d love to work with, start real conversations, and open doors to business opportunities they might not have found otherwise. It’s working too. Most guests come in through word of mouth or mutual connections, and those pre-interview chats often lead to collaborations or referrals, whether or not someone ends up on the mic. The show is also helping them stay visible and relevant in their space, and it’s creating an easy entry point for new people to get to know them and what they do. As they start looking at monetization and audience growth, keeping the Relationship Building blueprint front and center is going to help them make smart choices – whether that’s in how they design their guest outreach, how they organize their archive to support client conversations, or how they use the show to drive future business development. This is exactly the kind of podcast that leads to bigger projects, more referrals, and stronger networks and *that’s* what the next 100,000 downloads are really about. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/A-Step-By-Step-Guide.jpg "A-Step-By-Step-Guide") [Get Your Copy Today!](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book) # How to Use This Strategy So if you want to use a relationship-building strategy like Wayne and Bernie, here are a few things to think through: - Who are the kinds of people that would really move your business forward if you had a stronger connection with them? - Are there existing relationships you could deepen by inviting someone onto your show? - What kinds of conversations would be helpful *and* interesting – for you, your guest, and your audience? That’s the starting point. Once you know who you want to be talking to, you can build your guest list around that. Think of it like creating your own networking event but you get to control the questions, and everyone walks away with something valuable. To make it easier on yourself, keep your production process simple at first. Use a tool like Descript or Riverside (or a podcast production company if you want the experience to be hassle free), have a consistent format that makes prep quick, and create a short follow-up workflow that helps you stay in touch with guests after the episode goes live. And if you’re already referring people to great resources or service providers on the regular, think about adding affiliate links or partnerships to your workflow – nothing complicated, just a way to make sure the value you’re creating comes back to you in a measurable way. Relationship-building podcasts work best when they feel natural and are driven by real curiosity. The key is staying focused on connection first, the business that comes out of it is just a really nice bonus. If you’re looking for a partner to help you figure out and deploy a strategy that will work for your business, we can help! [Book a call](https://calendly.com/onestone/strategysession), and let’s talk! # How to Track Success Here are the stats you should track for a relationship-building podcast that’s designed to grow your network and open doors to new opportunities: 1. How many new people you invite onto the show, and how many of them you stay in touch with after the episode airs. 2. How many guests (or people they refer) turn into clients, collaborators, or project leads – even if it’s months later. 3. How many introductions or referrals happen because of a podcast connection. 4. And if you want to keep it super simple, just track how many episodes lead to meaningful follow-up conversations. That’s where the magic tends to happen. The best metric for this kind of podcast is whether you’re building the kinds of relationships that lead to real results. Keep an eye on that, and you’ll know you’re on the right track. # Connect with Wayne and Bernie Wayne and Bernie are exploring new ways to grow *Knack 4 Business*, and we’ll be checking in with them down the road to see how it’s going – especially once that searchable archive and listener contest roll out. In the meantime, if you’re looking for real talk and smart conversations about business, you can catch their latest episodes on [YouTube](https://www.youtube.com/@knack4business402) or your favorite podcast player. You can also connect with [Wayne on LinkedIn](https://www.linkedin.com/in/prattwayne/) and check out his coaching work at [Motive8U](https://motive8u.ca/), or reach out to [Bernie at Kreativ Insight](https://www.kreativinsight.com/) and follow his updates on [LinkedIn](https://www.linkedin.com/in/bernie-franzgrote/). And of course don’t miss the show at [Knack4Business.com](http://knack4business.com/)! # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. ## Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet - and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you're ready to launch or level up your show, let's talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) ### Keep Learning: [![How to Build Your Framework Into Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2026/07/BPS030_Paul-Pape_featureimage-400x250.webp)](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-build-your-framework-into-your-podcast/) ## [How to Build Your Framework Into Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-build-your-framework-into-your-podcast/) How to Build Your Framework Into Your PodcastWith Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast SpotlightIf you have a... **Categories:** Blog, Podcast --- ### [The Many Perks of Having a Co-Host](https://onestonecreative.net/the-many-perks-of-having-a-co-host/) **Published:** July 10, 2025 **Author:** Darla Fields **Content:** # The Many Perks of Having a Co-Host With Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast Spotlight Having a co-host isn’t just about sharing the mic. It can boost your content, deepen your thinking, and open up surprising opportunities for your business. # Listen to the Episode Now: Subscribe on [Apple Podcasts](https://podcasts.apple.com/ca/podcast/the-business-podcast-spotlight/id1801282981), [Spotify](https://open.spotify.com/show/0t8M5xTxALwoGe8sues7kw), your [your favorite other podcast player](https://pod.link/1801282981)! # The Situation When Verity Craft sat down with Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast Spotlight, she was just a few episodes into Intelligent Think, the new show she co-hosts with her business partner Christina Wedgwood. What started as a plan to create more video content quickly turned into a full podcast and it’s already sparking real conversations, client leads, and fresh ideas. Verity was looking at how to keep that momentum going, make the most of the content they were creating, and use the podcast to deepen both their thought leadership and their network. # About Verity Craft Verity Craft is a writer, speaker, and book coach who helps purpose-driven experts turn big ideas into powerful thought leadership – usually in the form of a really great book. She’s the co-founder of Intelligent Ink, where she and her team work with speakers, coaches, and consultants to go from rough ideas to polished manuscripts. Verity also co-hosts Intelligent Think, a podcast that digs into how strong thinking leads to stronger impact, and showcases the kind of collaboration and creativity her clients get to experience firsthand. # What’s Happened So Far ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/07/BPS017_Quote-Card_Verity-Craft-scaled.jpg "BPS017_Quote Card_Verity Craft") Looking at Verity’s situation, she and Christina had already built a strong business helping purpose-driven experts write powerful, impactful books. They knew they wanted to create more content but the original idea did not include podcasting. They simply started filming the kinds of conversations they were already having behind the scenes. Pretty quickly, those conversations became *Intelligent Think –* a co-hosted show that highlights the kind of deep thinking and collaboration their clients get when working with the team at Intelligent Ink. Without overengineering it, the show has already sparked great feedback, opened up conversations with their network, and even led to a new client inquiry from someone who never thought they’d write a book… until they heard the podcast. The format alternates between co-hosted episodes and guest interviews, and early signs show the conversations between Verity and Christina are resonating especially well. They’re also repurposing episodes into strong social content, with up to 18 clips per show fueling their marketing strategy. The podcast is doing a few key things already: It shows off the dynamic between Verity and Christina – the same dynamic clients experience when they work with them as thinking partners. It gives potential partners and collaborators a real sense of what they’re about and how they work. And it’s building a growing archive of smart, useful content they can continue to repurpose and build from. Now the question is how to keep using the show to drive growth without adding too much to the to-do list. That brings up a few smaller questions: How do you stay consistent when time is tight? Can repurposing and planning be handed off? What kind of guests or formats will grow the network *and* the brand? And most importantly – how do you keep showing up in a way that reflects your values and gets real results? # The New Plan As you’ll have heard in the episode, Verity and Christina are off to a strong start with *Intelligent Think* and now it’s all about doing more with less effort. They already work with a videographer for recording and editing, and Verity’s using tools like Opus to slice episodes into social clips – but she’s still handling a lot of the posting and promo herself. The plan now is to bring someone in to help with that side of things, so the content doesn’t just *exist*, it actually *works*. They’re also going to be more intentional about using the podcast to grow their network – choosing guests with partnership potential, and maybe even sneaking in the occasional prep call (which Verity admits she’s skipped so far… because everyone’s been a friend). No new feed, no fancy restructure – just refining what’s already working, so the show can keep growing without turning into a full-time job. # Business Podcast Blueprints Analysis *Intelligent Think* is a classic Thought Leadership Podcast. It’s all about sharing ideas, exploring frameworks, and modeling the kind of deep thinking Verity and Christina bring to their client work. Rather than pushing sales or chasing clicks, the show builds credibility over time by showing how they think, what they care about, and how they approach complex topics. It’s helping them grow their reputation, attract like-minded collaborators, and spark interest from people who want to do meaningful work with their ideas. It’s thoughtful, intentional, and built to last, which makes it a strong foundation for long-term authority and visibility. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/A-Step-By-Step-Guide.jpg "A-Step-By-Step-Guide") [Get Your Copy Today!](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book) # How to Use This Strategy If you want to use this kind of strategy for a thought leadership podcast, here are a few good places to start: - What ideas or opinions do you have that *aren’t* being talked about enough in your industry? - Where do you have a unique way of looking at things? - What kinds of thinking do your best clients need to see in action before they trust you? Those are the seeds of strong episodes. From there, think about how you can use your show to work through ideas in real time – either solo, with a co-host, or with guests who challenge you (in a good way). If you’re not sure where to begin, record a few casual conversations with people you already trust. Then pull out the themes and insights you naturally come back to. That’s your thought leadership – start sharing it. If you’re looking for a partner to help you figure out and deploy a strategy that will work for your business, we can help! [Book a call](https://calendly.com/onestone/strategysession), and let’s talk! # How to Track Success Here are the stats to keep an eye on for a podcast that’s all about building authority and sharing your ideas: 1. How many people mention the podcast when they reach out to work with you or reference specific episodes in conversations. 2. The number of invitations you get to speak, collaborate, or be a guest on other shows (especially if they come from people who’ve listened). 3. Any growth in your network – LinkedIn connections, newsletter signups, or general visibility that you can tie back to the show. 4. And if you like tracking downloads, go for it, but focus more on *who* is listening and how they’re engaging than just the number itself. # Connect with Verity Verity Craft is a writer, speaker, and book coach who helps purpose-driven experts turn big ideas into powerful thought leadership – usually in the form of a really great book. She’s the co-founder of Intelligent Ink, where she and her team work with speakers, coaches, and consultants to go from rough ideas to polished manuscripts. Verity also co-hosts Intelligent Think, a podcast that digs into how strong thinking leads to stronger impact, and showcases the kind of collaboration and creativity her clients get to experience firsthand. # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. ## Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet - and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you're ready to launch or level up your show, let's talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) ### Keep Learning: [![How to Build Your Framework Into Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2026/07/BPS030_Paul-Pape_featureimage-400x250.webp)](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-build-your-framework-into-your-podcast/) ## [How to Build Your Framework Into Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-build-your-framework-into-your-podcast/) How to Build Your Framework Into Your PodcastWith Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast SpotlightIf you have a... **Categories:** Blog, Podcast --- ### [Release Cadences for Every Business Goal](https://onestonecreative.net/release-cadences-for-every-business-goal/) **Published:** July 3, 2025 **Author:** Darla Fields **Content:** # Release Cadences for Every Business Goal With Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast Spotlight Weekly, bi-weekly, seasonal, limited run… figuring out how often to release your podcast might not be the flashiest decision you’ll ever make but it is one of the most important. # Listen to the Episode Now: Subscribe on [Apple Podcasts](https://podcasts.apple.com/ca/podcast/the-business-podcast-spotlight/id1801282981), [Spotify](https://open.spotify.com/show/0t8M5xTxALwoGe8sues7kw), your [your favorite other podcast player](https://pod.link/1801282981)! # What’s the Best Podcast Release Cadence for Your Business? Weekly, bi-weekly, seasonal, limited run… figuring out how often to release your podcast might not be the flashiest decision you’ll ever make but it is one of the most important. In this episode of *The Business Podcast Spotlight*, we’re revisiting a classic from *The Company Show* (last in the replay series!), we’re throwing it back to a conversation all about release cadences – aka, how often your podcast shows up for your audience. Spoiler alert: “weekly” isn’t the only option, and it might not even be the best one for you. I’m Megan Dougherty, and on *The Business Podcast Spotlight*, I love helping business owners create sustainable, profitable shows. And sometimes that means making tough calls about what you can (and can’t) commit to. If you’ve ever found yourself asking *“Can I really keep this up every week?”* or *“What cadence is best for my goals, my team, and my sanity?”* – this episode is basically your podcasting permission slip and strategy guide rolled into one. # Weekly Isn’t Always the Winner Sure, weekly podcasts are the gold standard. But as you’ll hear, that doesn’t make them the only or even the best option for every business. We break down the pros, cons, and “why-on-earth-would-you-do-that?” moments for: - Daily shows (hint: not for the faint of heart). - Twice-weekly cadences that mix formats. - Bi-weekly and monthly schedules (and why monthly might be… a bit meh). - Seasonal and limited-run shows – perfect if you’re launching a product, collecting case studies, or just testing the waters. Whether you’ve got a lean team, a packed calendar, or just really value your sleep, there’s a cadence that makes sense for your business and we’ll help you find it. ### Your Podcast Is a Promise A key takeaway? Once you set a cadence, try your best to stick to it. “Your podcast is a promise to your audience.” (And no one likes a flaky podcast.) But that doesn’t mean you have to do it all on your own. We talk about ways to build content runways, manage team capacity, and batch record like a boss so that you’re not scrambling every week. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/BPS016_Quote-Card_Release-Cadences-scaled.jpg "BPS016_Quote Card_Release Cadences") ### Limited-Run Shows = Big ROI (With a Finish Line) One of our favourite strategies? The limited release season. These 6–12 episode sprints are amazing for: - Launching a new offer or event - Educating new leads - Creating internal team training content - Filling SEO and content gaps - Showcasing case studies to warm up future clients It’s podcasting with boundaries, goals, and a clear end in sight – what’s not to love? ### Final Thoughts Choosing the right release schedule is all about matching your business goals with your capacity. Want fast growth? Maybe a more frequent release works. Need something manageable that still builds momentum? Go seasonal or bi-weekly. Just starting out? A limited-run might be your best bet. Whatever you choose, the most important thing is consistency and making your podcast work for your business, not the other way around # Ready for the Next Level? If you’re wondering: *is my podcast actually doing what I need it to? Am I measuring the right things? Could I be getting more out of the time and money I’m already putting in?* then you might want to grab a copy of [Podcasting for Business](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book)! Podcasting for Business outlines the entire Business Podcast Blueprints methdology and goes into detail about how t optimize your show for 15 different business outcomes, from more referral partners to a shorter sales cycle. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/PFB-Book-Mockups.png "PFB Book Mockups") # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. ## Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet - and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you're ready to launch or level up your show, let's talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) ### Keep Learning: [![How to Build Your Framework Into Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2026/07/BPS030_Paul-Pape_featureimage-400x250.webp)](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-build-your-framework-into-your-podcast/) ## [How to Build Your Framework Into Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-build-your-framework-into-your-podcast/) How to Build Your Framework Into Your PodcastWith Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast SpotlightIf you have a... **Categories:** Blog, Podcast --- ### [The Formula for Profitable Podcasts](https://onestonecreative.net/the-formula-for-profitable-podcasts/) **Published:** June 6, 2025 **Author:** Darla Fields **Content:** # The Formula for Profitable Podcasts With Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast Spotlight We’ve made it a dozen episodes into the Business Podcast Spotlight — can you believe that? # Listen to the Episode Now: Subscribe on [Apple Podcasts](https://podcasts.apple.com/ca/podcast/the-business-podcast-spotlight/id1801282981), [Spotify](https://open.spotify.com/show/0t8M5xTxALwoGe8sues7kw), your [your favorite other podcast player](https://pod.link/1801282981)! # Podcast Value Math We’ve made it a dozen episodes into the Business Podcast Spotlight — can you believe that? Over the last few months, we’ve looked at how podcasts can drive real results for businesses: building relationships, creating content, converting leads, growing audiences… all the good stuff. But today, I want to hit pause on the guest interviews and take a few minutes to talk to you directly. Why? Because there’s one big idea underneath everything we’ve talked about so far — one principle that can completely change how you think about your podcast. Ready? # Three Simple Steps Here it is: your podcast is not some mysterious thing that either works or doesn’t. It’s a tool. One you can design, shape, and optimize to do very specific jobs for your business. And once you start seeing your show that way — as a flexible, goal-driven asset — things start to get a whole lot clearer (and a lot more fun). That’s where something I call Podcast Value Math comes in. Sounds a little technical? I promise it doesn’t have to be (unless you want it to). Podcast Value Math is a way to figure out what you want your podcast to do, what parts of your podcast actually *create* that value, and what you can tweak or change to get *more* of the value you care about. That’s it. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/BPS012_Quote-Card_Megan-Podcast-Math-scaled.jpg "BPS012_Quote Card_Megan Podcast Math") It’s just three steps: 1. What’s valuable to you? Sales? Referrals? Joy? (Yes, joy counts.) 2. What parts of your podcast help create that value? 3. What can you do to those parts to increase the value you’re getting? For example: maybe you want your podcast to save your team time. Great! Then you look at how often they refer people to episodes, or how you structure your content so it can be reused in support documents. Once you know those are your levers, you can start improving them — like making instructions clearer, or creating more search-friendly clips. Maybe you want sponsorship dollars. Maybe you want recognition at industry events. Maybe you just want more laughs in your week. Whatever “value” means to you, you can figure it out, track it, and build for it. That’s the magic. So in this episode, I’m walking you through that whole framework — straight from the pages of my book *Podcasting for Business* — so you can start applying it to your own show today. Because once you know what matters, you can stop worrying about what doesn’t. (Spoiler alert: it might not be your download numbers.) # Ready for the Next Level? If you’re wondering: *is my podcast actually doing what I need it to? Am I measuring the right things? Could I be getting more out of the time and money I’m already putting in?* then you might want to grab a copy of [Podcasting for Business](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book)! Podcasting for Business outlines the entire Business Podcast Blueprints methdology and goes into detail about how t optimize your show for 15 different business outcomes, from more referral partners to a shorter sales cycle. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/PFB-Book-Mockups.png "PFB Book Mockups") # Learn How to Apply This Framework to Your Business And hey, if you want to go even deeper and apply this framework directly to your business and your goals, I’d love to work with you on a Business Podcast Blueprints Action Plan. It’s a collaborative process where we design (or refine!) your show to do exactly what you want it to do. No guesswork, no fluff. You can learn more about those [right here](https://onestonecreative.net/action)! # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. ## Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet - and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you're ready to launch or level up your show, let's talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) ### Keep Learning: [![How to Build Your Framework Into Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2026/07/BPS030_Paul-Pape_featureimage-400x250.webp)](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-build-your-framework-into-your-podcast/) ## [How to Build Your Framework Into Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-build-your-framework-into-your-podcast/) How to Build Your Framework Into Your PodcastWith Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast SpotlightIf you have a... **Categories:** Blog, Podcast --- ### [Podcasting for Personal and Professional Development](https://onestonecreative.net/podcasting-for-personal-and-professional-development/) **Published:** May 29, 2025 **Author:** Darla Fields **Content:** # Podcasting for Personal and Professional Development With Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast Spotlight You’ve used podcasting to grow your business—so how do you shift gears and create a show that’s driven by curiosity, not conversions? # Listen to the Episode Now: Subscribe on [Apple Podcasts](https://podcasts.apple.com/ca/podcast/the-business-podcast-spotlight/id1801282981), [Spotify](https://open.spotify.com/show/0t8M5xTxALwoGe8sues7kw), your [your favorite other podcast player](https://pod.link/1801282981)! # The Situation When David (Ledge) Ledgerwood came on the Business Podcast Spotlight, he was already a seasoned podcaster with hundreds of episodes behind him – and a track record of using podcasts to build real business relationships. But this time, the goal was different. He was in the early stages of planning a new show, one built around personal curiosity and deeper conversations, completely separate from work. The challenge? Shaping a podcast that feeds creativity and connection, while still leaving the door open for meaningful professional outcomes. # About David (Ledge) Ledgerwood David (Ledge) Ledgerwood is a long-time entrepreneur and agency founder who’s spent his career building businesses, closing deals, and using podcasts as powerful tools for connection. He’s worked with B2B service firms across the board and has a particular love for helping podcast agencies grow and thrive. Through projects like Listen Network, Ledge is focused on making podcasting more valuable—for creators, clients, and audiences alike. # What’s Happened So Far ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/05/BPS011_Blog-Quote-Card_David-Ledgerwood-1-scaled.jpg "BPS011_Blog Quote Card_David Ledgerwood") Looking at Ledge’s situation, he’s already done a lot of heavy lifting in the podcasting world – hundreds of episodes hosted, guest appearances all over the place, and a proven track record of using podcasts to build real business relationships. But after stepping back for a while and taking a much-needed breather, he’s feeling the itch again, only this time, the goal is different. In the past, his shows were built around business development. He invited guests who were potential clients, built strong connections, and followed up with care. It worked – millions in revenue kind of worked. But what made those shows successful wasn’t just the strategy. It was the relationships, the conversations, and the way the content kept providing value long after release. Now, Ledge is leaning into that part even more. He wants to build something personal, something driven by curiosity. *That Made Me Think* is shaping up to be a show about the ideas and interests that fuel creativity – without ever talking about work. No sales angle, no funnel, no pressure. Just smart, thoughtful people sharing what lights them up. He’s already outlined the concept, played around with visuals and branding, and knows he’s got a strong network of guests ready to jump in. He also knows from experience how important it is to keep the workload sustainable, and how easy it is to burn out when a show turns into a chore. So the big question now is: how do you build a podcast that supports creativity and connection without letting it take over your life? And inside that question are the practical ones: What’s the right release schedule to stay consistent but not overwhelmed? How do you keep production light, but still polished? How do you track success when success isn’t about downloads? And maybe most important: how do you make it something you want to keep doing for a long time? # The New Plan As you’ll have heard in the conversation, Ledge is clear that his next podcast isn’t about lead gen or growth hacks—it’s about creative energy and deeper conversations. With that in mind, we landed on a plan that prioritises ease, flexibility, and genuine connection over heavy production or tight publishing schedules. The best approach? A consistent but manageable release schedule (monthly or bi-weekly) supported by tools and systems he already owns through his businesses. No need to reinvent the wheel—his production and distribution infrastructure is already solid. What matters most is keeping it lightweight and enjoyable, so it remains something he *wants* to do, not something he *has* to do. He’s also going to batch-record a handful of early episodes with trusted peers to build momentum and ease back into the hosting chair. From there, promotion will focus on relationship-building, with clips and content that highlight the guest, not the host. This keeps things aligned with the spirit of the show—curiosity, creativity, and connection—and naturally invites the right people to listen and engage. Because the conversations are broad and human, they can stand alone or be grouped into themes over time if needed. The show isn’t tied to a funnel—it’s tied to a sense of exploration. And that gives it the space to grow into whatever it needs to be. # Business Podcast Blueprints Analysis Ledge’s new podcast concept, *That Made Me Think*, is a classic example of a Relationship Building show – just with a personal twist. He’s intentionally stepping away from direct business talk, but the strategy is still rooted in connection. The guests he’s inviting are people he already knows, works alongside, or respects from within his industry. These aren’t random interviews, they’re carefully chosen opportunities to deepen relationships, spark new ones, and create memorable conversations that can lead to long-term collaborations. By focusing on personal interests instead of professional bios, Ledge is making space for deeper, more meaningful connections. That’s the real strength of a Relationship Building podcast – it gives you a reason to talk to people you want to know better, and a format that makes it feel natural, generous, and valuable for both sides. Done consistently, this kind of podcast leads to more referrals, better client fit, and stronger networks – and in Ledge’s case, it’s also a creative outlet he’s genuinely excited about. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/A-Step-By-Step-Guide.jpg "A-Step-By-Step-Guide") [Get Your Copy Today!](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book) # How to Use This Strategy So if you’re thinking about launching a podcast primarily to build deeper relationships – like Ledge is planning – here are a few things to consider: - Who are the people you’d genuinely like to spend more time talking to? - What kinds of conversations would feel meaningful and fun, even if they never turned into business? - How can you make your guests feel seen, appreciated, and glad they said yes? Start by listing the top 10 people in your network you’d love to connect with more often. Then pick a theme that gives you an excuse to invite them on for a chat that *isn’t* about work. That’s your first season. Keep the format simple, make them sound great, and plan a follow-up touchpoint after every episode – this is where the real magic happens. You’re not pitching. You’re showing up, listening, and building trust. And if you enjoy it? Keep going. You don’t need a million downloads—just the right conversations with the right people. If you’re looking for a partner to help you figure out and deploy a strategy that will work for your business, we can help! [Book a call](https://calendly.com/onestone/strategysession), and let’s talk! # How to Track Success Here’s how to measure success for a relationship-focused show that’s also meant to be creatively fulfilling: 1. Did you follow through and launch the show you said you wanted to make? (Finishing and publishing is success all on its own.) 2. Are you staying consistent, hitting your release schedule without burning out or skipping episodes? 3. Have you reached the “flip point” – around 50 episodes – where people start asking to be on your show without you chasing them? 4. Are the conversations helping you feel more engaged, creative, or curious in your work and relationships? 5. And eventually, are there signs of long-tail results – like someone reaching out 18 months later and saying, “I’ve been listening, and now I’m ready”? For this kind of show, downloads and analytics are secondary. The real measure is: do you want to keep doing it, and is it quietly opening doors in the background while you do? # Connect with Ledge Ledge is deep into the creative planning phase for *That Made Me Think*, and we’ll be inviting him back to the Spotlight once the show is out in the world to hear how it’s going. In the meantime, if you’re a podcast agency owner (or adjacent) looking to improve discoverability and client retention, check out what he’s building at [Listen Network](https://listennetwork.co/). You can also connect with Ledge on [LinkedIn](https://www.linkedin.com/in/davidledgerwood/)—he’s always up for good conversation, especially if it’s not about work. # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. ## Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet - and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you're ready to launch or level up your show, let's talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) ### Keep Learning: [![How to Build Your Framework Into Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2026/07/BPS030_Paul-Pape_featureimage-400x250.webp)](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-build-your-framework-into-your-podcast/) ## [How to Build Your Framework Into Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-build-your-framework-into-your-podcast/) How to Build Your Framework Into Your PodcastWith Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast SpotlightIf you have a... **Categories:** Blog, Podcast --- ### [Growing a Podcast Audience Strategically](https://onestonecreative.net/growing-a-podcast-audience-strategically/) **Published:** April 10, 2025 **Author:** Darla Fields **Content:** # Growing a Podcast Audience Strategically ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS004_Rodney-Miles.jpg) Launching a podcast with the goal of growing your audience and turning listeners into clients, readers and customers? It’s not always a straight path, and there are lots of choices to make along the way. Do you focus on growth by guesting on other podcasts? Should you optimize your show for conversions, even when you’re just starting? And how do you track the right metrics to make sure your podcast is really helping you build a long-term business asset? Rodney Miles was thinking through all of these questions when he joined me on the *Business Podcast Spotlight*. Rodney is the author of *The Modern Author* and the host of *The Modern Author Podcast*, where he shares his insights from years of writing and helps authors build their businesses. Outside of podcasting, he’s passionate about helping self-published authors succeed. His approach? Build a conversion podcast that’ll help him grow his email list, sell books, and provide real value through interviews and expert insights. After chatting with him, it’s clear that his strategy is shaping up to be a solid one. Let’s dive into Rodney’s plan for his podcast and how he’s going to track his success! Listen to the full episode below, or read on for the strategy! ### **Laying the Groundwork** Rodney is in the planning phase of his podcast journey, and he’s approaching it with a clear goal: to bring value to authors and entrepreneurs who want to write, publish, and grow their businesses. Right from the start, he knew his podcast had to do more than just share helpful information—it needed to play a real role in converting listeners into leads and sales. He’s already built a solid foundation for his business, and the podcast is shaping up to be another tool to help him hit those goals. Even though the show hasn’t launched yet, Rodney’s thinking strategically about how to use it from day one to generate momentum—and more importantly, results. The big idea? His podcast isn’t just a platform for content. It’s a business asset. He’s designing it to bring in the right listeners, deliver real value, and guide them toward joining his email list or buying his books. And he’s already planning how to measure what’s working. He’ll be keeping an eye on key metrics—like how well his guest appearances perform and how many listeners actually convert into subscribers or customers. He’s also taking a smart step by using Megan’s suggestion to create unique links for each guest appearance, so he can track exactly where leads are coming from once the podcast goes live. ### ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/05/BPS004_Rodney-Miles_Quote-Card-300x300.png) ### **The New Plan** As you’ll hear in our conversation, after chatting with Rodney about his goals and his upcoming podcast, we agreed that a he is looking at creating a Coversion Podcast. He’s not just looking to create great content; he wants to drive specific actions from his listeners, like getting them to sign up for his email list or buy his books. Rodney’s podcast, *The Modern Author*, will start with a 13-episode single-season release. The episodes are already recorded and ready to go. Instead of jumping into a regular release schedule right away, he’s going to focus on a concentrated launch to provide something really robust for people to enjoy while he focuses on growing audience. This way, he can generate momentum without the pressure of weekly episodes. For this first season, Rodney plans to use his existing website as the main hub for the podcast, linking each episode to his promotional material with clear calls-to-action. He’ll also set up a dedicated landing page to capture leads, making sure every episode and guest appearance points to an easy way for people to sign up for his email list or grab his book bundle. The dedicated landing pages will also help him track where most of his leads and conversions are coming from. What’s great about this plan is that it’s simple and sustainable. Rodney can test out how well the podcast works for him and make adjustments as needed, all while keeping the focus on driving conversions—exactly what he needs to move his business forward. ### **Business Podcast Blueprints Analysis** Rodney’s podcast, *The Modern Author*, is a great example of a Conversion Podcast—right from the jump. He’s not just creating a show to talk shop—he’s building a tool that’s meant to drive real results for his business. His plan is to use the podcast (and all the related content around it) to grow his email list and turn curious listeners into book buyers and long-term fans. Instead of trying to make a sale directly from the episode, Rodney’s strategy is to invite listeners into his world—specifically, onto his email list. That’s where he can keep the conversation going and offer value over time. From there, taking the next step—like buying a book or working with him—feels easy and natural. One of the smartest parts of his plan is a free bundle he’s offering right on his website. It includes a downloadable PDF of his book *The Modern Author*, which lays out what it really takes to succeed in today’s publishing world. But that’s not all—he’s also including two other really practical tools: a detailed Gantt chart that maps out the entire publishing process, and a guide to all the major self-publishing platforms, with tips and advice for each one. Together, they make a super helpful starter kit for anyone serious about publishing—and they give Rodney’s audience a real reason to visit his site and sign up. Rodney’s also planning to keep things flexible with the podcast format itself. He’ll be bringing in guests, but he could just as easily mix in case studies, solo episodes, or other kinds of content. The real focus is on value—creating episodes that are useful and interesting, while gently pointing people toward that next step. ### **How to Do It Yourself:** If you’re thinking about using a Conversion Podcast to move listeners through your sales funnel, here are a few questions you want to ask yourself: - Who is my current most important customer segment? - What content should I create to help my listeners make a decision? - What are the most common questions I get on discovery calls? The first step is knowing exactly who you’re creating content for. Are you speaking to aspiring authors, small business owners, or another group? A Conversion Podcast needs to help listeners move toward a buying decision. So, are there topics you haven’t covered that could help potential customers decide whether to buy from you? Think about your sales process—what are the questions you always get asked during discovery calls? These are the types of episodes that can help you move people along in your funnel. Answer their questions before they even ask, and position yourself as the expert who has the solutions they need. ### **How to Track Success** Here are the stats you should track for this kind of conversion podcast season. 1. **Listener Engagement –** Track how many people listen to each episode and how they engage with your content (clicking links, signing up for emails, etc.). 2. **Click-through Rate (CTR) –** Measure how many listeners click on your CTAs (like downloading a free resource or signing up for a call). 3. **Downloads & Audience Growth –** Measure the number of downloads and new subscribers to see if your audience is growing. 4. **Conversions from Podcast Guest Appearances –** Track how many people convert to leads or customers after being on other podcasts. You can use dedicated landing pages for these appearances to help measure this. 5. **Conversion by Topic –** Track which topics in your episodes lead to more conversions. For example, note which specific discussions or subjects generate more sign-ups, bookings, or purchases, so you can refine your content strategy. ### **Next Steps** Rodney is now all set to launch his *The Modern Author* Conversion Podcast season, and in a few months, he’ll return to the spotlight to share how it’s gone. Make sure to follow along and see how the strategy plays out in real-time! If you’re looking to take your own podcast to the next level and boost your conversions, don’t hesitate to reach out for some tailored support. After all, your podcast is a key part of your sales process – getting it right is essential for turning listeners into loyal customers. You can check out Rodney’s services or connect with him on [His Website.](https://rodneymiles.com/) ### **Become a Guest** If you have a podcast, or are considering one for your business, then we’d love to chat with you about how to make it as profitable as possible. Go to [OneStoneCreative.net/SpotlightGuest](http://OneStoneCreative.net/SpotlightGuest) and fill out an application. ### **Level Up Your Podcasting with Solid Strategy** If you’re looking for support with your current or an upcoming podcast – the team at One Stone Creative is ready to help. You can book a free strategy session with Megan Dougherty [right here](https://calendly.com/onestone/strategysession), review our [ongoing and seasonal production options](https://onestonecreative.net/services/), or explore our [new podcast Sprints Program](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/Sprints), where we’ll do all of the heavy lifting for a podcast season that drives your business forward. ### **Never Miss an Episode!** Subscribe to The Business Podcast Spotlight on your favorite podcast platform (here are the links for [Apple](https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/the-business-podcast-spotlight/id1801282981) and [Spotify](https://open.spotify.com/show/0t8M5xTxALwoGe8sues7kw)!) and if you’d like to receive a case study like this every week, you can sign up to the Spotlight newsletter using the form below. **Categories:** Podcast --- ### [Easing Into Sponsorship The Organic Way](https://onestonecreative.net/easing-into-sponsorship-the-organic-way/) **Published:** May 22, 2025 **Author:** Darla Fields **Content:** # Easing Into Sponsorship The Organic Way With Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast Spotlight Your podcast is full of purpose and powerful conversations—so what’s the best way to level up your audio and explore sponsorship without losing the magic? # Listen to the Episode Now: Subscribe on [Apple Podcasts](https://podcasts.apple.com/ca/podcast/the-business-podcast-spotlight/id1801282981), [Spotify](https://open.spotify.com/show/0t8M5xTxALwoGe8sues7kw), your [your favorite other podcast player](https://pod.link/1801282981)! # The Situation When Catherine Crestani joined Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast Spotlight, she had already created something special with Willow Healing Matters. What started as a personal project to connect and share wisdom had grown into a steady stream of powerful interviews, collaborations, and community. Now, with the podcast becoming more central to her work as a leadership coach and intuitive healer, Catherine was thinking about improving her audio quality and exploring sponsorships, while staying true to the organic, heart-led spirit of the show. # About Catherine Crestani Catherine Crestani is a leadership coach and intuitive healer who works with people who are ready to speak up and step into their power in life, business, and health. She’s the host of Willow Healing Matters, a podcast where she has real, grounded conversations about healing, spirituality, and finding your own path. Whether she’s coaching, writing, or speaking, Catherine’s all about helping people tune into their own wisdom and live with more intention. # What’s Happened So Far ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/05/BPS010_Blog-Quote-Card_Catherine-Crestani-scaled.jpg "BPS010_Blog Quote Card_Catherine Crestani") Catherine has built something really meaningful with *Willow Healing Matters*. What started as a personal way to connect with others and share alternative healing stories has grown into a consistent, well-loved show that’s deeply aligned with her values and the work she does as a leadership coach. In the beginning, Catherine didn’t overthink it. She grabbed a mic, started talking to interesting people, and let it evolve naturally. Over time, she found that the podcast wasn’t just helping her speak up and be seen, it was also creating unexpected opportunities: collaborations, referrals, new ideas for her writing, and real connections with listeners and guests. She’s never been focused on metrics or downloads, but the ripple effects in her business have been clear. The show helps her build community, deepen her network, and share her voice and values with the people who need to hear them. Now, with guest bookings coming in steadily and the show releasing twice a week, Catherine’s thinking about the next phase: improving her audio quality, streamlining the process, and maybe even exploring sponsorship. The big question is *how to grow the show professionally without losing the organic, intuitive style that makes it so special*. Which leads to smaller, more practical questions: What tools can make the audio and editing easier? Is it time to invest in better gear? How do you explore sponsorship in a way that still feels aligned? And what does success look like, when the show is already doing so much? # The New Plan As you’ll have heard in the conversation, Catherine isn’t looking to overhaul everything – her podcast is working really well as it is. But with sponsorship opportunities starting to appear and a strong guest pipeline already in place, there’s room to refine a few key areas without losing the heart of the show. The focus now is on upgrading her recording setup to improve audio quality across the board. That likely means switching to a dual-ended recording platform like Riverside or Squadcast, and investing a bit of time in learning a basic editing tool like Audacity so she can balance guest and host audio more effectively. We also talked about starting small with monetization – specifically affiliate partnerships with brands or creators she already loves and trusts. This gives her a way to explore sponsorship in a low-pressure, totally values-aligned way while gathering the kind of data that will help with more formal partnerships later on. No huge rebrand. No pressure to chase numbers. Just a few smart tweaks that will support the podcast’s growth, make the process a little smoother, and open up new possibilities, while keeping the intuitive, collaborative spirit of Willow Healing Matters intact. # Business Podcast Blueprints Analysis Catherine’s show, Willow Healing Matters, is a clear example of a Relationship Building podcast. From the very beginning, her goal hasn’t been audience size or download numbers – it’s been real, meaningful conversations with people she’s drawn to intuitively. That openness has created a strong and growing network of collaborators, colleagues, and kindred spirits. The podcast is also serving her business by deepening those relationships over time. Guests often become partners in other projects, collaborators on book ideas, or people she introduces to others in her network. Relationship Building shows don’t need big audiences or fancy production – but with sponsorship becoming a possibility, improving her audio quality will help support that next phase. Even with those improvements, the purpose of the show will stay the same: creating space for connection, sharing, and long-term growth through conversation. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/A-Step-By-Step-Guide.jpg "A-Step-By-Step-Guide") [Get Your Copy Today!](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book) # How to Use This Strategy If you want to take a relationship-building approach with your podcast, here are a few good questions to start with: - Who are the kinds of people I want stronger relationships with – potential clients, collaborators, referral partners? - What kind of space can I create on my show that makes them feel seen, heard, and genuinely appreciated? - Am I doing enough with those connections after the episode goes live? Start by making a list of people you’d love to talk to, not because they’ll buy something right away, but because a relationship with them would be meaningful for your business long-term. Then think about how you can highlight *them* in the episode – ask about their work, their goals, and share their message widely. After the episode, keep the conversation going. That might mean introducing them to someone in your network, sharing a resource, or following up when a collaboration idea hits you later. This isn’t about fast funnels, it’s about real trust, built through conversation. And if you’re not sure how to start? Pick someone you admire, hit record, and just see where the conversation takes you. That’s how Catherine started – and it worked. If you’re looking for a partner to help you figure out and deploy a strategy that will work for your business, we can help! [Book a call](https://calendly.com/onestone/strategysession), and let’s talk! # How to Track Success For a relationship-building podcast like *Willow Healing Matters*, here’s what you’ll want to keep an eye on: 1. How many meaningful connections come out of your interviews – this could be collaborations, referrals, or follow-up conversations that lead to something. 2. How often guests or listeners introduce you to someone else because of the show. 3. Any client or project opportunities that come from people who first connected with you through the podcast. 4. If you decide to experiment with affiliate links or sponsorship, track clicks and conversions from your show mentions – this will give you a baseline for future deals. 5. And if you’re curious, sure, keep an eye on downloads. But for this kind of podcast, the quality of your connections will matter more than the size of your audience. # Connect with Catherine Catherine is exploring new recording tools, brushing up on editing basics, and taking her first steps into the world of sponsorship. She’ll be back on the Spotlight soon to share how it’s going and what she’s learned along the way. In the meantime, check out the Willow Healing Matters podcast on [Substack](https://willowhealing.substack.com/) or connect with Catherine through her work at [Willow Healing](https://willowhealing.org/). You can also follow her journey on [Instagram](https://www.instagram.com/willowhealingsh/) and subscribe to the podcast for fresh episodes full of wisdom, healing, and real conversations. # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. ## Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet - and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you're ready to launch or level up your show, let's talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) ### Keep Learning: [![How to Build Your Framework Into Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2026/07/BPS030_Paul-Pape_featureimage-400x250.webp)](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-build-your-framework-into-your-podcast/) ## [How to Build Your Framework Into Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-build-your-framework-into-your-podcast/) How to Build Your Framework Into Your PodcastWith Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast SpotlightIf you have a... **Categories:** Blog, Podcast --- ### [Your Podcast Has Built Your Network… Now What?](https://onestonecreative.net/your-podcast-has-built-your-network/) **Published:** May 15, 2025 **Author:** Darla Fields **Content:** # Your Podcast Has Built Your Network… Now What? With Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast Spotlight You’ve built a strong podcast, made real connections, and grown your network – but how do you shift gears and start using it to showcase your own expertise and support your business more directly? # Listen to the Episode Now: Subscribe on [Apple Podcasts](https://podcasts.apple.com/ca/podcast/the-business-podcast-spotlight/id1801282981), [Spotify](https://open.spotify.com/show/0t8M5xTxALwoGe8sues7kw), your [your favorite other podcast player](https://pod.link/1801282981)! # The Situation When Slobodan Manić joined Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast Spotlight, he was closing in on 200 episodes of the No Hacks Podcast – a show that had helped him build a strong professional network and connect with industry leaders. But after years of focusing on interviews, he was ready to shift the spotlight. Slobodan wanted to start showcasing his own expertise, bring more structure to his content, and explore how the podcast could better support his growing business and tools like Podpacer, all without losing the authenticity that built his audience. # About Slobodan Manić Slobodan Manic is an entrepreneur and conversion expert who helps marketers and digital professionals optimise their online performance. He’s the host of the No Hacks Podcast, where he’s interviewed nearly 200 industry leaders, and the founder of Web Performance Tools, home to Podpacer – a podcast prep assistant designed to make guest research and post-production content easier. With a background in web development and a passion for smart workflows, Slobodan’s work bridges the gap between content creation and real business results. # What’s Happened So Far ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/05/BPS009_Slobodan-Manic_Quote-Card-scaled.jpg "BPS009_Slobodan Manić_Quote Card") Slobodan has put in the work – nearly 200 episodes of the *No Hacks Podcast*, most of them interviews with industry leaders in CRO, SEO, and digital marketing. He started the show during the pandemic as a way to connect, learn, and build a network. And it worked. The podcast helped him grow professionally, get known in his field, and stay top of mind with people doing exciting work in the same space. But as his business has evolved – especially with the launch of Podpacer – Slobodan’s goals for the podcast have shifted. Interviews helped open doors, but now he wants to highlight *his* ideas, frameworks, and approaches more clearly. He’s interested in experimenting with solo episodes, mixed formats, and content that directly supports his role as a founder and thought leader. He also wants to make better use of the content he’s already created. Podpacer can help with that, pulling insights and clips from past interviews to enrich new episodes and deepen relationships with past guests. So the question now is *how to shift the podcast into something that still feels like No Hacks, but does a lot more heavy lifting for the business.* Which of course leads to more questions you’ll need to answer: - How do you make the transition without alienating your audience? - How do you repurpose past content so it continues working for you? - And how do you keep showing up consistently — without doing everything alone? Here’s what Slobodan is planning… # The New Plan As you heard in the conversation, Slobodan is ready to take the *No Hacks Podcast* in a new direction – one that puts his expertise more clearly at the centre while still keeping the spirit of connection and conversation that’s worked so well up to now. Rather than launching a completely separate show or overhauling the format all at once, the plan is to start weaving in solo episodes and shorter, narrative-driven content alongside the interviews. This gives him space to share his process, test ideas, and make the show more strategically useful without losing the audience he’s already built. He’ll also be using Podpacer to pull relevant moments from past interviews, letting older content do more work in new episodes. This not only keeps relationships warm with past guests but makes each new episode richer with layered insight and lived experience. To support the shift, he’s experimenting with Substack as a community and engagement hub – offering written reflections, bonus content, and easy ways to keep the conversation going. It’s a low-effort, high-impact way to stay top of mind and deepen connections with listeners who are most aligned with his work. It’s a flexible, repeatable model that lets him build authority and stay visible – while keeping time, effort, and overwhelm in check. # Business Podcast Blueprints Analysis Slobodan’s podcast strategy started out firmly in the *Relationship Building* Blueprint – and it’s worked brilliantly. Nearly 200 interviews later, he’s built a strong network of experts, collaborators, and industry peers who know and trust him, and he’s seen real results from those connections. Now, as he shifts into solo and mixed-format episodes, *Thought Leadership* becomes a bigger focus. The new direction will help position him as a go-to expert in using AI and building smart workflows for content creators – especially podcasters. By sharing his own IP, talking through his process, and showing how his tools work in practice, the show can support his authority and visibility in a more direct way. There’s also a light *Audience Engagement* component, especially through Substack, where he’s starting to interact more regularly with his community. It’s a smart blend that keeps old relationships warm, invites new ones in, and helps the podcast serve multiple roles – without needing to start from scratch. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/A-Step-By-Step-Guide.jpg "A-Step-By-Step-Guide") [Get Your Copy Today!](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book) # How to Use This Strategy If you’re thinking about shifting your podcast from a pure interview show to something more focused on thought leadership, here are a few things to think through: - What topics or frameworks do you want to be known for? - Do you already have episodes or guest interviews that touched on these areas you could reference or reuse? - What kind of solo or narrative-style content would help showcase your expertise and make it easier for people to understand how you work? Start by mapping out a few core ideas or processes you want to highlight. These can be short solo episodes or mixed with clips from past guests to add context. If you have a tool or service, think about how your podcast can introduce people to it naturally without sounding like a sales pitch. If you’re not sure where to begin, your past podcast episodes are full of material you can build on. And if you’re already active on LinkedIn or Substack, use those platforms to test what people respond to – then bring that insight into the show. Little by little, you’ll have a podcast that not only builds relationships but drives business too. If you’re looking for a partner to help you figure out and deploy a strategy that will work for your business, we can help! [Book a call](https://calendly.com/onestone/strategysession), and let’s talk! # How to Track Success If you’re evolving your podcast into more of a thought leadership platform, here are the key indicators to track: 1. Do listeners reach out after a solo or hybrid episode – especially with questions, comments, or interest in what you talked about? That’s your clearest early signal. 2. Are you seeing any engagement on Substack or LinkedIn – comments, shares, or replies that reference the podcast content? 3. Are existing listeners sticking around as you shift the format? If your download numbers hold steady, that’s a good sign the transition is working. 4. And most importantly – are you hearing from potential clients or collaborators who found value in your insights? That kind of inbound interest is what turns content into opportunity. # Connect with Slobodan Slobodan is already rolling out new solo episodes and experimenting with content that puts his expertise front and centre, and he’ll be back on the Spotlight in a few months to share how it’s all landing. In the meantime, if you’re a podcaster looking to streamline your workflow, check out [Podpacer](https://podpacer.com/) – it’s built to save time and keep you focused on the parts of podcasting that actually grow your business. You can connect with Slobodan on [LinkedIn](https://www.linkedin.com/in/slobodanmanic/?originalSubdomain=pt) and subscribe to *No Hacks* over on [Substack](https://nohacks.substack.com/) to follow along as the show evolves. # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. ## Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet - and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you're ready to launch or level up your show, let's talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) ### Keep Learning: [![How to Build Your Framework Into Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2026/07/BPS030_Paul-Pape_featureimage-400x250.webp)](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-build-your-framework-into-your-podcast/) ## [How to Build Your Framework Into Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-build-your-framework-into-your-podcast/) How to Build Your Framework Into Your PodcastWith Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast SpotlightIf you have a... **Categories:** Blog, Podcast --- ### [Does Your Podcast Sound Professional Enough?](https://onestonecreative.net/does-your-podcast-sound-professional/) **Published:** May 8, 2025 **Author:** Darla Fields **Content:** # Does Your Podcast Sound Professional Enough? With Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast Spotlight Your podcast has heart, soul, is deeply personal and your guests are inspiring — but how do you make it more professional and easier to manage as it grows alongside your business? # Listen to the Episode Now: Subscribe on [Apple Podcasts](https://podcasts.apple.com/ca/podcast/the-business-podcast-spotlight/id1801282981), [Spotify](https://open.spotify.com/show/0t8M5xTxALwoGe8sues7kw), your [your favorite other podcast player](https://pod.link/1801282981)! # The Situation When Carly Fauth joined Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast Spotlight, she’d already built a unique and heartfelt show with Chemo Coffee Talk. What began as a way to cope with her own cancer treatment had turned into a meaningful platform for survivors, caregivers, and professionals in the cancer space. Carly knew the conversations were making an impact—but she wanted to make the show more polished, easier to run, and better aligned with her business goals, without losing the heart that made it special. # About Carly Fauth Carly Fauth is a certified fitness instructor and cancer exercise specialist who helps people stay active and connected to their bodies during and after cancer treatment. She’s the host of Chemo Coffee Talk, a podcast that began during her own chemo sessions and now features honest, uplifting conversations with survivors, caregivers, and health professionals. Through her business, FitFunCarly, she supports clients with movement routines that prioritize consistency, energy, and joy – no matter what they’re facing. # What’s Happened So Far ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/05/BPS008_Carly-Fauth_Quote-Card-scaled.jpg "BPS008_Carly Fauth_Quote Card") Carly’s podcast journey started in a place most people wouldn’t expect – a chemo chair. She had never planned to launch a show, but when the idea hit, it gave her something to focus on during a really uncertain and frightening time. That shift in perspective – turning chemo day into podcast day – set the tone for everything that followed. She began by inviting friends and supporters to be guests, sharing stories and lessons that helped her get through treatment. Each episode had a personal update, a conversation, and a takeaway the audience could apply in their own lives. Over time, the podcast grew beyond its original purpose. Carly started recording from home, bringing on doctors, survivors, nutritionists, and advocates. The format stayed warm and personal, but the scope expanded. She’s now in her second season and loving the process, but also feeling the pressure. There’s a desire to sound more professional, reach a wider audience, and tie the podcast more clearly to her work as a cancer exercise specialist. She’s juggling production, outreach, promotion, and guest management on top of running a business. Carly knows the podcast is valuable. Now it’s about making it more sustainable and more strategic. The big question for her is: How do you take a passion project and shape it into a tool that actively supports your business – without losing what made people love it in the first place? And underneath that are a lot of smaller questions: How do you group episodes into seasons? What platforms should you be on? When is the right time to bring in help? Can you keep things simple and still make them better? That’s what we explored together. # The New Plan As you probably picked up in the conversation, Carly’s got something really special with *Chemo Coffee Talk –* a podcast that’s personal, purposeful, and packed with heart. The next move isn’t about reinventing the wheel, it’s about tightening things up so the show supports her business without becoming a full-time job (she already runs a business… and probably has a to-do list longer than a CVS receipt). We decided that short, themed seasons are the way to go. Each one can focus on a clear topic – like movement during treatment, cancer nutrition, or mental health support – and still sit on the same podcast feed. To make them feel fresh, she’ll use slightly updated cover art and have a landing page where all episodes live together. That makes it easy to share, whether with potential clients, collaborators, or just someone who needs it. She’ll keep using her current tools and record in batches to keep things manageable. One new piece she’s excited about is adding quick solo intros and wrap-ups to each episode. That way, listeners get more of her voice and insight – and a clearer connection to the work she does through FitFunCarly. She will also be expanding distribution beyond Spotify and YouTube to include Apple and Amazon. It’s a low-effort move that can really help grow her audience. The best part? This plan doesn’t require a huge overhaul. It lets Carly stay true to the podcast’s roots while giving it more structure, a little extra polish, and a clearer role in supporting her mission and her business. # Business Podcast Blueprints Analysis *Chemo Coffee Talk* is, at its core, a Relationship Building podcast. Carly’s goal isn’t just to reach a broad audience but to connect directly with the right people: survivors, caregivers, professionals in the cancer space, and potential collaborators who align with her mission and work. These conversations aren’t just valuable content – they’re bridges to meaningful relationships that can lead to partnerships, referrals, and business opportunities. By inviting thoughtful guests, sharing real stories, and showing up with warmth and honesty, Carly is building trust and visibility in a space where authenticity really matters. Over time, this kind of show creates a powerful network and as Carly gets more intentional about outreach and guest strategy, she can expect to see more of those guests turning into collaborators, supporters, or even clients. Her evolving structure of moving into themed seasons and making the guest process more strategic makes perfect sense for this blueprint. It’ll help her stay consistent, keep the show manageable, and use it as a tool to expand her business relationships while still serving her listeners with heart. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/A-Step-By-Step-Guide.jpg "A-Step-By-Step-Guide") [Get Your Copy Today!](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book) # How to Use This Strategy If you want to use a Relationship Building strategy like Carly’s, here are a few questions to help shape your approach: - Who are the people I’d most like to be talking to – potential collaborators, clients, or referral partners? - What kind of conversation would make them feel seen, valued, and excited to keep in touch? - How can I use my podcast to start or deepen those relationships? Once you’re clear on that, build your show around those people. Invite guests you genuinely want to know better. Prepare in a way that makes the experience valuable for them, not just for your audience. After the episode airs, keep the connection going – send a follow-up, share their work, or introduce them to someone in your network. You can also design themed seasons that make it easier to pitch the show. For example, “This season is all about movement during treatment,” or “We’re spotlighting caregivers this month.” That kind of clarity helps both guests and listeners know why it matters. And remember, your podcast doesn’t have to reach thousands to be successful. If every episode brings one strong connection into your world, you’re doing it right. If you’re looking for a partner to help you figure out and deploy a strategy that will work for your business, we can help! [Book a call](https://calendly.com/onestone/strategysession), and let’s talk! # How to Track Success Here are the stats you’ll want to keep an eye on if you’re using your podcast to build relationships and grow your network: 1. How many guests you’ve had on the show who go on to refer you, collaborate, or open doors to new opportunities. 2. How often a podcast appearance leads to follow-up conversations, introductions, or email exchanges. 3. New client or partner inquiries that mention the podcast—or were clearly influenced by it. 4. And if you want to, you can track downloads and followers too, especially over time or across platforms like Spotify and YouTube. Just don’t let the numbers distract you from the relationships—those are the real wins here. # Connect with Carly Carly’s getting ready to roll out her next season with a clearer structure, stronger guest strategy, and a few upgrades to how she presents the show—inside and out. We’ll be checking in with her again soon to hear how it’s all working in real time. In the meantime, have a listen to *Chemo Coffee Talk* on [Spotify](https://open.spotify.com/show/4hJZy7LfoTykRvkjj9XCVW) or [YouTube](https://www.youtube.com/@fitfuncarly), and if you know someone going through a cancer journey, send it their way. It might be just what they need. You can also connect with Carly at [fitfuncarly.com](https://fitfuncarly.com/) or follow her on [Instagram](https://www.instagram.com/fitfuncarly/) for updates on her work and new episodes as they drop. # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. ## Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet - and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you're ready to launch or level up your show, let's talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) ### Keep Learning: [![How to Build Your Framework Into Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2026/07/BPS030_Paul-Pape_featureimage-400x250.webp)](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-build-your-framework-into-your-podcast/) ## [How to Build Your Framework Into Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-build-your-framework-into-your-podcast/) How to Build Your Framework Into Your PodcastWith Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast SpotlightIf you have a... **Categories:** Blog, Podcast --- ### [Stealing From Yourself For Fun and Profit](https://onestonecreative.net/stealing-from-yourself-for-fun-and-profit/) **Published:** May 1, 2025 **Author:** Darla Fields **Content:** # Stealing From Yourself For Fun and Profit With Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast Spotlight Your podcast is strong, your listeners love it — but what if you could get even more traction without creating a ton of new content from scratch? # Listen to the Episode Now: Subscribe on [Apple Podcasts](https://podcasts.apple.com/ca/podcast/the-business-podcast-spotlight/id1801282981), [Spotify](https://open.spotify.com/show/0t8M5xTxALwoGe8sues7kw), your [your favorite other podcast player](https://pod.link/1801282981)! # The Situation When Justine Beauregard joined Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast Spotlight, she was looking for ways to get even more mileage out of her podcast, People Over Profit. The show was already performing well and helping her build strong connections with her audience, but she knew there was still more she could do. She wanted to make it easier for listeners to dive deeper into her content, strengthen the link between her podcast and her business, and keep growing her community without creating a huge amount of extra work. # About Justine Beauregard Justine Beauregard is a sales strategist and coach who helps entrepreneurs and business owners grow their sales in ways that feel good — not pushy. She’s the host of People Over Profit, where she shares practical advice on selling with more ease, authenticity, and consistency. Alongside her coaching and podcast, Justine also runs free masterclasses and virtual speed networking events to help business owners connect, learn, and keep growing. # What’s Happened So Far ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS007_Justine-Beauregard_Quote-Card-scaled.jpg "BPS007_Justine Beauregard_Quote Card") Looking at Justine’s journey, she’s built *People Over Profit* into a top-ranked podcast by staying focused on connection, value, and authenticity, while running her successful sales coaching business. She started podcasting with the idea that offering free, public coaching sessions would naturally lead to more client work — but quickly realised that while those episodes were helpful, they didn’t have the reach or traction she was hoping for. She made the decision to shift toward short, insight-packed solo episodes and high-quality guest interviews that reflect her expertise more directly and serve her audience more effectively. That move helped her show grow faster — and feel more aligned with how she actually supports her clients. Her podcast now plays a clear and supportive role in her business. It introduces new people to her world in a low-pressure, high-value way, and helps existing leads and community members connect more deeply with her perspective before ever getting on a call. Many of her clients mention the podcast as part of their decision to work with her — they come in already familiar with her style and thinking, which makes the sales process smoother and more collaborative. Now, she’s exploring how to take things even further — not by creating more content, but by making it easier to access and share the gold that’s already there. So the question is how can a high-performing podcast drive even more results — without adding to your workload? # The New Plan As you’ll have heard in the conversation, after looking at where Justine’s business and podcast are right now — and her focus on working smarter, not harder — we looked at creating curated playlists from her existing *People Over Profit* episodes as the best next step. There’s no need for a new podcast feed or brand overhaul — just new, user-focused packaging and presentation of the content she’s already built. By grouping episodes around key topics like sales strategy, client attraction, and ethical selling, Justine can create easy-to-share resources that encourage listeners to binge, stay longer, and engage more deeply. Each playlist can have its own landing page for simple promotion, and can act as a low-lift lead magnet when answering questions on social media, in networking spaces, and through her email list. Over time, these playlists will create an even stronger bridge between her free content and her paid offers — without adding a lot of extra work and can easily be expanded as new episodes are released. Finally, carefully selected and curated playlis can mae amazing calls to action on the podcasts Justine guest’s on to increase her own listening audience. # Business Podcast Blueprints Analysis Justine’s *People Over Profit* podcast is primarily an Audience Engagement strategy because of the way she naturally connects with her audience — sharing real strategies, practical advice, and building trust through her episodes. Her show is already a tool that nurtures relationships with listeners who find her through networking, social media, referrals, or her other marketing efforts. The new curated playlist strategy will make that even more powerful. By grouping episodes around key topics her audience cares about, she’ll make it easier for people to binge content, get quick wins, and feel even more connected to her and her work. Because Justine knows her audience well — business owners and entrepreneurs who value authentic sales practices — the playlists will also give her a simple way to meet new leads where they are, nurture existing community members, and make it easier for listeners to move closer to working with her. We can expect that having these clear, topic-focused playlists will shorten her sales cycle, increase warm lead generation, and strengthen conversions from listeners into clients — all without a heavy lift or needing to create a lot of new content. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/A-Step-By-Step-Guide.jpg "A-Step-By-Step-Guide") [Get Your Copy Today!](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book) # How to Use This Strategy If you want to use a playlist strategy like this to get more out of your podcast, here are a few questions to start with: - What topics do I talk about most with my audience, clients, or leads? - Which episodes already cover those topics — and how could I group them together to make it easier for listeners to find what they need? - Are there any important steps or ideas my audience needs that aren’t covered yet and would be easy to add? That’s the foundation of your first set of playlists — and you don’t need to create anything brand new if you don’t want to. You can simply organise your existing episodes, create a landing page or a Spotify playlist, and add a short intro or outro if you want to give it extra context. And if you don’t have a big archive yet, you can still make this work! Think about the questions you answer all the time in emails, networking calls, or discovery meetings. Those are the conversations you can turn into short, powerful episodes that teach, build trust, and move people closer to working with you — all while giving you a podcast resource you can use again and again. If you’re looking for a partner to help you figure out and deploy a strategy that will work for your business, we can help! [Book a call](https://calendly.com/onestone/strategysession), and let’s talk! # How to Track Success Here are the key stats to track if you want to measure the success of a playlist and audience engagement strategy like this: 1\. How many people click through to your playlists from emails, social posts, or direct links you share in conversations. 2\. How many new leads or clients mention listening to your podcast or a specific playlist when they reach out. 3\. How your sales conversations and close rates change with people who’ve engaged with your playlists beforehand. 4\. And if you want extra data, you can track downloads and average listens per playlist — but the real focus should stay on engagement. # Connect with Justine Justine is getting ready to roll out her new curated playlists, and we’re excited to have her back on the *Business Podcast Spotlight* in a few months to hear all about the results. Until then, listen to her [People Over Profit](https://open.spotify.com/show/7lwMoiPzN7S38N9yCPPdbE) podcast — it’s packed with smart, practical advice for growing your sales the right way. You can also grab a spot in one of her [Free Masterclasses](https://www.justinebeauregard.com/2x-sales-masterclass) for even more sales and business tips you can actually use or meet her at a [Virtual Speed Networking Event](https://www.justinebeauregard.com/virtual-speed-networking) – they’re a great way to learn, connect, and get inspired. # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. ## Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet - and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you're ready to launch or level up your show, let's talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) ### Keep Learning: [![How to Build Your Framework Into Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2026/07/BPS030_Paul-Pape_featureimage-400x250.webp)](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-build-your-framework-into-your-podcast/) ## [How to Build Your Framework Into Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-build-your-framework-into-your-podcast/) How to Build Your Framework Into Your PodcastWith Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast SpotlightIf you have a... **Categories:** Blog, Podcast --- ### [Using a Podcast to Support CRM Users… and Finally Write That Book](https://onestonecreative.net/using-a-podcast-to-support-crm-users/) **Published:** April 25, 2025 **Author:** Darla Fields **Content:** # Using a Podcast to Support CRM Users… and Finally Write That Book With Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast Spotlight What do you do when your podcast starts to feel just a little bit stale – even though the conversations are great – but you know it could play a bigger role in connecting with your audience and supporting your broader business goals? # Listen to the Episode Now: Subscribe on [Apple Podcasts](https://podcasts.apple.com/ca/podcast/the-business-podcast-spotlight/id1801282981), [Spotify](https://open.spotify.com/show/0t8M5xTxALwoGe8sues7kw), your [your favorite other podcast player](https://pod.link/1801282981)! # The Situation When Reuben Swartz joined Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast Spotlight – he wanted to figure out how to reinvigorate Sales for Nerds so it could better support his business and content goals. After over 100 episodes, he still enjoyed the conversations, but felt like the show wasn’t fully aligned with his business anymore. He was ready to refresh the format, bring more structure to the content, and explore how the podcast could double as a tool to serve his audience and help him finally write the book he’s been thinking about for years. # About Reuben Swartz Reuben is the founder of Mimiran, the “anti-CRM” built specifically for solo consultants, coaches, and fractional professionals who want to grow their businesses without feeling like pushy salespeople. He’s also the host of Sales for Nerds, a podcast dedicated to helping expert service providers navigate the business development side of their work with more ease (and a little wine). Through his software, podcast, and newsletter, Reuben supports thoughtful, consultative professionals in building client relationships that actually feel good. # What’s Happened So Far ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS006_Reuben-Swartz_Quote-Card-scaled.jpg "BPS006_Reuben Swartz_Quote Card") Looking at Reuben’s situation, he’s built something really special with *Sales for Nerds* — over 100 episodes of thoughtful, engaging conversations that his audience enjoys. But after years of podcasting, he started to feel like the spark had faded a bit, and that the show wasn’t doing quite as much *for* his business as it could. Reuben originally launched the podcast as a fun way to connect with other experts, share good advice that didn’t all have to come from him, and bring value to his audience of solo consultants and service providers — and it worked. He built relationships, grew his credibility, and even got feedback from listeners who loved the mix of practical insights and relaxed, wine-accompanied chats. But as the guest pitches rolled in and the format stayed the same, Reuben began noticing that episodes weren’t building on each other — and the structure just wasn’t supporting the kind of strategic content he wanted to create anymore. That includes a book he’s been meaning to write, but hasn’t quite started. Now he’s reimagining what *Sales for Nerds* can be: a podcast with purpose, aligned with the business, designed around a structured journey that mirrors the challenges his ideal clients face. So the new question became how to evolve a long-running podcast into a more intentional, business-driven *asset.* That opened up a few other questions, too: Can the podcast structure support the creation of a book over time? Should solo episodes take centre stage — and do they perform better? How can past content be reused to support future goals? What kind of format keeps things fun *and* valuable for listeners? # The New Plan As you’ll have heard in the conversation, after reviewing Reuben’s goals — creating more structured, purposeful content that aligns with his business and supports the creation of a book — we agreed that organising *Sales for Nerds* into themed seasons or content “chapters” is the way forward. No need to start a whole new podcast or change the brand — the existing feed and identity still have value and recognition. The plan is to draft a rough outline that mirrors the solo consultant journey, and then use a mix of solo episodes (where Reuben shares his insights directly) and interviews (to offer varied perspectives) to build out each chapter. These episodes can be grouped visually with simple tweaks to cover art and sorted into playlists or themed pages for easy access. This approach lets Reuben deliver high-impact, evergreen content with a clear structure — and also lays the groundwork for drafting his book in parallel. It’s a model that’s easy to maintain, easy to share, and powerful as a lead-nurturing and authority-building tool — especially when episodes are aligned with the common struggles of his ideal clients. It also gives him the flexibility to create focused, repeatable content for different stages of the consultant journey, while keeping things enjoyable and aligned with his voice and brand. # Business Podcast Blueprints Analysis The new direction for *Sales for Nerds* is a classic Thought Leadership Podcast strategy, where the primary goal is to share Reuben’s expertise, frameworks, and insights in a structured and impactful way — while increasing the authority of both himself and his brand. By developing themed seasons or chapter-based content, Reuben will be able to articulate his core ideas clearly, reinforce his positioning as an expert in consultative selling, and begin creating a foundation for his upcoming book. These episodes will also act as a long-term resource for his audience — giving listeners a clear path to follow and building trust along the way. This approach will help raise Reuben’s profile, deepen the value of his existing content, and shorten the sales cycle by giving future clients a chance to experience his thinking and philosophy in advance. It will also give him a strong, high-leverage way to repurpose content across platforms. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/A-Step-By-Step-Guide.jpg "A-Step-By-Step-Guide") [Get Your Copy Today!](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book) # How to Use This Strategy So if you want to use this kind of strategy, here are a few questions to help guide your next steps: - What core ideas, frameworks, or intellectual property do I want to be known for in my space? - Could those ideas be organised into a “chapter-style” structure — almost like a book or a course? - Which episodes from my existing library reflect those ideas, and which ones do I still need to create? That structure becomes the backbone of your podcast. You can plan your content around it — alternating between solo episodes (to lay out your thinking) and interviews (to explore others’ perspectives or add expert insight). Reusing strong past episodes is absolutely allowed — just reframe them with updated context and a clear connection to your larger themes. If you’re starting fresh, think about what you’d put in a book, workshop, or training series — the things you *wish* your audience understood before they came to you. These are your key episodes. Create a plan, share your ideas confidently, and you’ll be building both your authority *and* a content library that keeps working for you. # How to Track Success Here are the stats you should track for this kind of podcast designed to build authority, support your audience, and contribute to a larger content project like a book: 1. Listen time on themed episodes or playlists — every time someone gets a full answer from your content, that’s one less email, support message, or call you have to take. 2. How often you or your team redirect people to specific episodes to answer common questions or provide onboarding — and whether that reduces time spent on repetitive support or education. 3. Progress toward your long-term content goal — like a book or course. Every episode that fills a chapter or section is a visible step forward. 4. Audience feedback that references your content or ideas — when listeners quote you, share an episode, or reach out because of something they heard, that means your message is landing. And of course, if you’re curious, you can track downloads too — just remember, for this kind of strategy, impact and reuse are more valuable than raw numbers. # Connect with Reuben Swartz Reuben is working on outlining his next podcast season — one that doubles as a content engine *and* the foundation for his upcoming book. He’ll be back on the Spotlight soon to share how it’s going and what he’s learned along the way. In the meantime, check out [Sales for Nerds](https://www.salesfornerds.io/) and explore [Mimiran](https://mimiran.com/) — especially if you’re a solo consultant who wants to make business development feel more natural. You can also follow Reuben on [LinkedIn](https://www.linkedin.com/in/reubenswartz/) and subscribe to the *Sales for Nerds* newsletter for thoughtful insights (and occasional wine pairings). # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. ## Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet - and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you're ready to launch or level up your show, let's talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) ### Keep Learning: [![How to Build Your Framework Into Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2026/07/BPS030_Paul-Pape_featureimage-400x250.webp)](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-build-your-framework-into-your-podcast/) ## [How to Build Your Framework Into Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-build-your-framework-into-your-podcast/) How to Build Your Framework Into Your PodcastWith Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast SpotlightIf you have a... **Categories:** Blog, Podcast --- ### [Boosting Podcast Engagement When You Have A Powerful Message](https://onestonecreative.net/boosting-podcast-engagement/) **Published:** April 16, 2025 **Author:** Megan **Content:** # Boosting Podcast Engagement When You Have a Powerful Message With Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast Spotlight When you pour your heart and soul into your podcast and people just *don’t respond* – it can sting. But you’re not alone – and there are ways to fix the problem. # Listen to the Episode Now: Subscribe on [Apple Podcasts](https://podcasts.apple.com/ca/podcast/the-business-podcast-spotlight/id1801282981), [Spotify](https://open.spotify.com/show/0t8M5xTxALwoGe8sues7kw), your [your favorite other podcast player](https://pod.link/1801282981)! # The Situation When Lorraine Connell joined Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast Spotlight – that is what she wanted to talk about. She has been podcasting for a while now and has a deep passion for her content – and her guests were picking up on that energy. But she hit a point where she felt like she was ready to expand her reach and find new ways to connect with more listeners, and getting traction with them was an ongoing challenge. # About Lorraine Connell Lorraine is the founder of *[Peers Not Fear](https://www.peers-not-fears.com/)s*, a teen leadership coaching business, and the host of [*Leaders of Today: Teens to Titans*](https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/leaders-of-today-from-teens-to-titans/id1591828902). Her mission? To empower young people, ages 12 to 16, by helping them build confidence, develop leadership skills, and prepare for the future. Through her coaching, her podcast, and school programs, Lorraine creates a supportive space for teens to find their voice and step into leadership roles within their communities. # What’s Happened So Far ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS00_Rodney-Miles_Quote-Card-scaled.jpg "BPS00_Rodney Miles_Quote Card") Lorraine has created something truly special with her podcast *Leaders of Today, Teens to Titans*. Now entering its third season, what started as a passion project has grown into a powerful platform that’s supporting her work as a teen leadership coach. And now, she’s ready to take it to the next level. The podcast began during the pandemic when Lorraine was still teaching. She started having deep, insightful conversations with her students about what was working (and what wasn’t) in their education experience. These conversations sparked something in her—she realized that these voices and ideas were too important to keep to herself. So, she hit record. In the beginning, Lorraine interviewed teens directly, giving them a platform to share their perspectives on leadership. But as the show grew—and as finding teen guests became a bit tricky—she shifted gears. Now, she interviews successful adults from all walks of life, asking them to reflect on who they were as teenagers, what they learned, and how those experiences shaped the leaders they became. Through all of these changes, Lorraine has stayed true to what matters most: highlighting the power of youth voices, exploring the concept of self-leadership, and using storytelling as a way to teach and connect with others. The impact of these conversations has been huge—not just for her audience, but for Lorraine’s own professional growth. Insights from her guests are influencing her coaching curriculum, shaping the strategies and tools she uses in schools and during one-on-one coaching sessions. Now, Lorraine is looking to expand her reach and increase engagement. She’s got a listener base of about 25 downloads per episode, but she knows there’s so much more potential out there. She’s been experimenting with promoting the podcast, creating guest-sharing templates, and sending out newsletters, but she’s ready to take things even further. So the big question now is how to grow a podcast that’s already aligned with your mission, but hasn’t yet reached its full audience. And there are many other questions that come with it. - How do you turn compelling, meaningful conversations into content that spreads? - What role should your podcast play in your overall business ecosystem? - How do you encourage more engagement without adding too much extra work? - And how do you keep loving the process while building something bigger? # The New Plan As you heard in our conversation, Lorraine’s main goals for *Leaders of Today, Teens to Titans* are expanding her audience and increasing engagement, all while being mindful of her time. With her busy schedule—coaching, developing school partnerships, and working on curriculum—it’s clear that making big, sweeping changes isn’t realistic. So, we focused on some high-impact, low-effort ways to help her grow the show without overhauling everything. The first step is to **streamline the promotion proces**s. Instead of relying solely on guests to share their episodes, Lorraine’s going to provide ready-to-go promotional assets: pre-made graphics, short copy they can easily post, and highlight clips packed with insights. This will make it much easier for her guests to amplify their episodes and help spread the word. Next up, we talked about pulling out those short, punchy “aha moments” from each episode. These are those **golden nuggets of wisdom** that stand alone as powerful content. By focusing on these, Lorraine can create a simple, intentional social media plan—teasing upcoming episodes, posting on launch day, and even doing follow-up prompts after the episode drops. This means more content, more often, without needing to start from scratch every time. Lorraine’s also going to lean into her newsletter a bit more. Rather than just teasing the top few moments from an episode, she’ll share those *aha moments* with her subscribers, offering extra commentary or reflections. This not only gives listeners more value, but it also **gives them a reason to stay engaged and share the content** with others. To make things even easier, Lorraine’s going to implement a **simple system for tracking key insights from each episode**. Whether it’s a basic spreadsheet or a Notion board, having a log of valuable takeaways will make it so much easier to repurpose content, refer to past episodes, and even reach out to past guests when it’s relevant. And we didn’t forget about Lorraine’s guest appearances on other podcasts. She’s planning to **sharpen her call-to-action**—clearly inviting new listeners to check out *Leaders of Today*. This should help convert listeners from those guest spots into long-term followers. If she feels like experimenting, she could even create unique landing pages for each guest appearance to track where new traffic is coming from. All of these changes fit into Lorraine’s current workflow and will help her get more traction without completely overhauling her show. No need for a rebrand or complex tech changes—just smart, strategic tweaks that will grow with her and her mission. # Business Podcast Blueprints Analysis Lorraine’s podcast is primarily an Audience Engagement show, with some really powerful Relationship Building potential woven into the mix. The real strength of her show comes from its ability to connect deeply with people who already know Lorraine—whether through her school programs, teen coaching, speaking engagements, or social media presence. Listeners get a real sense of who Lorraine is, what she values, and how she approaches leadership, all through the stories her guests share. Most of her audience consists of parents, educators, and school administrators who are already in her professional circle, so the podcast naturally becomes the next step for those curious about Lorraine’s perspective and coaching style. But it doesn’t stop there. By regularly inviting professionals, entrepreneurs, and leaders to share their own teenage experiences, Lorraine is also building meaningful relationships with people who could turn into future partners, collaborators, or clients. It’s not about hard selling—it’s about creating genuine connections. And that’s why it works so well. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/A-Step-By-Step-Guide.jpg "A-Step-By-Step-Guide") [Get Your Copy Today!](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book) # How to Use This Strategy If you’re thinking about creating a podcast like Lorraine’s—one that deepens your connection with your current audience while also building relationships with new people—here are a few things to think about: - Who are the people you’re already serving in your business, and how are they finding you right now? - What kind of conversations, questions, or stories help them feel more confident, seen, or ready to work with you? - Who are some people you’d *love* to build a stronger relationship with—and what kind of story or theme could give them a platform while still fitting with your business? This is where Lorraine’s podcast really shines: she’s using personal stories to bring out leadership lessons in a way that feels relatable, authentic, and directly tied to the heart of her work. If you want to create something similar, you don’t need a huge team or a big budget—just a solid concept and a little bit of structure. Think about the kinds of stories your audience needs to hear to trust your approach, and then think about who you want to tell those stories. That’s your guest list right there. And when it comes to sharing? Make it as easy as possible. Create graphics or audiograms with a key takeaway. Give your guests pre-written posts or snippets to share. The easier you make it for them, the more likely your show is to reach new ears. If you’re a coach, consultant, speaker, or educator, this type of podcast isn’t just content marketing—it’s trust marketing. And hey, if you enjoy having conversations that really matter? It’s also just super fun. If you’re looking for a partner to help you figure out and deploy a strategy that will work for your business, we can help! [Book a call](https://calendly.com/onestone/strategysession), and let’s talk! # How to Track Success When you’re creating a podcast designed to deepen relationships, amplify important voices, and connect with a mission-driven audience—it’s important to track the right things so you know your effort is having the impact you want. Here are a few of the key indicators of success to watch for: 1. **Guest referrals.** When your guests start suggesting other people for you to interview, that’s a great sign that the conversations are hitting the mark and your message is getting through. 2. **Insight tracking.** Keeping a simple list of key takeaways from each episode makes it super easy to reuse content later—whether it’s for social media, newsletters, or even future episodes. 3. **Guest follow-up.** Make it easy for your guests to share their episodes by giving them ready-to-go graphics and copy. The more effortless you make it, the more likely they’ll share. Then, pay attention to what gets shared and how much engagement it brings. 4. **Calls to action.** Whether it’s asking listeners to follow the show, check out a specific episode, or visit the show notes for more info, keep track of who actually takes action when you ask. 5. **Downloads.** While downloads aren’t everything, it can be helpful to see how they fluctuate after sharing or guest appearances. It gives you useful feedback on what’s working over time. By keeping tabs on these, you’ll have a much clearer picture of what’s really moving the needle and what’s resonating with your audience. # Connect with Lorraine Connell Lorraine is diving into this next season of *Leaders of Today, Teens to Titans* with a fresh plan—and we’ll be inviting her back in a few months to hear how it all played out. In the meantime, make sure to check out her show at wherever you listen to podcasts. You’ll find powerful conversations with young changemakers and the adults who support them. If you’re working in youth development, education, or just want a better understanding of the next generation of leaders, it’s a must-listen. You can connect with Lorraine on [LinkedIn](https://www.linkedin.com/in/lorraine-connell-4962ab1b8/), check out [Peers not Fears](https://www.peers-not-fears.com/) and of course – listen to *Leaders of Today, Teens to Titans*! # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. ## Is Your Podcast Profitable? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet - and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you're ready to launch or level up your show, let's talk. [Book a Complimentary Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) ### Keep Learning: [![How to Build Your Framework Into Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2026/07/BPS030_Paul-Pape_featureimage-400x250.webp)](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-build-your-framework-into-your-podcast/) ## [How to Build Your Framework Into Your Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-build-your-framework-into-your-podcast/) How to Build Your Framework Into Your PodcastWith Megan Dougherty on the Business Podcast SpotlightIf you have a... **Categories:** Blog, Podcast --- ### [When Should You Invest in a Video Setup for Your Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/invest-in-video/) **Published:** April 3, 2025 **Author:** Darla Fields **Content:** # When Should You Invest in a Video Setup for Your Podcast? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS003_Karen-Covy.jpg) Divorce is one of the biggest, most challenging and emotionally-fraught decisions a person can make. It’s messy, confusing, and full of uncertainty. That’s exactly why Karen Covy started her podcast, *Off the Fence*. Karen is a divorce coach, author, and speaker, and she’s on a mission to help people stop feeling stuck and start making empowered decisions—whether that means staying, leaving, or finding a completely new path forward. She recently joined me on *Business Podcast Spotlight* to talk about how her podcast has become more than just a content platform—it’s a tool that helps her attract the right clients, build relationships with key people in her industry, and create a real impact for her listeners. We also got into the business side of things—how she tracks the return on her podcast, why she’s thinking about shifting her content strategy, and the simple tweaks she’s making to get even more value from every episode. You can listen to our full conversation here: ### **What’s Happened So Far** Karen started her podcast, *Off the Fence*, after her coach suggested it—and at first, the idea was a little overwhelming. But she knew how many people felt completely stuck when facing a divorce. They didn’t know what to do, where to start, or who to trust. Rather than narrowing in on just one aspect, Karen decided to take a broader approach, covering all the different challenges that come with divorce. Her goal was to give people real, actionable advice—helping them understand their options and feel more confident making decisions. And it worked. Listeners started reaching out, sharing how her episodes helped them feel clearer and more in control. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS003_Karen-Covy_Quote-Card-1024x1024.jpg)But what she didn’t expect was how much the podcast would impact *her* business. People weren’t just listening—they were becoming clients. By the time they reached out, they had already spent hours getting to know her, hearing her advice, and building trust. That meant they were coming in ready to work. And it wasn’t just Karen who saw the benefits—her guests were also landing new business from being on the show. That made her realize: This podcast wasn’t just a passion project. It was a real, valuable business tool. Now, she’s thinking about how to make it work *even better*. ### **The New Plan** So, what’s next for *Off the Fence*? Karen and I talked through a few strategies, and here’s the game plan: **Upgrading the AV Setup.** After thoroughly proving the podcast concept, and it’s value to the business, Karen is going to invest in creating a high quality home studio to capture better video assets, which will improve her credibility and brand, and also make editing and post production easier. **More solo episodes.** While guest interviews are great, and will remain the bulk of the show, Karen’s audience loves hearing directly from *her*. Adding more solo episodes will help her connect even more with listeners and give them exactly what they need. **Repackaging old content.** She’s built up an amazing library of episodes, so instead of constantly creating from scratch, she’s looking at ways to refresh and repurpose content—like pulling together themed playlists or turning key insights into blog posts. **Making the podcast easier to find.** Right now, she’s getting a lot of organic growth, but there’s room to be more intentional about promotion and making sure past episodes are working as hard as possible – that could mean creating landing pages for specific topics, optimizing past episodes so they show up in searches, or using snippets and highlights to draw in new listeners on social media. The best part? None of this requires *more* work—just *different* work. ### **Business Podcast Blueprints Analysis** From a strategy perspective, *Off the Fence* is a **Relationship Building Podcast** at its core. It’s not just about putting out content—it’s about making real connections with the right people. This kind of show is all about smart networking, bringing on potential clients, introducing guests to potential clients, building referral partnerships, and meeting the industry experts and influencers who can help Karen grow her business in new ways. She’s already doing a great job of that, but with a few small tweaks, she can take things even further. By being intentional and tracking the ultimate outcomes in terms of introductions, referrals and opportunities from her guests she can refine her strategy based on current business needs. At the same time, a podcast is providing **Audience Engagement** benefits, naturally building trust with listeners. When potential clients first connect with Karen by hearing the the show, they’re not just hearing *about* her work—they’re experiencing her expertise in real time. That means by the time they reach out, they already feel a connection to her, making sales conversations smoother and leading to deeper, more valuable coaching relationships. From a **Thought Leadership** perspective increasing the investment in AV recoridng and post produciton is going to mean that Off The Fence looks and feels like the high quality podcast it is, making it easier to attract high-profile guests who often have higher expectations for the output of shows they appear on. By continuing to bring on the right guests and producing the highest qulity media assets, Karen can open the door for speaking gigs, guest appearances on other podcasts, and media opportunities that put her in front of even more people. ### **How to Do It Yourself:** If you want to make the most of a **Relationship Building Podcast** strategy, here’s what to do: Get really clear on what kinds of relationships your business needs right now. Is it referral partners, access to influencers and authorities in your space, potential clients or something else? Then, make sure that your show is appealing to them. Of course, you want to keep your listening audience in mind, and create compelling, valuable content for them, but for this type of podcast the *first* audience is your guests. This means making sure that you have the skills and equipment to make them look and sound awesome, making sure that your scheduling, recording and follow-up processes are extensive, documented and easy for your guests. Finally, make sure to actually follow-up with the new connections your pdocast is making! Whe you release the episodes, if you have feedback from listeners about it, when you add their episode to a new playlist or resource – and don’t forgot to amplify their content too, on the social platforms you’re both on. Relationships take work, so you’ve got to do your bit! ### **How to Track Success** If you’re using a **Relationship Building Podcast** strategy, here’s how to track whether it’s actually helping you build valuable connections: 1. **Guest relationships & referrals** – Keep a simple spreadsheet of every guest you’ve had on your show. Each month, make a note of how many referrals, introductions, or new opportunities they’ve sent your way. Every few months, take a look at which guests are your biggest advocates—then make sure you’re nurturing those relationships by checking in, sending resources, or finding ways to collaborate further. 2. **Guest episode shares** – Track how often guests share their episode with their audience. If they’re consistently posting about it, that’s a sign they valued the experience—and that they see you as someone worth promoting. If shares are low, consider making it easier for them by providing social media assets or email templates. 3. **Listener engagement & conversions** – Pay attention to how your audience interacts after each episode. Are listeners reaching out to you or your guests? Are they engaging on social media or joining your email list? Even better—are they converting into clients? If possible, use a unique booking link for podcast listeners so you can track how many discovery calls or sales come directly from the show. 4. **Audio vs. video performance** – If you have both an audio and video version of your podcast, compare their performance. Are most new listeners finding you through audio, or does video bring in higher engagement? Even if video isn’t driving massive numbers, it can still be worth it if it helps build trust in a high-touch industry, makes guest promotion easier, or gives you great content to repurpose for other platforms. At the end of the day, a Relationship Building podcast isn’t just about downloads—it’s about meaningful connections that fuel your business. Keep an eye on these key areas, and you’ll know if your show is doing its job. ### **Next Steps** Karen is off building even more powerful connections through her Relationship Building Podcast, and we’ll be checking back in with her soon to hear how it’s all going. Stay connected with Karen on [LinkedIn](https://www.linkedin.com/in/karencovy/) or [her website](https://karencovy.com/) and reach out to her if you’re going through divorce – you want to become the CEO of it, even if it’s not something you’ve ever wanted before! ### **Become a Guest** If you have a podcast, or are considering one for your business, then we’d love to chat with you about how to make it as profitable as possible. Go to [OneStoneCreative.net/SpotlightGuest](http://OneStoneCreative.net/SpotlightGuest) and fill out an application. ### **Level Up Your Podcasting with Solid Strategy** If you’re looking for support with your current or an upcoming podcast – the team at One Stone Creative is ready to help. You can book a free strategy session with Megan Dougherty [right here](https://calendly.com/onestone/strategysession), review our [ongoing and seasonal production options](https://onestonecreative.net/services/), or explore our [new podcast Sprints Program](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/Sprints), where we’ll do all of the heavy lifting for a podcast season that drives your business forward. ### Never Miss an Episode! Subscribe to The Business Podcast Spotlight on your favorite podcast platform (here are the links for [Apple](https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/the-business-podcast-spotlight/id1801282981) and [Spotify](https://open.spotify.com/show/0t8M5xTxALwoGe8sues7kw)!) and if you’d like to receive a case study like this every week, you can sign up to the Spotlight newsletter using the form below. ​ ​ ​ I’m in! Send me The Strategies! **Categories:** Podcast --- ### [Why a Vocal Coach is Switching to Seasons After a Podcast Hiatus](https://onestonecreative.net/seasons-after-hiatus/) **Published:** March 27, 2025 **Author:** Megan **Content:** # Why a Vocal Coach is Switching to Seasons After a Podcast Hiatus ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/BPS002-Feature-Image.jpg) When you have paused your show for a while, and you want to come back from hiatus, how to restart can be a real challenge. Do you pick up where you left off? Do you start a new show with a new angle? Do you change the format of your show? There are a lot of options, but by using the Business Podcast Blueprints, you can always find a strategy that will work. The most important thing to consider is what you need your podcast to do for you *now* rather than what it’s done for you in the past. Nic Redman was facing exactly this kind of choice when she joined me on the Business Podcast Spotlight. Nic is the principal at [Nic Redman Voice](https://nicolaredman.com/), a vocal coach and voice director, author of [On the Mic](https://nicolaredman.com/on-the-mic-book/) and long time podcaster who is evaluating options for the future of her show, the [Voice Coach Podcast](https://www.notion.so/Nic-Redman-174871d80d52812385e3ffea28c4695a?pvs=21). (She also has an amazing free vocal warm-up exercise for podcasters – [you can get it right here](https://nicolaredman.com/podcaster-warm-up/).) Nic had been successfully podcasting for years before taking a pause, and now she’s ready to come back and start leveraging the brand and audience she’s built up in new ways. But is it better to start a new show, switch to a seasonal format or something else entirely? Listen to the full episode below, or read on for the strategy! ### **What’s Happened So Far** Looking at Nic’s situation, she has done some amazing work to get her audience and podcast to where it is, took a much needed break, and now has some incredible opportuities for how to move forward. Nic started like most of us do, with well-prepared and well-researched content that would demonstrate her expertise to others in her industry, but after a few episodes she realized a small error there – her key audience of buyers would be much more interested in her personality ad how she could help them than the professional signifiers her coleagues ould notice. This clear understanding of who her most important listeners are led her to loosen up her delivery, and start to connect with people more quickly and effectively by being herself. She is casual and friendly and most importantly, extremely generous and helpful with the knowledge she shares. This translates into faster sales with better clients. She knows that her podcast has helped her business in some important ways: It generously shares foundational information about her work so anyone can take advantage of it, and demonstrates her effectiveness to those who are looking for more individualized support. It “separates the wheat from the chaff” in terms of potential clients. When people have heard the show and reach out, they have already decided she is an expert who can help – and have usually done a lot of the “easy” work in terms of taking the advise she shares on the show – that means coaching goes faster and is more productive. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/BPS002-Quote-Card-1024x1024.jpg)After 2 years of very successful podcasting, life got in the way, and Nic took a step back from the show, letting it act as an evergreen resource and lead generation tool on her website and on the podcast platforms. Even without new content, she was regularly getting hundreds of weekly downloads, and new leads from the show. But now it’s time to come back – but not on a weekly release schedule – that just doesn’t fit the business anymore. So the question is *how to come back from hiatus when you want your podcast to be different.* That is composed of many smaller questions: - Do you have to start a whole new show? - Can you continue using your old feed if things aren’t the same? - How do you differentiate the new content form the old? - Can you reuse anything? ### **The New Plan** As you’ll have heard in the conversation, after evaluating Nic’s current business priorities (moving to a slightly more corporate podcsater direction), and her available bandwidth (it \*can’t take up too much time!) we determined that a limited release season, or special series associated with her current show would be the best way to go, and that there is no need to do a whole new RSS feed or audio-visual brand. A season can go on an old RSS feed and simple be packaged as a new offering by having a specific landing page, and some lightly altered episode-level cover art so the season is visually distinct, and easy to share as a unit. This will have the beefit of being easy to create – a couple of days scripting and recording, then outsourcing production means it can be done quickly, then promoted over the next several mnths. Each short season is also going to work as a beautiful cold outreach tool where she can open up a new relationship with a low-risk and highly valuable gift. “Hey! I think you might find this short podcast season valuable in your work” is a really nice way to open up a relationship. This will be easy to repeat for different customer segments if that ever becomes useful. ### **Business Podcast Blueprints Analysis** A limited series like this is an Audience Engagement Podcast strategy, where the main goal of the show is going to be connecting with and nurturing people who, by various means, become aware of her and her work. Over time, this increased knowing, liking and trusting among new and older audience members will benefit her business in a variety of ways. Nic knows who her audience is, and the season can be used to nurture strangers who find her work through socal media and SEO and those who she specifically finds and invites to listen to the show. The seasons will also help existing community members by repackaging new and old content into easy-to-digest seasons with sepcific goals critical to their situations. We can expect that a season specifically designed to teach a particular customer segment particular skills will *shorten her sales cycle*, and improve her *conversion rates on sales calls*. For the specific details on how, grab a copy of [Podcasting for Business: How to Create a Show That Makes a Bottom Line Difference for Your Business](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book). ### **How to Do It Yourself:** So if you want to use this kind of strategy, here are a few questions to ask yourself: - Who is my current most important customer segment? - Are they currently being served by my library of content? If they are – could I make it easier and more convenient for them by arranging my content into playlists and webpages? - Are there any important gaps in my podcast – information that key potential customers could use to make a buying decision that I haven’t talked about? That will make the foundation of your new limited release series – and you can absolutely directly reuse old episodes – just freshen them up with a new intro and outro explaining the context of the season that makes them a cohesive unit rather than standalone episodes. Now – if you don’t have a big archive of content already, you can still use this strategy to make a highly efficient podcast. Think about the conversations you have with people during discovery calls – what are the questions that come up the most frequently? What are the things you teach again and again? What is the reality of the people you are talking about? These are the key epiosdes you need to create – add a little context and framing and you’ve got a podcast season that makes you an official podcaster AND doubles as a sales tool that you can use. ### **How to Track Success** Here are the stats you should track for this kind of limited release podcast season designed to nurture leads and shorten your sales cycle: 1. How many people you directly send it to, and how many people respond by email or booking a call with you. 2. Your close rate on calls with people who have heard the show (you have to ask them, or have a unique booking link for listeners. 3. The revenue you generate from those sales. 4. And of course, if you’re interested, you can cout the downloads of the season, and compare THAT to your conversions and sales as well – but I’d call that one optional. ### **Next Steps** Nic is off and creating her new podcast season, and in a few months she wil lbe invited back to the spotlight for another conversation so we can hear how it went. Make sure to grab her [free vocal warm-up for podcasters](https://nicolaredman.com/podcaster-warm-up/), and reach out if you want a little support in your podcasting! After all – your voice is the single most important tool in your podcasting toolbox – it’s worth spending some time on to shortcut the time it takes to sound as professional as you are. Connect with nect on [LinkedIn](https://www.linkedin.com/in/nic-redman-voice-podcast-recording-coach/), or [Instagram](https://www.instagram.com/nicredvoice/) and check out her book, [On The Mic](http://onthemicbook.com)! ### **Become a Guest** If you have a podcast, or are considering one for your business, then we’d love to chat with you about how to make it as profitable as possible. Go to [OneStoneCreative.net/SpotlightGuest](http://OneStoneCreative.net/SpotlightGuest) and fill out an application. ### **Level Up Your Podcasting with Solid Strategy** If you’re looking for support with your current or an upcoming podcast – the team at One Stone Creative is ready to help. You can book a free strategy session with Megan Dougherty [right here](https://calendly.com/onestone/strategysession), review our [ongoing and seasonal production options](https://onestonecreative.net/services/), or explore our [new podcast Sprints Program](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/Sprints), where we’ll do all of the heavy lifting for a podcast season that drives your business forward. ### **Never Miss an Episode!** Subscribe to The Business Podcast Spotlight on your favorite podcast platform (here are the links for [Apple](https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/the-business-podcast-spotlight/id1801282981) and [Spotify](https://open.spotify.com/show/0t8M5xTxALwoGe8sues7kw)!) and if you’d like to receive a case study like this every week, you can sign up to the Spotlight newsletter using the form below. ​ ​ ​ I’m in! Send me The Strategies! **Categories:** Podcast --- ## Pages ### [Home](https://onestonecreative.net/) **Published:** June 4, 2018 **Author:** Megan **Content:** Profitable Podcasting for Your Business ### Strategic podcasts built to drive trust, visibility, and ROI that you can measure. ## Thought Leadership [Book a Complimentary Podcast Strategy Session](https://zcal.co/onestonecreative/strategysession) # Podcasting for Experts and Agencies We work with thoughtful, expert-led businesses that rely on trust, credibility, and strong client relationships to create podcasts that deliver measurable outcomes. --- ### [SOBP - Sponsorship](https://onestonecreative.net/sobp-sponsorship/) **Published:** September 15, 2025 **Author:** Megan **Content:** 7th Annual # State of Business Podcasting Report Sponsorship Opportunities # Add Your Expertise to the Conversation For 6 years, the *State of Business Podcasting Report* has tracked how leading business pdocasts are produced, presented and promoted. This year, we’re opening up the process, and would like you to be involved. We’re inviting a select group of industry experts to participate in the research itself, interpret some of the findings, bring the data directly to their audiences, and help shape the conversation around what Podcasting for Business looks like in 2026. There are 3 ways to get involved: - **Expert Analysts** will help interpret the findings in their area of practice - **Research Partners** will help shape the questions we investigate - **Community Partners** will bring findings and applications directly to thier communities and help more people discover them In 2026, the report will be published in full online for anyone to access, search and reference with no opt-in and no download required. This means the research and analysis can be shared freely and discovered throughout the year by business owners, marketers, founders, podcast professionals, journalists and creators in the space. The potential reach of the report is currently over 5o,000 business owners, podcast industry professionals, marketers, founders, journalists and podcasters through the Community Partner Network who has commited to sharing the report through email, on social media and more! The report will also be featured in a keynote presentation at the **5th Annual Podcasting for Business Conference**, hosted by Tom Fox and the Compliance Podcast Network, extending its reach and impact across the industry. # Expert Analyst ## **Interpret the Data** **$1000. 4 Available – specific industry expertise sought** This is an opportunity to put your expertise directly into a piece of industry research that business podcasters and marketers can reference throughout the year. The data in the State of Business Report tells us what is hapening. Expert analysis helps us understand why it matters, and what people should do about it. We are inviting four specialists to bring their expertise to specific areas of this year’s research: podcast growth and reach, sponsorship, social media, and branding/graphic design. Expert analysts will receive early access to the results in their topic area and contribute an original analysis of 400 words that will appear with the data in the published report. **Benefits:** - **Early Access** to the data related to your expertise - **Attribution as expert analyst** in report communications - **Logo (linked) featured** on the report waitlist and presentation pages. - Your unique expert analysis **included in the report** - **Mention with tag** in Expert Analyst thank you post on LinkedIn on Release Day - Ability to mention **your contribution** in your own marketing and communications **Seeking Experts in the following:** - Podcast Sponsorship - Podcast Growth and Reach - Social Media - Graphic Design / Branding Deadline to become an Expert Analyst: October 15th, 2026 Deadline to submit analysis: October 23rd, 2026 [Book a call to discuss](https://zcal.co/home) or email Megan (at) OneStoneCreative (dot) net to get more details and claim your topic area! # Research Partner ## **Shape the Research** **$500. Up to 10** What do you wish you knew about how top business podcasts are doing things in 2026? As a research partner, you can find out by proposing a specific question for us to include in our research for the State of Business Podcasting Report. We’ll collaborate on your question, and as our team conducts their observational research, we’ll find the answer. Your question will be included with the results, along with credit for having proposed it. We’ll also give you early access to the results of your question, so you can tease it in advance of the official release. **Benefits:** - **Collaboration on 1 question** which we will investigate in our research - **Named recognition** as the research partner for this question in the report - **Early access** to the result you sponsored and ability to promote it before official report release - **Logo (linked) featured** on the report waitlist page. - **Company Name and Logo** on the report presentation page alongside the question you proposed - Ability to **share the research result** in your own marketing and communications - **Mention with tag** in Research Partner thank you LinkedIn post after report release *Note:* Research partners propose the question, but One Stone Creative retains control over research methodology, analysis and conclusions. Deadline to become a Research Partner: September 28th, 2026. [Book a call to discuss](https://zcal.co/home) or email Megan (at) OneStoneCreative (dot) net to get more details and pick your research question! # Community Partner Network ## **Help More People Use the Research** **No Fee** Community partners are key to helping share the results of the research with as many podcasters as possible. There is no fee to be a Community Sponsor, we simply ask that you send at least one email and/or social post (although we won’t say no if you’d like to share it more!) to your community about the report and encouraging people to check out within two weeks of release between November 2nd and 16th. We’ll provide ready-to-use copy and graphics, you just choose the channel that works best for your community. **Benefits:** - **Company Name and Logo (Linked)** on the report waitlist and presentation pages. - **Tagged Mention** in group thank you LinkedIn post after report release. - **Company Name and Link** in the repot release announcement email. [Just fill in the form right here](https://docs.google.com/forms/d/e/1FAIpQLScbKadNP--qL-_bJbBmyqe_V9yb_uCcxfe69_MPtHFuXPNapA/viewform?usp=sharing&ouid=102307646493496422412) and you’ll be on the list! --- ### [State of Business Podcasting Report](https://onestonecreative.net/report/) **Published:** October 3, 2025 **Author:** Megan **Content:** ### 7th Annual # State of Business Podcasting Report ### Learning from the Top 100 Business Podcasts. If you use, or want to use, podcasting as a business strategy, this report is essential reading, with benchmarks, best practices and advice drawn from the most popular podcasts in the industry. It drops on November 2nd, 2026 – enter your name and email below to get on the waitlist. Join thousands of business leaders, creators and marketers who use the State of Business Podcasting Report to inform their strategy. Want to get involved? Check out this year’s [Sponsorship Opportunities](https://onestonecreative.net/sobp-sponsorship/)! ## What’s Inside? We analyze over 7,500 individual data points to create this report and distill the results into meaningful, actionable information you can use to make strategic decisions for your show. ## The State of Business Podcasting Report is Divided into 6 Categories: **Cadence and Release:** This section examines when the top shows are releases and, as much as possible, who is tuning in. **Branding:** Is where we look at the stylistic choices of the shows, art, names, descriptions and positioning. **Show Structure:** Here you can find out what formats are the most popular, what elements are included and how they are layed out. **Networks and Sponsors:** This section deals with podcast networks, the types and placements of sponsorships, and asets shows are providing to them. **Notes and Websites:** Is where you can see what styles of notes are the most popular, and how podcasts are integrated into and presented on websites. **Social Media:** We look at the participation of the shows on different social media platforms, and how often they are using them, which a special focus on video content. We use the data from this report to inform our [business podcast productions services and strategy](https://onestonecreative.net/business-podcast-production-services/), and it has helped us develop new, highly effective offers like [Micro-podcasts](https://onestonecreative.net/micro-podcasts/) and [Business Podcast Sprints](https://onestonecreative.net/sprint/). You might just find your next strategic move here, too. ## Report History and Methodology: As a business podcast production company, we were often asked questions like: “How long should my show be? Should I have guests? Do I need a sponsor?” We always had educated guesses for answers, but there wasn’t a source of good, baseline data about business podcasts as a whole. So we decided to do it ourselves, and have done every year since, creating an ongoing record of what kinds of decisions the biggest business podcasts in the industry are making about their podcasts. Each year, we compile a list of the top 100 self-identified Business Podcasts according to Apple Podcasts and manually evaluate each one on more than 70 individual data points. Often, this means making a judgment call about strategy or intent, and it is also possible that we mere mortals may miss or misread something from time to time. We make no warranties for accuracy or completeness. This data is interesting and informative, but not prescriptive, and should not be taken as professional advice. Use it to inform and inspire your strategy, but always make business decisions based on your own show and audience. One Stone Creative uses Rephonic for initial list of top 100 podcsats from Apple and select data. # 2026 Community Partnership Network Thank you to our community sponsors! Each of these businesses has helped make the report possible this year – and has helped more people access it, and take advantage of the information than ever before! --- ### [Report 2025](https://onestonecreative.net/report-2025/) **Published:** August 31, 2026 **Author:** Megan **Content:** ### 2025 # State of Business Podcasting Report ### Learning from the Top 100 Business Podcasts. Want to check out last year’s report? Enter your name and email below, and we’ll get it right over to you! Join thousands of business leaders, creators and marketers who use the State of Business Podcasting Report to inform their strategy. Want to get involved in the 2026? Check out this year’s [Sponsorship Opportunities](https://onestonecreative.net/sobp-sponsorship/)! ## 2025 Sponsors A huge thank you to the sponsors of the 2025 State of Business Podcasing Report! ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/11/Volt.png "Volt") ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/11/New-Ausha-Logo-Carre.png "New-Ausha-Logo-Carré") ## What’s Inside? We analyze over 7,500 individual data points to create this report and distill the results into meaningful, actionable information you can use to make strategic decisions for your show. ## The State of Business Podcasting Report is Divided into 6 Categories: **Cadence and Release:** This section examines when the top shows are releases and, as much as possible, who is tuning in. **Branding:** Is where we look at the stylistic choices of the shows, art, names, descriptions and positioning. **Show Structure:** Here you can find out what formats are the most popular, what elements are included and how they are layed out. **Networks and Sponsors:** This section deals with podcast networks, the types and placements of sponsorships, and asets shows are providing to them. **Notes and Websites:** Is where you can see what styles of notes are the most popular, and how podcasts are integrated into and presented on websites. **Social Media:** We look at the participation of the shows on different social media platforms, and how often they are using them, which a special focus on video content. We use the data from this report to inform our [business podcast productions services and strategy](https://onestonecreative.net/business-podcast-production-services/), and it has helped us develop new, highly effective offers like [Micro-podcasts](https://onestonecreative.net/micro-podcasts/) and [Business Podcast Sprints](https://onestonecreative.net/sprint/). You might just find your next strategic move here, too. ## Report History and Methodology: As a business podcast production company, we were often asked questions like: “How long should my show be? Should I have guests? Do I need a sponsor?” We always had educated guesses for answers, but there wasn’t a source of good, baseline data about business podcasts as a whole. So we decided to do it ourselves, and have done every year since, creating an ongoing record of what kinds of decisions the biggest business podcasts in the industry are making about their podcasts. Each year, we compile a list of the top 100 self-identified Business Podcasts according to Apple Podcasts and manually evaluate each one on more than 70 individual data points. Often, this means making a judgment call about strategy or intent, and it is also possible that we mere mortals may miss or misread something from time to time. We make no warranties for accuracy or completeness. This data is interesting and informative, but not prescriptive, and should not be taken as professional advice. Use it to inform and inspire your strategy, but always make business decisions based on your own show and audience. One Stone Creative uses Rephonic for initial list of top 100 podcsats from Apple and select data. --- ### [Write Your Best Book - You're In](https://onestonecreative.net/write-your-best-book-youre-in/) **Published:** August 5, 2026 **Author:** Megan **Content:** # You’re In! ## Can’t wait to see you at Write Your Best Book: Transforming Your Podcast Into a Book! Thank you for registering for Write Your Best Book: How to Transform Your Podcast Into a Book. This is going to be an incredible Masterclass, so make sure to put it into your calendar using the links below: [Add to Google Calendar](https://calendar.google.com/calendar/render?action=TEMPLATE&text=Write%20Your%20Best%20Book%3A%20Transforming%20Your%20Podcast%20Into%20a%20Book&dates=20260827T200000Z/20260827T210000Z&details=%3Cp%3EYou%E2%80%99ve%20established%20your%20voice%20behind%20the%20mic%20%E2%80]%20but%20what%20if%20your%20podcast%20journey%20was%20just%20the%20beginning%3F%3C%2Fp%3E%3Cp%3EIf%20you%20want%20to%20level%20up%20your%20thought%20leadership%20and%20grow%20your%20authority%2C%20it%20might%20be%20time%20to%20transform%20your%20expertise%20into%20an%20industry-leading%20book.%20A%20well-positioned%2C%20strategic%20book%20anchors%20your%20credibility%2C%20allows%20ideal%20clients%20to%20deeply%20digest%20your%20methodology%2C%20and%20opens%20doors%20to%20higher-tier%20consulting%2C%20media%2C%20and%20speaking%20opportunities.%26nbsp%3B%3Cbr%3E%3C%2Fp%3E%3Cp%3EIn%20this%20practical%20masterclass%2C%20hosted%20by%20Megan%20Dougherty%20and%20led%20by%20book%20coach%20Verity%20Craft%20from%20Intelligent%20Ink%2C%20you%E2%80%99ll%20discover%20how%20to%20translate%20your%20audio%20authority%20into%20a%20book%20that%20drives%20real%20revenue%20and%20impact.%3C%2Fp%3E%3Cp%3E%3C%2Fp%3E%3Cp%3EWhat%20we%E2%80%99ll%20cover%3A%3Cbr%3E%3C%2Fp%3E%3Cul%3E%3Cli%3E%3Cp%3E%3Cstrong%3EWhere%20does%20a%20book%20fit%20in%3F%20%3C%2Fstrong%3ELearn%20how%20to%20align%20your%20book%20directly%20with%20your%20existing%20podcast%20and%20business%20model%20so%20it%20drives%20leads%20and%20conversions%20rather%20than%20sitting%20on%20a%20shelf.%3C%2Fp%3E%3C%2Fli%3E%3Cli%3E%3Cp%3E%3Cstrong%3EWhat%20makes%20a%20great%20topic%3F%3C%2Fstrong%3E%20Pinpoint%20the%20angle%20that%20showcases%20your%20unique%20worldview%20and%20solves%20your%20ideal%20client%E2%80%99s%20biggest%20challenge.%3C%2Fp%3E%3C%2Fli%3E%3Cli%3E%3Cp%3E%3Cstrong%3EHow%20do%20you%20actually%20make%20it%20good%3F%3C%2Fstrong%3E%20Discover%20how%20to%20draw%20from%20your%20podcast%20episodes%20and%20audio%20content%20without%20it%20just%20becoming%20a%20generic%20transcript%20dump.%3C%2Fp%3E%3C%2Fli%3E%3Cli%3E%3Cp%3E%3Cstrong%3EWhat%20does%20it%20take%20to%20get%20to%20the%20finish%20line%3F%3C%2Fstrong%3E%20Step-by-step%20guidance%20to%20outline%2C%20write%2C%20and%20finish%20your%20book%20efficiently.%3C%2Fp%3E%3C%2Fli%3E%3C%2Ful%3E&location=https%3A%2F%2Fus02web.zoom.us%2Fj%2F82071956092&ctz=America/Toronto) [Add to Outlook](https://outlook.live.com/owa/?path=/calendar/action/compose&rru=addevent&subject=Write%20Your%20Best%20Book%3A%20Transforming%20Your%20Podcast%20Into%20a%20Book&startdt=2026-08-27T20:00:00Z&enddt=2026-08-27T21:00:00Z&body=%3Cp%3EYou%E2%80%99ve%20established%20your%20voice%20behind%20the%20mic%20%E2%80]%20but%20what%20if%20your%20podcast%20journey%20was%20just%20the%20beginning%3F%3C%2Fp%3E%3Cp%3EIf%20you%20want%20to%20level%20up%20your%20thought%20leadership%20and%20grow%20your%20authority%2C%20it%20might%20be%20time%20to%20transform%20your%20expertise%20into%20an%20industry-leading%20book.%20A%20well-positioned%2C%20strategic%20book%20anchors%20your%20credibility%2C%20allows%20ideal%20clients%20to%20deeply%20digest%20your%20methodology%2C%20and%20opens%20doors%20to%20higher-tier%20consulting%2C%20media%2C%20and%20speaking%20opportunities.%26nbsp%3B%3Cbr%3E%3C%2Fp%3E%3Cp%3EIn%20this%20practical%20masterclass%2C%20hosted%20by%20Megan%20Dougherty%20and%20led%20by%20book%20coach%20Verity%20Craft%20from%20Intelligent%20Ink%2C%20you%E2%80%99ll%20discover%20how%20to%20translate%20your%20audio%20authority%20into%20a%20book%20that%20drives%20real%20revenue%20and%20impact.%3C%2Fp%3E%3Cp%3E%3C%2Fp%3E%3Cp%3EWhat%20we%E2%80%99ll%20cover%3A%3Cbr%3E%3C%2Fp%3E%3Cul%3E%3Cli%3E%3Cp%3E%3Cstrong%3EWhere%20does%20a%20book%20fit%20in%3F%20%3C%2Fstrong%3ELearn%20how%20to%20align%20your%20book%20directly%20with%20your%20existing%20podcast%20and%20business%20model%20so%20it%20drives%20leads%20and%20conversions%20rather%20than%20sitting%20on%20a%20shelf.%3C%2Fp%3E%3C%2Fli%3E%3Cli%3E%3Cp%3E%3Cstrong%3EWhat%20makes%20a%20great%20topic%3F%3C%2Fstrong%3E%20Pinpoint%20the%20angle%20that%20showcases%20your%20unique%20worldview%20and%20solves%20your%20ideal%20client%E2%80%99s%20biggest%20challenge.%3C%2Fp%3E%3C%2Fli%3E%3Cli%3E%3Cp%3E%3Cstrong%3EHow%20do%20you%20actually%20make%20it%20good%3F%3C%2Fstrong%3E%20Discover%20how%20to%20draw%20from%20your%20podcast%20episodes%20and%20audio%20content%20without%20it%20just%20becoming%20a%20generic%20transcript%20dump.%3C%2Fp%3E%3C%2Fli%3E%3Cli%3E%3Cp%3E%3Cstrong%3EWhat%20does%20it%20take%20to%20get%20to%20the%20finish%20line%3F%3C%2Fstrong%3E%20Step-by-step%20guidance%20to%20outline%2C%20write%2C%20and%20finish%20your%20book%20efficiently.%3C%2Fp%3E%3C%2Fli%3E%3C%2Ful%3E&location=https%3A%2F%2Fus02web.zoom.us%2Fj%2F82071956092) [Add to Office 365](https://outlook.office.com/calendar/0/deeplink/compose?path=/calendar/action/compose&rru=addevent&subject=Write%20Your%20Best%20Book%3A%20Transforming%20Your%20Podcast%20Into%20a%20Book&startdt=2026-08-27T20:00:00Z&enddt=2026-08-27T21:00:00Z&body=%3Cp%3EYou%E2%80%99ve%20established%20your%20voice%20behind%20the%20mic%20%E2%80]%20but%20what%20if%20your%20podcast%20journey%20was%20just%20the%20beginning%3F%3C%2Fp%3E%3Cp%3EIf%20you%20want%20to%20level%20up%20your%20thought%20leadership%20and%20grow%20your%20authority%2C%20it%20might%20be%20time%20to%20transform%20your%20expertise%20into%20an%20industry-leading%20book.%20A%20well-positioned%2C%20strategic%20book%20anchors%20your%20credibility%2C%20allows%20ideal%20clients%20to%20deeply%20digest%20your%20methodology%2C%20and%20opens%20doors%20to%20higher-tier%20consulting%2C%20media%2C%20and%20speaking%20opportunities.%26nbsp%3B%3Cbr%3E%3C%2Fp%3E%3Cp%3EIn%20this%20practical%20masterclass%2C%20hosted%20by%20Megan%20Dougherty%20and%20led%20by%20book%20coach%20Verity%20Craft%20from%20Intelligent%20Ink%2C%20you%E2%80%99ll%20discover%20how%20to%20translate%20your%20audio%20authority%20into%20a%20book%20that%20drives%20real%20revenue%20and%20impact.%3C%2Fp%3E%3Cp%3E%3C%2Fp%3E%3Cp%3EWhat%20we%E2%80%99ll%20cover%3A%3Cbr%3E%3C%2Fp%3E%3Cul%3E%3Cli%3E%3Cp%3E%3Cstrong%3EWhere%20does%20a%20book%20fit%20in%3F%20%3C%2Fstrong%3ELearn%20how%20to%20align%20your%20book%20directly%20with%20your%20existing%20podcast%20and%20business%20model%20so%20it%20drives%20leads%20and%20conversions%20rather%20than%20sitting%20on%20a%20shelf.%3C%2Fp%3E%3C%2Fli%3E%3Cli%3E%3Cp%3E%3Cstrong%3EWhat%20makes%20a%20great%20topic%3F%3C%2Fstrong%3E%20Pinpoint%20the%20angle%20that%20showcases%20your%20unique%20worldview%20and%20solves%20your%20ideal%20client%E2%80%99s%20biggest%20challenge.%3C%2Fp%3E%3C%2Fli%3E%3Cli%3E%3Cp%3E%3Cstrong%3EHow%20do%20you%20actually%20make%20it%20good%3F%3C%2Fstrong%3E%20Discover%20how%20to%20draw%20from%20your%20podcast%20episodes%20and%20audio%20content%20without%20it%20just%20becoming%20a%20generic%20transcript%20dump.%3C%2Fp%3E%3C%2Fli%3E%3Cli%3E%3Cp%3E%3Cstrong%3EWhat%20does%20it%20take%20to%20get%20to%20the%20finish%20line%3F%3C%2Fstrong%3E%20Step-by-step%20guidance%20to%20outline%2C%20write%2C%20and%20finish%20your%20book%20efficiently.%3C%2Fp%3E%3C%2Fli%3E%3C%2Ful%3E&location=https%3A%2F%2Fus02web.zoom.us%2Fj%2F82071956092) Do you know any other podcasters who you think should have a book? If so, please send them our way! Here’s a little copy you could use: *Hey \[NAME\],* *I just found out about this awesome Masterclass: Write Your Best Book – How to Transform your Podcast into a Book. It’s Thursday August 27th at 4pm EST, and I thought you might want to come with me.* *[You can register for free right here](https://onestonecreative.net/write-your-best-book/).* *Cheers!* *\[SIGNATURE\]* # Company Podcasts need to meet Company Goals --- ### [Write Your Best Book](https://onestonecreative.net/write-your-best-book/) **Published:** August 5, 2026 **Author:** Megan **Content:** # Write Your Best Book ### Transforming your podcast into a book # Thursday August 27th, 4pm Eastern You’ve established your voice behind the mic – but what if your podcast journey was just the beginning? If you want to level up your thought leadership and grow your authority, it might be time to transform your expertise into an industry-leading book. A well-positioned, strategic book anchors your credibility, allows ideal clients to deeply digest your methodology, and opens doors to higher-tier consulting, media, and speaking opportunities. In this practical masterclass, led by book coach Verity Craft from Intelligent Ink, you’ll discover how to translate your audio authority into a book that drives real revenue and impact. What we’ll cover: - Where does a book fit in? Learn how to align your book directly with your existing podcast and business model so it drives leads and conversions rather than sitting on a shelf. - What makes a great topic? Pinpoint the angle that showcases your unique worldview and solves your ideal client’s biggest challenge. - How do you actually make it good? Discover how to draw from your podcast episodes and audio content without it just becoming a generic transcript dump. - What does it take to get to the finish line? Step-by-step guidance to outline, write, and finish your book efficiently. ## Meet Your Host: ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2026/08/Verity-Craft-Headshot-2.webp "Verity Craft Headshot") [Verity Craft](https://www.linkedin.com/in/verity-craft/) is a speaker, book coach and thinking partner. Together with Christina Wedgwood, she runs [Intelligent Ink](https://www.intelligent.ink/), where they help purpose-driven thought leaders write game-changing books – books that do so much more than just act as a glorified business card. As a thought leadership agency turned book collaborative, Verity and her team approach books with a strategic lens and a view to what will drive meaningful change for your business, your industry, and your readers. She’s also a musical theatre nerd, an avid reader (unsurprisingly!) and the mum of two little girls – so life is pretty full on! --- ### [Spotlight Guest Application](https://onestonecreative.net/spotlightguest/) **Published:** March 5, 2025 **Author:** Megan **Content:** # The Business Podcast Spotlight # Guest Application Let’s talk about your podcast! The Business Podcast Spotlight is a seasonal show that releases over the summer and into the fall. If you already have a show, we’ll shine a spotlight on your business, the work you’re doing for your clients and community and explore how your podcast is making a difference, and strategize how you can get even more value for your company from it. If you’re planning a podcast, we’ll shine that same spotlight on your business, and dig into how you can use a podcast to acheive your goals, serve your community and ultimately, drive more revenue. All guests will receive some awesome promotional materials, have thier show posted to our blog and distributed to the Podcasting for Business Community. Please fill in the [application form here](https://docs.google.com/forms/d/e/1FAIpQLSdtioTNnf0mKYpfdNj6e8ELeCNT1K0ocpxrCSTfM2yH9w-Oww/viewform?usp=sharing&ouid=102307646493496422412), and we’ll be in touch with a booking link in a day or two! # Company Podcasts need to meet Company Goals --- ### [Design a Profitable Podcast](https://onestonecreative.net/design-a-profitable-podcast/) **Published:** June 29, 2026 **Author:** Megan **Content:** # How to Design a Profitable Podcast ### Without Wasting Any Time or Money ## 90 Minutes to a Podcast Strategy That Delivers ## Tuesday July 28th at Noon ET The most successful business podcasts aren’t built around sponsors or top 10 lists. When you’re a business owner, a profitable podcast is one that supports, improves and streamlines your business. This is only possible when they’re built around a clear business objective. Over 90 minutes we’ll identify the specific business objective your show should support, choose the right strategy for your budget and bandwidth, and build a launch-ready plan you can begin implementing immediately. This is the inaugural session of How to Design a Profitable Podcast and we’re offering it free of charge. Future sessions will be a paid program, so if you’ve been thinking about launching a podcast for your business, this is an excellent opportunity. We’ll help you identify the podcast strategy that is the best fit for your business. Some of the options include: **Relationship Building:** Connect with the referral partners and clients you need to grow. **Thought Leadership:** Position yourself as a trusted authority and creator of ideas. **Audience Engagement:** Nurture people towards knowing, liking and trusting you. **Conversion:** Grow your list, community or low-ticket sales. **Content:** Fill your social media flywheel or build out larger projects. Different businesses will benefit from different strategies at different times, and making the right choice based on your current needs, available time and budget can make the difference between a long-term, revenue-driving business asset and a rather expensive side-quest. This is a working session, not a webinar – you’ll be making real decisions as we go, so you have a straegy you can start to work with immediately. ## Who Should Come: This workshop is designed for business owners ready to start a podcast with a specific business purpose like network building, throught leadership and visibility, or sales enablement. If you: - Have a business you’ve been running for at least 2 years, - Have a good idea of who your ideal clients are, and why they buy from you, - Are aware of other podcasts in your industry, - Don’t have a podcast yet, but are planning one this year or next, Then this is the workshop for you. We’re going to be focusing on the strategic decisions that determine the success of your show, and you will leave with a clear podcast strategy, the specific metrics you’ll track for success, and a launch action plan and timeline. *You are welcome to come if you are currently podcasting, but please note that the focus will be on design rather than refining or optimizing.* ## Meet Your Host ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2026/05/MeganDoughertyPhoto.png "MeganDoughertyPhoto") Megan Dougherty is the co-founder of One Stone Creative, author of Podcasting for Business: How to Create a Show That Makes a Bottom-Line Difference for Your Company, and creator of the State of Business Podcasting Report, an industry-leading deep dive into the trends and best practices of business podcasting. She is the host of the Business Podcast Spotlight and the Podcasting for Business Q and A Show. Together, she and her team have been producing profitable podcasts for business owners since 2017. Connect with her on [LinkedIn](https://www.linkedin.com/in/doughertymegan/)! --- ### [Podcast Action Plan](https://onestonecreative.net/action/) **Published:** February 21, 2020 **Author:** Megan **Content:** # Podcast Action Plan # Wondering What’s Next For Your Podcast? We can figure that out. In a Podcast Action Plan, we’re going to dig into your show, where it’s been, how it’s performed, what you need and where it’s going. We can: - Help you create a revenue-positive podcast strategy, - Find out where all of your time and resources are going, and plug any leaks, - Identify your highest value podcast work, and eliminate the rest, - Provide feedback on your audio, content and promotions, and/or - Help design new shows or series’ for specific goals. This is a comprehensive deep-dive into your podcast and how it’s working for your business. You’ll leave with a clear next step for your show, and a hitlist of action items you can start applying to your current or future show. # Ready to Level Up? Let’s do it. Book a complimentary strategy session to ensure an action plan is the right move for you! If it’s a fit, the action plan costs $497 USD. [Book Your Session!](https://zcal.co/onestonecreative/strategysession) --- ### [Production](https://onestonecreative.net/business-podcast-production-services/) **Published:** April 22, 2025 **Author:** Megan **Content:** # Business Podcast Production Services ### Build a strategic asset that transforms your expertise and ideas into authority, visibility and revenue – and all you’ll have to do is *talk.* ## A Business Asset Tailored to Your Goals. Strategically designed and expertly produced, your podcast can achieve much more than you expect. - **Niche Leadership:** Cement your authority and lead your space with brand-elevating multi-media. - **Audience Expansion:** Reach, engage and nurture exactly the right listeners for your brand. - **Relationship Building:** Strengthen key partnerships and deepen client loyalty. - **Revenue Generation:** Drive opt-ins, consultations, and sales through smart content pathways. Every show we produce at One Stone Creative is built using the Business Podcast Blueprints(tm)—our proprietary strategic framework that aligns your podcast with the specific business outcomes you care about most. ## Here’s How it Works # Step 1 ## What Does Your Podcast Need to Do? Before we begin, enjoy a complimentary strategy session to ensure a podcast is what your business needs right now. # Step 2 ## Outcome-Based Design Choose or build a package that focuses on your most important business goals so you don’t waste time on what you don’t need. # Step 3 ## You Record, We Do The Rest Spend your time crafting your content, nurturing relationships and running your business – we’ll manage everything else. ## Business Podcast Production Services Pricing ## Solo Pod Build Thought Leadership From300/Episode - Episode Production (20 minutes) - Description + Bullet Show Notes - Episode Title Card - MP4 Version of Episode - 1x Captioned Reel - Scheduling on Podcast Host - Stats and Metrics Tracking - As-Needed strategy calls - Human-Edited Transcript - Make it Video +$50/episode ## Interviews Build Relationships From420/Episode - Episode Production - Description + Bullet Show Notes - 2x Social Media Copy - 2x Captioned Reels - 2x Promo Graphics - Guest Notification Email - Episode Title Card - MP4 Version of Episode - Scheduling on Podcast Host and Youtube - Stats and Metrics Tracking - As-Needed strategy Calls - Unedited Transcript - Make it Video +$80/episode ## Custom Build Whatever You Need From100/Epsiode - Select exactly what you need in terms of production, promotional materials and administrative support, like: - Shorter or Longer Audio or Video Production - Everything BUT the Production - Promo Graphics and Title Cards - Social Media Copy - Email Copy for Your Newsletter - Reels and Audiograms - Scheduling on Social Media, Your Website, YouTube or Email - Guest Kits and Notification # I want to Talk About it! If you’d like to have a chat about your business and whether or not a podcast is a good next step for you, click the button below to book a free, no-obligation consultation with Megan Dougherty. [Book Your Free Strategy Session](https://zcal.co/onestonecreative/strategysession) Not sure if you want to podcast forever? Check out our [Business Podcast Sprints](https://onestonecreative.net/sprint/) – Limited Release Seasons that will be the easiest podcasting you ever do. Want maximum reach for minimum effort? A [Micro-Pod](https://onestonecreative.net/micro-pods/) gets you releasing multipe episodes weekly for less time than a single traditional interview! # What People Have to Say about Working with One Stone Creative: ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/Lindsay-Rec.png "Lindsay Rec") ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/Amy-Rec.png "Amy Rec") ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/Mike-Rec.png "Mike Rec") ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/Mary-Ann-Rec.png "Mary Ann Rec") One Stone Creative produced the Unlearn Podcast from the spring of 2019, to 2024. The team provided excellent strategy development, coaching and preparation during the planning and launch of the show, and consistently deliver crisp editing and detailed show notes. On an ongoing basis, they’ve offered interview coaching, brainstorming around strategies and ideas to improve the show. With their help my audience and podcasting skills continuously grow. – Barry O’Reilly, The Unlearn Podcast “The team of One Stone creativewas a pure joy to work with on my podcast network. They bring both professionalism and passion to being two of the top podcast producers and podcasting consultants around. If you are thinking about starting a podcast or have been podcasting for years as I have, they bring not only efficiency to your podcast production but real value for your entire operation. Two Thumbs up and Five Stars to the entire team of One Stone Creative.” – Tox Fox, The Compliance Podcast Network I’ll be honest. I started the Spin Sucks podcast with some trepidation. We talked about it for years, but I couldn’t just seem to get my butt in gear to get it done. I kept hearing things such as less than one percent of podcasts are hosted by women (according to Libsyn) and also watched the trajectory of podcasting and yet… But then the amazingly brilliant and easy-to-work with women from One Stone Creative told me there is more than enough content on the blog to create a podcast. They said, in fact, I wouldn’t have to do any work, other than record something weekly. They made it so easy, it was impossible to say no. Thanks to them, we’re here 5 years later. – Gini Dierich, The Spin Sucks Podcast --- ### [Business Podcast Blueprints](https://onestonecreative.net/business-podcast-blueprints/) **Published:** December 10, 2025 **Author:** Megan **Content:** # The Business Podcast Blueprints A methodology to create profitable podacsts for your business. To have a successful podcast for your business, you have to start with your business goals. Not podcast goals. Not marketing goals. Business goals. Because if you don’t start there, with what you’re business actually needs to grow and be successful, then you stand a very real chance of investing a huge amount of time, money and energy on a large (and public!) marketing project that doesn’t make a bottom line difference to your business. And you don’t have time for that. The Business Podcast Blueprints are the best way to avoid it. The Business Podcast Blueprints are a method of designing and optimizing podcasts to acheive measurable business outcomes. ## What are the Business Podcast Blueprints? A Business Podcast Blueprint is the most important reason it has for existing. It’s the single goal that, if it does that and nothing else, it will stil be worthwhile to create. It’s not the only thing your podcast will \*do\* but it’s the Prime Directive. The non-negotiable outcome. Over years of producing podcasts for scores of different business owners, and through deep research into the top performing business podcasts, we’ve identified the 5 most common. It’s important to pick one as yur most important Blueprint to give your show focus, and help you s ee results faster, and that decision should be based on the most important goals you have for your business in the next 12-18 months. Below, you’ll find a short description of each Blueprint and the goals they are best suited to help you achieve. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/12/Relationship-Building.png "Relationship Building") ## Relationship Building Podcasts A Relationship Building show is a foundation on which you build connections on a one to one basis. These are all about connecting with new people. These could be people you’d like to work with, experts you’d like to meet, referral or promotional partners, owners of complementary businesses, event organizers, journalists and influencers – anyone that would be, for whatever reason, a valuable part of your professional network. ***Goals that can fit:*** More referrals, more customers or clients, sales of higher-ticket products and services, speaking and other promotional opportunities, guesting on other shows. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/12/Audience-Engagement.png "Audience Engagement") ## Audience Engagement Podcasts An Audience Engagement show will help you build knowing, liking and trusting with lots of people at once. This blueprint will help you connect with the audience you already have. These may be people who already follow you, like members of your email or social media community, or they could be people who become aware of you through marketing you are already doing, like paid traffic, speaking or other organic marketing. Finally, they can be people who work with you – your employees, team members or colleagues. ***Goals that can fit:*** Training and onboarding (internal or client), hiring and recruiting, social media engagement, sponsorships, lead nurturing. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/12/ThoughtLeadership.png "ThoughtLeadership") ## Thought Leadership Podcasts A Thought Leadership podcast is the vehicle you use to get your ideas, insight and intellectual property out there. Thought Leadership shows exist primarily to increase the influence, authority and reputation of the host and company that create them. These are shows where you are bringing your own intellectual property to the table, engaging in high-level conversations with colleagues and generally setting the tone and topics for what your industry is talking about. ***Goals that can fit:*** Mentions and backlinks, interview requests, invitations to speak and present, brand awareness and shortened sales cycles. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/12/Conversion.png "Conversion") ## Conversion Podcasts A Conversion podcast is designed to change watchers and listeners from one tme of relationship to another, through paid or gated content. These shows are about moving people from one point in a sales or opt-in process to the next one. They exist as a part of or move directly into sales funnels (can be top, middle or bottom for the funnel, depending on how you deploy them!) They often involve some kind of gated content or access to you as the host, or to your guests. ***Goals that can fit:*** Community and email list growth, product and service sales, monthly recurring revenue, increased opt-in rates. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/12/Content.png "Content") ## Content Podcasts Content Shows may or may not be a standalone Blueprint for your business. No matter what kind of podcast you make, content (and a lot of it) will be a side effect. But there are shows that exist primarily to create content that can then be distributed and repurposed, and that is a completely legitimate reason to have a show! ***Goals that can fit:*** SEO, website traffic, content to repurpose, long-term content projects like books, courses and opt-ins. ## Choosing the Right Business Podcast Blueprint The first step is to choose one. And while that might feel restrictive, rest assured that it isn’t the only benefit you’re going to \*get\* from your show – it’s just the most important one that is ging to help you make strategic decisions aligned with your most important outcomes. Ready to go? All else being equal, choosing a Blueprint starts with your highest-level goal for how your podcast will work in your business. Does your business most need: A passionate and engaged audience of people (or specific individuals!) that know, like and trust you? You want **Audience Engagement**. More and better relationships with fellow business owners, potential (higher ticket) clients, promotional and referral partners or colleagues? You want **Relationship Building**. To have an amazing reputation as a thinker, to be seen as a source of new and innovative ideas, and generally considered an expert’s expert? You want **Thought Leadership**. To get more people into your list and community, signed up for subscriptions, or paying for lower-ticket products and services? You want **Conversion**. To consistently create a lot of high-quality content for your company, social media, SEO and repurposing strategy? You want **Content**. Do you want to go deeper? You can get a free copy of Podcasting For Business: How to Create a Show that Makes a Bottom Line Difference For Your Company that goes into excruciating detail about how to use these Blueprints to optimize your show for 15 different business outcomes, and contains everythign you need to plan your own podcast, from cover art to promotion. Get your copy for Free at [PodcastingForBusiness.com](https:podcastingforbusiness.com) ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/PFB-Book-Mockups.png "PFB Book Mockups") ## How to Use the Business Podcast Blueprints Now that you’ve chosen your blueprint – its time to use it. Your Blueprint is your decision-making filter. If you’re ever wondering, “Should I…?” Your Blueprint will help you make that decision in a way that doesn’t conflict with your ultimate goal. This is important because it’s really easy to work at cross-purposes. There are so many ways to get value and benefits out of podcasting, but they don’t all mesh or overlap perfectly. Here are a few things your Blueprint can help you decide: 1. What style and format of show you should create. 2. What style of [show notes](https://onestonecreative.net/podcast-show-notes/) you should make. 3. Whether or not you should have guests. 4. Whether or not you should have ads or sponsors. 5. What kind of promotions you should create for your episodes. 6. Where you should invest most of your time and money. This isn’t an exhaustive list. Any time you need to make a strategic decision about your podcast, your Blueprint will help you do so. If you have a question that starts with: “Should I…” you can find the answer by asking if it will help you achieve your Business Podcast Blueprint. - Will this help me Build Relationships? - Will this help me Engage my Audience - Will this help me achieve Thought Leadership? - Will this help me get more Conversions? - Will this help me create Content? Below are each of the Blueprints, a reminder of their purpose, and answers to each of those questions. # Strategic Relationship Building Podcasts *Relationship Building Shows exist to help you, as the host, connect with other people. These might be potential clients, referral or promotional partners, colleagues—anyone who could be an important part of your professional network.* **Show Format:** Interviews or [Panel Discussions](https://onestonecreative.net/how-to-host-a-panel-discussion-on-your-podcast/). A Relationship Building show will be all about the conversations you are having with people. You can’t network if you’re not talking to people, although many shows add the occasional solo episode. They tend to perform well, and your listeners will enjoy the odd “just you” episode. **Show Notes:** Show notes for this style of podcast should focus on the guest, the great things they said, their links and key moments. Since you’re working on nurturing relationships, consider the show notes (and other assets) a chance to do exactly that and roll out the red carpet in terms of what you provide. **Guests:** You should have guests at least 80% of the time in a Relationship Building podcast. **Ads or Sponsors:** Avoid ads and sponsorships for this kind of show. You don’t want anything that detracts from the relationship you are building with your guest. The only possible exception might be promoting your own or the guest’s products or services. **Promotions**: Focus on the guest: who you’re speaking to, why they’re an expert, what else they’re working on, and the insights they shared. **Investment**: Spend the majority of your budget and bandwidth on showing your guest a good time before, during and after the show. Run paid promotions to their episode, send a thank you gift, invest in great booking software, and spend the time following up. # Strategic Audience Engagement Podcasts *Audience Engagement Shows exist to let you connect with the world at scale – usually to people who have discovered you through a means other than your podcast itself. They might be an email list, on social, members of a community or just general fans – but wherever they are, you want to nurture them in a scalable way. One of our favorite type of [Business Podcast Sprint](https://onestonecreative.net/Sprint) is create a audience engagement podcast seasonto nurture leads towards faster buying decisions!* **Show Format:** You can get creative here. For an Audience Engagement Show you can do Q and A style episodes where you answer questions your audience has, you can teach content in solo episodes, you can have information-style interviews where you talk to someone who has knowledge you don’t, you can do coaching or audits, really anything you can think of. The key is to be very responsive to what your audience wants, needs, and is interested in. **Show Notes:** Focus on actionable information for your show notes: key takeaways, tips, steps instructions, and of course, opportunities for your audience to respond and share their own ideas and experiences. **Guests:** Totally optional for an Audience Engagement show. Guests can be a great addition, but they’re not required. **Ads or Sponsors**: This blueprint is the best fit for ads and sponsors. Just make sure you don’t have so many your listeners get irritated! **Promotional Priority**: Make sure your podcast episodes are available where people can easily access them, and where you can easily refer people to them. You also want to make sure you have clear and abundant CTA’s, so once people like you – they can do something about it! **Investment:** Invest in a lot of planning and understanding your customer journey, quality production and making your content available in different formats like written, visual and video. Paid traffic and promotion might also be a good idea for an Audience Engagement show. # Strategic Thought Leadership Podcasts *Thought Leadership shows exist primarily to increase the influence, authority and reputation of the host and company that creates them. These are shows where you are bringing IP to the table, engaging in high-level conversations with colleagues, and generally setting the tone and topics for what your industry is talking about.* **Show Format:** Solo episodes or conversational style Interviews. If you want to establish thought leadership, you need to BE a thought leader, and that means putting the ideas out there for the rest of your industry to respond to, reference, and report on. You can do this by creating solo episodes with your own content or by having high-level conversations with fellow experts in your field. **Show Notes:** Should contain action steps and key ideas people can take and run with. Many people like to have timestamped bullets of important ideas or quotations, and this is also a good opportunity to provide a transcript, both for your listeners and for later repurposing. **Guests:** Optional. You don’t need guests for a Thought Leadership show, but if you have them, make sure the conversations you have with them ARE conversations, not you running down a list of questions or exclusively making them look awesome. You’re sharing the spotlight in a Thought Leadership show, not shining it solely on your guest (like you would in a Relationship Building one). **Ads or Sponsors:** Either none or those promoting your own content or personal recommendations of companies you know and trust. A Thought Leadership style podcast is no place for a pile of pre-produced ads. Be selective, promote your own content, and always do host-reads if you are going to have ads. **Promotional Priority**: For promoting a Thought Leadership show on social media, focus on the ideas you’re sharing, the questions you’re answering and the conversations you’re going to have with other experts. Consider reaching out directly to journalists and influencers who work in your industry and may want to comment on what you are saying. **Investment:** The highest quality recording equipment, space, and post-production as you can manage. There are a lot of shows out there, and people are selective about what they’ll listen to. Two shows can have the same basic kind of content, and the one with better production value will win every time. This doesn’t matter for every type of podcast, but if you’re trying to be a thought leader, the quality of your sound has to match the quality of your content. It’s also wise to invest heavily in content repurposing. You’re putting out IP – make sure it’s distributed on all of your channels and in all possible formats. # Strategic Conversion Podcasts *Conversion shows exist as part of, or leading directly to, sales or opt-in funnels, usually with some kind of gated or privileged content level. These are a little tricky because podcasts are notoriously difficult to convert from, but it can be done!* **Show Format:** You have a lot of flexibility around the format for a Conversion podcast. As long as it is designed as part of a sales funnel, it passes muster. Some particularly useful formats are case study style interviews if you’re looking to make client sales, episodes that include clips or references to paid or premium offerings, and having multiple instances of podcast episodes – some free and some paid, like ad-free or extended versions. **Show Notes:** Focus on actionable information for your show notes: key takeaways, tips, steps instructions, and of course, opportunities for your audience to respond and share their own ideas and experiences. **Guests:** Totally optional. Guests can help you achieve the goal of getting your listeners to do something, or you could have solo episodes that do the same thing. A Conversion podcast is more about the framing and where it exists in the customer’s buying journey. **Ads or Sponsors**: Ads and sponsors do not belong in a Conversion-style podcast *unless* they are ads for what you want people to convert on! **Promotional Priority**: Show growth. There is a direct line from listeners to sales or opt-ins, so you want to get as many new listeners to your podcast as possible and should promote any and all elements of the show that will be intriguing, spark conversations, or get people excited to take another step in your direction. This might mean sharing clips, teasing what you teach, direct, 1:1 outreach to potential listeners or promotional partners, and paid promotions. **Investment:** This is a type of podcast where you might consider paying for marketing help or show growth (but avoid those folks on Instagram who guarantee you thousands of downloads. They will be bots). SEO, Pay Per Click and other content marketing experts can really help you get your numbers up, however. # Strategic Content Podcasts *Content Shows may or may not be a standalone Blueprint for your business. No matter what kind of podcast you make, content will be a necessary side effect. There are shows that exist primarily for content that can then be distributed and repurposed, however, and that is a completely legitimate use of one!* **Show Format:** Absolutely anything goes. Follow your creative heart to the ends of the earth. 😉 One idea to consider is outlining a course or book you want to create, breaking it into episode-sized chunks, and recording it over the course of a year. That can be a great way to tackle huge content projects and build your repurposing right into the process. **Show Notes:** As detailed and expansive as you can manage. Since your main goal is content, make sure your notes are standalone pieces that can be referenced, reused and shared easily. **Guests:** Go for it! You can take a content platform and get extra value out of it by also networking, shining a light on clients and case studies, or expanding the areas you can speak about by bringing in other experts. **Ads or Sponsors:** Absolutely any kind you like. Or none if you prefer. **Promotional Priority**: Promoting isn’t necessary for all Content podcasts – particularly when your main use of the show is internal communications, or feeding other content channels. If you do want to promte your podcast – follo your heart and your metrics to the channels that work best for you. **Investment:** Your main investment here is going to be in formatting, presenting and then repurposing your podcast. That might mean transcripts that get organized into a book or course, that might mean episodes that get sliced and diced into a world of social media posts. The sky is the limit, but it will be the best use of your resources. It’s also not a bad idea to invest in recording and post-production quality so your content stays more evergreen. ## Using the Business Podcast Blueprints for Other Decisions These are the high-level best practices for each of the Business Podcast Blueprints, but podcasting is and will remain a constantly changing and creative practice. Your specific situation, needs and priorities could result in a different way of designing your podcast. And that’s amazing. It’s why the Blueprints are designed to help you make strategic decisions of all kinds, not just the ones mentioned here. They will help you verify that anything you want to do is aligned with your most important goal. Here is how to use the Blueprints for a strategic decision not on our list: **Step 1:** Identify the strategic decision you need to make. **Step 2:** Formulate a question that includes your specific situation and/or constraints. **Step 3:** Answer the question to find out if the decision is aligned with your goals or might conflict with them. Here are a few examples how how this works: ## Should My Podcast Have Guests? **Blueprint:** Thought Leadership. **Q:** Will having guests help me establish thought leadership in my industry so our brand awareness increases? **A:** Yes, *IF* they are conversations between experts – not interviews where I just ask someone else to share their expertise. ## Should My Podcast Have Guests? **Blueprint:** Audience Engagement **Q:** Will having guests help me create a better relationship with my existing audience so they trust my brand more? **A:** Yes! There are lots of things I don’t know that would be helpful to my audience, and bringing them that information will improve our relationship. ## Should My Podcast Have Sponsors? **Blueprint:** Audience Engagement **Q:** Will sponsors help me serve my existing audience? **A:** Maybe! There are lots of companies offering services that could be useful to them, and they take my recommendations seriously. It might be worth a shot if I can get a high enough rate. ## Should My Podcast Have Sponsors? **Blueprint:** Conversion **Q:** Will sponsors help me get more conversions to my products, services or community? **A:** No. Sponsorships will take valuable airtime and attention I could be using for my own content. Always format your questions in relation to your business goals, and in your answer include any restrictions you might be working under, like time, budget and bandwidth. It’s how you choose to use the Blueprints for your specific show and business that will make your show unique and profitable. What works for you works for you may or may not work for anyone else. You’re the boss of your podcast. The Blueprints will help you be a good one. And if you’d like some help being a good one, than lets talk! You can book a [complimentary strategy session right here](https://calendly.com/onestone/strategysession), where Megan Dougherty, One Stone Creative’s co-founder and the creator of the Business Podcast Blueprints, can help you decide on the right direction for your show. Below, you’ll find some more resources that will help you make your podcast effective, efficient and profitable. As you’re evaluating your options, remember the [13 questions you should ask a podcast producer before you hire them](https://onestonecreative.net/13-questions-to-ask-a-podcast-production-company/)! [Let's Talk About Your Podcast!](https://calendly.com/onestone/strategysession) ### Business Podcast Sprints *The easiest podcasting you’ll ever do.* We learn about your business, design a strategic 12-episode season, outline every episode, record with you, and handle all of the production. You provide your unique expertise, we take care of the rest. **Perfect for:** Solo experts and small partnerships in coaching, law, consulting, and finance. **Great for:** Nurturing leads, improving sales cycles and the next step after reading your book or hearing your keynote. #### [**Learn More**](https://onestonecreative.net/sprint) ### Podcast Kickoffs and Action Plans *Start your show off on the right foot, or fix one that isn’t doing what it should.* Kickoffs: If you have an idea for a company podcast, make sure you’re approaching it strategically, and have a blueprint for succes, book a podcast kickoff and get everything you need to start strong. [**Learn More.**](https://onestonecreative.net/kickoff) If you’ve been publishing consistently but aren’t seeing the results you expected, there’s a reason. We audit your show, uncover what’s missing or could be improved, and give you a clear, detailed plan to get better ROI, fast. [**Learn More.**](https://onestonecreative.net/action) ### Podcast Production *Professional, reliable podcasting (seasons or ongoing) without any micromanaging.* We handle editing, publishing, strategy, and promotional assets so you can focus on hosting and connecting with your listeners. Designed for teams who need expert production with minimal oversight. **Perfect for:** Small teams in legal, PR, HR, and business consulting **Great for:** Podcasters who need a strategic, white-glove production partner they can count on. #### [**Learn More**](https://onestonecreative.net/services) ### White Label Production *Sell podcasting services and let us deliver them.* If you have an audience that \*should\* be podcasting, but you don’t want to add a new arm to your business – let us be your delivery partners, and bring the same level of professional, reliable and profitable production to your clients and community that we give to our own clients. Wholesale and affiliate-based programs available. **Perfect for:** Agencies, publishers, and expert coaches **Great for:** Generating revenue, extending client relationships, creating podcast networks. #### [**Learn More**](https://onestonecreative.net/production-partnerships/) ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/12/BPS_CoverArt-300x300.jpg "BPS_CoverArt") # Are You Ready for the Spotlight? Small business owners know that podcasts can be a powerful marketing tool—but turning a show into a profitable asset is another story. *The Business Podcast Spotlight* bridges that gap, showing you how to transform a podcast from just another marketing channel into a revenue-generating strategy. Each episode is a behind-the-scenes, strategic consultation with real business owners, exploring how they leverage their podcasts to drive results. We focus on actionable insights that help you make your show more efficient, effective, and profitable. Guests who implement changes and see measurable results return to share their success, giving you clear, revenue-positive strategies you can apply to your own show. Would you like to be a guest? ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/BPS-Your-Show-Titlecard-scaled.jpg "BPS Your Show Titlecard") If you have a podcast for your company, or you’re planning one in the near future, then we want to feature you! [Become a Guest](https://onestonecreative.net/SpotlightGuest) Let’s highlight the good work you’re doing – and take your podcast to the next level. --- ### [Micro Podcasting](https://onestonecreative.net/micro-podcasts/) **Published:** February 10, 2026 **Author:** Megan **Content:** # Micro Podcasts ## Maximum Reach for Minimum Effort Short-form video is one of the most popular and effective ways for expert business owners to build trust, visibility, and demand… when it’s done intentionally and strategically. The problem is that most short-form content ***isn’t***. Clipping long podcast episodes has the benefit of working elegantly in a workflow, but the lack of context in those clips means they often fall flat and dn’t produce the results we hope they will. The solution is purposefully recording short form video content, but between planning, recording, editing and scheduling, that can be a huge addition to your workload. A Micro Video Podcast is a producer-guided, batch-recorded answer to that problem. Instead of searching for highlights from long conversations, or hoping that an AI video service pulls out something you can use, you record weeks worth of short, focused Q&A or commentary-style episodes that answer real questions and position you as the expert you are. And it takes less time to record than a single traditional interview episode. # Here’s How it Works # Step 1 ## Choose Frequency You can release 1, 2 or 3 times a week, depending on how quickly you’d like to build traction and what works best with your other marketing projects. # Step 2 ## Choose Distribution Depending on your needs, we can upgrade your micropodcast with enhanced SEO, done-for you scheduling, and integration with your existing content. # Step 3 ## Batch Record You’ll join a producer once every 4 weeks to record content for the next cycle. Then we create all of the assets, and do as much distribution as you selected. Each recording session is guided, edited, and delivered as polished, ready-to-use video with transcripts suitable for your website and all of your social channels. ## Step 1: Select Frequency **Every Micropodcast comes with what you need to start your content engine:** - Producer-assisted batch recording – 4 weeks of content at a time. - Produced branded videos - Lightly edited transcript - Audio version with complimentary RSS feed ### Weekly Release #### $600 /4-Week Cycle ### Twice Weekly Release #### $800 /4-Week Cycle ### Three Weekly Releases #### $1200 /4-Week Cycle **If you have the team in place to optimize and distribute your content from here – this is all you need! [Book a call](https://zcal.co/onestonecreative/strategysession) to get started today.** # Step 2: Choose Distribution Options These options are designed to help you take your content further, and work harder for your business, creating a system that grows your online presence, your search visibility and your authority in your industry. ## Option 1: ### Distribution To each episode, add: - A social media caption - Captions embedded in the videos - Scheduling to YouTube and 2 additional platforms of your choice. ### Weekly Release +$120 /4-Week Cycle ### Twice Weekly Release +$240 /4-Week Cycle ### Three Weekly Releases +$360 /4-Week Cycle ## Option 2: ### SEO Visibility To each episode, add: - A blog-style edit for each video - Formatting and scheduling to website (wordpress and squarespace supported) - Schema written and uplaoded to your site ### Weekly Release +$200 /4-Week Cycle ### Twice Weekly Release +$400 /4-Week Cycle ### Three Weekly Releases +$600 /4-Week Cycle ## Option 3: ### Ecosystem (Includes SEO Visibility Option) To each episode, add: - Everything in SEO Visibility Option - Linking to other Micro-Pod episodes - Internal linking to other content - External linking as appropriate ### Weekly Release +$300 /4-Week Cycle ### Twice Weekly Release +$600 /4-Week Cycle ### Three Weekly Releases +$900 /4-Week Cycle # Ready to Start Your Content Engine? If you’d like to have a chat about your business and whether or not a Micro Podcast is a good next step for you, click the button below to book a free, no-obligation strategy session with Megan Dougherty. [Book a Strategy Session](https://zcal.co/onestonecreative/strategysession) Not sure if you want to podcast forever? Check out our [Business Podcast Sprints](onestonecreative.net/sprint) – Limited Release Seasons that will be the easiest podcasting you ever do. # What People Have to Say about Working with One Stone Creative: ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/Lindsay-Rec.png "Lindsay Rec") [dipl_tilt_image image=”https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/Amy-Rec.png” _builder_version=”4.17.6″ _module_preset=”default” global_colors_info=”{}” _i=”1″ _address=”6.1.0.1″ /] [dipl_tilt_image image=”https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/Mary-Ann-Rec.png” _builder_version=”4.17.6″ _module_preset=”default” global_colors_info=”{}” _i=”0″ _address=”6.1.1.0″ /] ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/Mike-Rec.png "Mike Rec") One Stone Creative produced the Unlearn Podcast from the spring of 2019, to 2024. The team provided excellent strategy development, coaching and preparation during the planning and launch of the show, and consistently deliver crisp editing and detailed show notes. On an ongoing basis, they’ve offered interview coaching, brainstorming around strategies and ideas to improve the show. With their help my audience and podcasting skills continuously grow. – Barry O’Reilly, The Unlearn Podcast “The team of One Stone creativewas a pure joy to work with on my podcast network. They bring both professionalism and passion to being two of the top podcast producers and podcasting consultants around. If you are thinking about starting a podcast or have been podcasting for years as I have, they bring not only efficiency to your podcast production but real value for your entire operation. Two Thumbs up and Five Stars to the entire team of One Stone Creative.” – Tox Fox, The Compliance Podcast Network I’ll be honest. I started the Spin Sucks podcast with some trepidation. We talked about it for years, but I couldn’t just seem to get my butt in gear to get it done. I kept hearing things such as less than one percent of podcasts are hosted by women (according to Libsyn) and also watched the trajectory of podcasting and yet… But then the amazingly brilliant and easy-to-work with women from One Stone Creative told me there is more than enough content on the blog to create a podcast. They said, in fact, I wouldn’t have to do any work, other than record something weekly. They made it so easy, it was impossible to say no. Thanks to them, we’re here 5 years later. – Gini Dierich, The Spin Sucks Podcast --- ### [Become a Sponsor](https://onestonecreative.net/become-a-sponsor/) **Published:** September 16, 2025 **Author:** Megan **Content:** 6th Annual # State of Business Podcasting Report Become a Sponsor # We’d Love to Have You! Thank you so much for your interest in sponsoring this year’s State of Business Podcasting Report! Through the Community Sponsorship Program, information about the report is going to be shared with over 45,000 people – and we’d love to share information about your brand right along with it! On this page you’ll find more details about the report, our methodology, the sponsorship levels and our promotional strategies. You’re also warmly invited to [book a call](https://calendly.com/onestone/letstalk) with Megan Dougherty to discuss any questions you have, or what might make sponsoring the report an excellent experience for you and your brand # Report History and Methodology The first State of Business Podcasting Report was created and released in 2020, to solve a recurring problem. As a business podcast producer, Megan Dougherty, the co-founder of One Stone Creative, was often being asked questions like “what is the best day to release my show?” “Should I have my picture on my cover art?” and “What type of outro will be best for my podcast?” And while Megan and the team had good educated guesses, and a solid grasp on total-podcast-industry best practices, they didn’t have data specifically for business podcasts. So they decided to find out. Each year since then, every fall the One Stone Creative team has pulled a list of the top 100 business podcasts and manually evaluated each of them on dozens of criteria, from length, to sponsorship placement and type, from branding choices to episode format and much, much more. The report has been shared by industry leaders like Podnews and the Compliance Podcast network, and is regularly referenced by experts, business oners and publications to inform their business-podcasting decisions. # Sponsorship Levels # Gold – Title Sponsor ## **$5000 – 1 Available** As the sole Title Sponsor, your brand will be recognized as the partner who made this year’s research freely available to the business podcasting community. **Benefits:** - **Logo on report cover & landing page**, acknowledged as Title Sponsor. - **Acknowledgment line on each page:** *“This Year’s Report Was Brought to You by \[You\]”* - **Recognition during the live release at the Podcasting for Business Conference** (verbal thanks + logo on title page of presentation) - Recognition as the **exclusive Title Sponsor** in all email and social media mentions of the 2025 report - **Write the forward to the report** which will be included with all downloads. - Logo at the top of **sponsor page of the report**, immediately after forward. - Recognition as the **exclusive Title Sponsor** in all email and social media mentions by One Stone Creative of the 2025 report ## **Brand Placement Demonstrations** Here are some examples of what the brand placement will look like within the report. While the exact layout and placement might change as this year’s report is developed, the brand prominance will not. ### **Report Title Page** ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/09/Presentation-and-Report-TitlePage.png "Presentation and Report TitlePage") ### **Report Forward** ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/09/Sponsor-Forward-Page.png "Sponsor Forward Page") ### **Standard Data Page** ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/09/Data-Page-Demo.png "Data Page Demo") # Silver – Section Sponsor ## **$2000 – 3 Available** Silver Sponsors are matched to **one section of the report** that aligns with their niche, making their placement highly relevant and actionable. The sections: **Notes and Websites**, **Social Media** and **Branding** are available on a first come, first served basis. **Benefits:** - **Logo featured** on each page of the section. - **Short blurb or exclusive offer** (2–3 sentences + link) directly to readers in that section. - **Logo and link** on report landing page. - Logo on **sponsor page of the report**, immediately after the forward. - Link and offer included in section-specific **email sequence after report download**. - **Mention with tag** in LinkedIn post specifically about your section. ## **Brand Placement Demonstrations** Here are some examples of what the brand placement will look like within the report. While the exact layout and placement might change as this year’s report is developed, the brand prominance will not. ### **Section Page** ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/09/Section-Title-Page.png "Section Title Page") ### **Section Data Page** ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/09/Section-Data-Page.png "Section Data Page") # Bronze – Supporting Sponsor ## **$200 – Unlimited** As a supporting sponsor, you will be celebrated as part of the team of companies and organizations who stood behind this year’s research. **Benefits:** - **Link and logo featured** on the report landing page. - **Logo on sponsor page of the report**, immediately after forward. - Link included in “Thank you” email in post-download sequence. - **Mention with tag** in group thank you Linked In post after report release. # How We Promote The State of Business Podcasting Report is One Stone Creative’s largest promotional event of the year – here is some of what we have planned to get eyes on your brand (and the beautiful data, of course!) - **Community Sponsors.** State of Business Podcasting Report Promotional Partners will each be sending an email with a link to download the report for free. So far the expected reach of the report by email is 47,000. - **Podcasting for Business Conference Debut**. The data is going to be offically released during a live keynote presentation atat the 4h annual Podcasting for Business Conference. This live webinar will include an overview of all the data, analysis and comparison to last year, and include a Q and A. The recording will be available for all conference attendees. - Public Webinar. A second live webinar to review the data and analysis will be held the week following the conference and be freely available to all comers, with the recording available for those who cannot attend live. - **Direct Promotions.** The report will be personally delivered to over 2000 members of the Podcasting for Business Community which includes Newsletter Subscribers, readers of the Podcasting for Business Book and a LinkedIn Newsletter. # Sound Good? Then you can either purchase yoursponsorship using the form below, or [book a call](https://calendly.com/onestone/letstalk) if you would like to discuss sponsorship in more detail. # Terms And Conditions of Sponsorship ##### Sponsorship Recognition - One Stone Creative inc. remains the sole producer and publisher of the *State of Business Podcasting Report*. - Sponsors will be credited in the manner outlined on this page, but sponsorship does not imply authorship, ownership, or editorial control of the report. ##### Deliverables - Sponsor benefits (logos, mentions, placements, etc.) will be delivered as described in the chosen sponsorship package. While slight changes to formatting may occur in the final report, the brand prominance will be unaffected. - Sponsors are responsible for providing logos, brand assets, and any copy required for inclusion by the deadlines stated below. ##### Payment - Sponsorship fees are due immediately, and packages are available on a first-come-first served basis. A sponsorship is not considered purchased until payment has been made. - Sponsorships are non-refundable once payment is recieved. ##### Deadlines and Assets - Logos, copy, and any other sponsor materials must be submitted no later than November 1st, 2025. - If materials are not received on time, One Stone Creative reserves the right to proceed without them. ##### Editorial Independence - All research, analysis, and conclusions in the report are produced solely by One Stone Creative. - Sponsors do not influence or approve the findings, data, or commentary of the report. ##### Promotion and Usage - Sponsors are encouraged promote their involvement with the report (e.g., “Proud Community Sponsor of the 6th Annual State of Business Podcasting Report”) in marketing materials. - Use of the full report content, graphics, or data beyond what is publicly released requires written permission from One Stone Creative. ##### Liability and Limitations - One Stone Creative will make all reasonable efforts to deliver the report and sponsor benefits as described, but is not liable for unforeseen delays, distribution interruptions, or third-party platform issues. - No guarantee is made regarding the number of views, downloads, leads, sales, or other results from sponsorship. All outcomes will vary depending on market conditions and audience engagement. ##### Governing Law These terms are governed by the laws of Quebec, Canada. --- ### [Business Podcast Blueprint Workshop](https://onestonecreative.net/workshop/) **Published:** November 10, 2025 **Author:** Megan **Content:** # Business Podcast Blueprints Workshop ### Design a Podcast that Delivers Business Results You can Measure. # 90 Minutes to a Podcast That Delivers Join Megan Dougherty, author of Podcasting for Business: How to Create a Show That Makes a Bottom-Line Difference For your Business for a live (virual!) hands-on workshop where we will look at your business strategy and design, or refine, a podcast to help you acheive your goals. **Relationship Building:** Connect with the referral partners and clients you need to grow. **Thought Leadership:** Position yourself as a trusted authority and creator of ideas. **Audience Engagement:** Nurture people towards knowing, liking and trusting you. **Conversion:** Grow your list, community or low-tiket sales. **Content:** Fill your social media flywheel or build out larger projects. You’ll leave this workhop with clear direction, a practical strategy, and next steps to make your show a powerful driver of value for your business. Limited to 15 people per session. # Who Should Come: These sessions are designed to be immediately actionable and help you align your podcast with your business goals. If you: - Have a business you’e been running for at least 2 years, - Have a good idea of who your ideal clients are, and why they buy from you, and - Don’t have a podcast yet, but are planning on in 2026, or - Have a show that you think could be doing a better job for less money, Then this is the workshop or you. Whatever your goal, and no matter where you’re starting from, you will leave with clear direction, a practical strategy, and next steps to make your show work *for* your business. # Reserve Your Spot Today! To ensure enough time to work with each podcaster, space is limited to 15 people for each session. Recordings wil be provided to all who attend live, but because of the nature of the training, there is no ‘replay-only’ access. # What People Have to Say about Working with One Stone Creative: ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/Lindsay-Rec.png "Lindsay Rec") [dipl_tilt_image image=”https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/Amy-Rec.png” _builder_version=”4.17.6″ _module_preset=”default” global_colors_info=”{}” theme_builder_area=”post_content” _i=”1″ _address=”4.1.0.1″ /] [dipl_tilt_image image=”https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/Mary-Ann-Rec.png” _builder_version=”4.17.6″ _module_preset=”default” global_colors_info=”{}” theme_builder_area=”post_content” _i=”0″ _address=”4.1.1.0″ /] ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/Mike-Rec.png "Mike Rec") One Stone Creative produced the Unlearn Podcast from the spring of 2019, to 2024. The team provided excellent strategy development, coaching and preparation during the planning and launch of the show, and consistently deliver crisp editing and detailed show notes. On an ongoing basis, they’ve offered interview coaching, brainstorming around strategies and ideas to improve the show. With their help my audience and podcasting skills continuously grow. – Barry O’Reilly, The Unlearn Podcast “The team of One Stone creativewas a pure joy to work with on my podcast network. They bring both professionalism and passion to being two of the top podcast producers and podcasting consultants around. If you are thinking about starting a podcast or have been podcasting for years as I have, they bring not only efficiency to your podcast production but real value for your entire operation. Two Thumbs up and Five Stars to the entire team of One Stone Creative.” – Tox Fox, The Compliance Podcast Network I’ll be honest. I started the Spin Sucks podcast with some trepidation. We talked about it for years, but I couldn’t just seem to get my butt in gear to get it done. I kept hearing things such as less than one percent of podcasts are hosted by women (according to Libsyn) and also watched the trajectory of podcasting and yet… But then the amazingly brilliant and easy-to-work with women from One Stone Creative told me there is more than enough content on the blog to create a podcast. They said, in fact, I wouldn’t have to do any work, other than record something weekly. They made it so easy, it was impossible to say no. Thanks to them, we’re here 5 years later. – Gini Dierich, The Spin Sucks Podcast --- ### [Contact](https://onestonecreative.net/contact/) **Published:** September 10, 2018 **Author:** Megan **Content:** # Get in touch! Whether you’re a little bit pod-curious, or a dedicated pro, we’d love to hear from you! --- ### [Business Podcast Sprints](https://onestonecreative.net/sprint/) **Published:** March 26, 2025 **Author:** Megan **Content:** # Business Podcast Sprints ### Done-for-you, business aligned podcast seasons *finished* in 12 weeks or less. # Have an ROI-Driving Podcast in just 90 Days The Business Podcast Sprint™ is a focused, **done-for-you** experience to plan, produce and publish a solo or co-hosted podcast that drives leads, builds authority and fits your existing marketing. *Without wasting time, guessing what works, or sounding like an amateur.* We get it. Podcasting can feel overwhelming. Between the **time**, the **tech** and the **cost** – not to mention figuring out **what to say –** it’s easy to put it off, or never get to it at all. That’s why we built the Business Podcast Sprint™ – to help business owners leverage the many benefits of podcasting without the headaches. **What Do you get in a Business Podcast Sprint?** A fully produced and published 12-episode podcast season that you can deploy within your sales process to help your ideal customers know, like and buy from you more easily and quickly. You’ll work directly with an expert podcast strategist (Megan Dougherty) and producer (Audra Casino) to create a high quality evergreen business asset. **Success Metrics:** - A shorter sales cycle and warmer leads - Better-fit clients, more excited to work with you - Time saved on service delivery - Content for your social media channels, newsletters and other promotional platforms - Greater authority and more high-quality opportunities **Other Benefits of a Podcast Sprint:** - Be perceived as a thought leader and expert - Nurture new leads at scale - Shortcut to the knowing-liking-trusting that creates sales - Gain competitive advantage in pitches over other businesses - Earn reputation as a valued, trusted advisor [I'm In! Let's Discuss!](#bookcall) *(Are you in Canada? You’ll find our Canadian pricing and services for sprints, strategic podcast production and micro-podcasts at [OneStoneCreative.ca](onestonecreative.ca))* # This is for You If: - You have been in business at least 2 years. - You have an existing sales process that works pretty well or better. - You are clear about your ideal clients and why they do business with you. - You don’t enjoy the treadmill of perpetual content creation. - You don’t want to learn a bunch of new technology. - You really just want podcasting to be easy, quick and *done*. **On the Flip Side…** This process won’t be a great fit if you’re still figuring out your offers and audience, you’re too busy to spend about 12 hours over 12 weeks on a new project, or if your main reason for podcasting would be building relationships, or getting massive downloads – those are different kinds of shows. (Which you can learn about [here](https://onestonecreative.net/business-podcast-production-services/)!) **Investment:** $5000USD for a 12-episode solo audio podcast season, designed and outlined for you, recorded with an expert producer, then edited and polished for promotion and distribution. Payment schedule is either $5000USD at once, or two payments (one at project start, and the second after 30 days) of $2500. **Optional Customizations:** If you want to get even more mileage out of a podcast season – we can make that happen. - **Make it Video** Do your season as a video podcast. (+$2000) - **Guaranteed Listeners** Receive 2500 IAB certified downloads for your season, with a full audience insights report (+$4500) - **Promote All Year** Get a calendar and content to promote your season for the next 3 quarters after your initial 12-episode run. (+1500) [I'm In! Let's Discuss!](#bookcall) # What is it Like to do a Business Podcast Sprint? Meet Kat Sosnick, founder of [Greene Street Coaching](https://greenestreetcoaching.com/), and host of the new [Tied to Metrics Podcast.](https://cms.megaphone.fm/channel/tiedtometrics) She was one of the very first people to try a Sprint and she graciously took the time to share her experience – check out what she has to say: Meet Sara McCullough founder of [WD Development](https://www.wddevelopment.ca/), a fee-only financial planning firm, and host of the [I’ve Heard Worse Podcast](https://cms.megaphone.fm/channel/iveheardworse). The cohesive season we developed with Sara is now working in her business to help educate and nurture her customers and commuity. # Here’s How it Works The Business Podcast Sprint Process has been designed to take all of the guesswork and most of the *work* work out of podcasting. ### **Step 1** You tell us about your business, and we design a custom solo or co-hosted podcast season, complete with episode outlines,, along with art, music, and graphics templates. ### **Step 2** You add your stories, insights and personality to the scripts we provide, practice your episodes, then join an expert producer to record them over two sessions. ### **Step 3** We produce all of the content, publish it (and help you submit your show to Apple and Spotify) and guide you on how to deploy it within your sales process. [I'm In! Let's Discuss!](#bookcall) # The Fine Print **Here’s What You Get:** - 12 Episode Audio Podcast Season (Trailer, 10 full 15-20 minute solo episodes, Closer) - All episodes recorded with a producer - Podcast Art, Description and Intro and Outro with music - Show Notes for each episode - 2x Promotional graphics for each episode - 1x Audiogram for each episode - Each episode formatted for publishing to YouTube - Complimentary Podcast Hosting **Here’s what you’ll need to do: - Complete the Business Podcast Sprint Intake Form. (Up to 2 hours) - Add your notes to the customized scripts we create for you. (Up to 3 hours) - Practice your episodes. (Up to 3 hours) - Join the 2 Recording Sessions. (Up to 6 Hours) - Commit to finishing the process within 90 days. # Ready to Go? Whether you want to talk about it and see if it’s a fit or if you want to start next week, the first step is a call to make sure it’s going to benefit your business! Use the calendar below to book a no-obligation call to chat. [Business Podcast Sprint Inquiry - Schedule a meeting](https://zcal.co/i/5I2vwwO6) # What People Have to Say about Working with One Stone Creative: ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/Lindsay-Rec.png "Lindsay Rec") [dipl_tilt_image image=”https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/Amy-Rec.png” _builder_version=”4.17.6″ _module_preset=”default” global_colors_info=”{}”][/dipl_tilt_image] [dipl_tilt_image image=”https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/Mary-Ann-Rec.png” _builder_version=”4.17.6″ _module_preset=”default” global_colors_info=”{}”][/dipl_tilt_image] ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/Mike-Rec.png "Mike Rec") One Stone Creative produced the Unlearn Podcast from the spring of 2019, to 2024. The team provided excellent strategy development, coaching and preparation during the planning and launch of the show, and consistently deliver crisp editing and detailed show notes. On an ongoing basis, they’ve offered interview coaching, brainstorming around strategies and ideas to improve the show. With their help my audience and podcasting skills continuously grow. – Barry O’Reilly, The Unlearn Podcast “The team of One Stone creativewas a pure joy to work with on my podcast network. They bring both professionalism and passion to being two of the top podcast producers and podcasting consultants around. If you are thinking about starting a podcast or have been podcasting for years as I have, they bring not only efficiency to your podcast production but real value for your entire operation. Two Thumbs up and Five Stars to the entire team of One Stone Creative.” – Tox Fox, The Compliance Podcast Network I’ll be honest. I started the Spin Sucks podcast with some trepidation. We talked about it for years, but I couldn’t just seem to get my butt in gear to get it done. I kept hearing things such as less than one percent of podcasts are hosted by women (according to Libsyn) and also watched the trajectory of podcasting and yet… But then the amazingly brilliant and easy-to-work with women from One Stone Creative told me there is more than enough content on the blog to create a podcast. They said, in fact, I wouldn’t have to do any work, other than record something weekly. They made it so easy, it was impossible to say no. Thanks to them, we’re here 5 years later. – Gini Dierich, The Spin Sucks Podcast --- ### [The Business Podcast Spotlight](https://onestonecreative.net/spotlight/) **Published:** March 12, 2025 **Author:** Megan **Content:** # The Business Podcast Spotlight Small Business Owners know that podcasting can be a valuable and profitable part of their marketing – but the gap between knowing it can be that way, and actually seeing the results on your balance sheet can be huge. The Business Podcast Spotlight is filling that gap. Each episode is a strategic consultation about how a real business owner is leveraging a show, and how they can do it better. Better, for our purposes, means more efficiently, more effectively, and more profitably. --- ### [Production Partnerships](https://onestonecreative.net/production-partnerships/) **Published:** November 7, 2025 **Author:** Megan **Content:** # Production Partnerships ### Expand Your Service Offerings Without Adding Time, Team or Budget. # Business Owners Win with Podcasting The evidence is in: podcasting works. It builds trust, deepens relationships, and drives business results. But creating high quality shows takes time, experience and infrastructure that many amazing marketing agencies, publishing houses and consultants don’t have in-house. That’s where a partnership with One Stone Creative comes in. If you’re a publisher, marketing agency or consultant, expert business coach, or otherwise working with business owners who really \*should\* have a podcast, we can help you make that happen. We have wholesale, whitelable production rates available if you want to add a podcasting arm to your current offerings, and a generous affiliate program if you’d like to send people our way. *Email Megan (at) OneStoneCreative (dot) net to request a rate sheet, or [book a call](https://calendly.com/onestone/letstalk) to discuss the options!* # What People Have to Say about Working with One Stone Creative: ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/Lindsay-Rec.png "Lindsay Rec") [dipl_tilt_image image=”https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/Amy-Rec.png” _builder_version=”4.17.6″ _module_preset=”default” global_colors_info=”{}”][/dipl_tilt_image] [dipl_tilt_image image=”https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/Mary-Ann-Rec.png” _builder_version=”4.17.6″ _module_preset=”default” global_colors_info=”{}”][/dipl_tilt_image] ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/Mike-Rec.png "Mike Rec") One Stone Creative produced the Unlearn Podcast from the spring of 2019, to 2024. The team provided excellent strategy development, coaching and preparation during the planning and launch of the show, and consistently deliver crisp editing and detailed show notes. On an ongoing basis, they’ve offered interview coaching, brainstorming around strategies and ideas to improve the show. With their help my audience and podcasting skills continuously grow. – Barry O’Reilly, The Unlearn Podcast “The team of One Stone creativewas a pure joy to work with on my podcast network. They bring both professionalism and passion to being two of the top podcast producers and podcasting consultants around. If you are thinking about starting a podcast or have been podcasting for years as I have, they bring not only efficiency to your podcast production but real value for your entire operation. Two Thumbs up and Five Stars to the entire team of One Stone Creative.” – Tox Fox, The Compliance Podcast Network I’ll be honest. I started the Spin Sucks podcast with some trepidation. We talked about it for years, but I couldn’t just seem to get my butt in gear to get it done. I kept hearing things such as less than one percent of podcasts are hosted by women (according to Libsyn) and also watched the trajectory of podcasting and yet… But then the amazingly brilliant and easy-to-work with women from One Stone Creative told me there is more than enough content on the blog to create a podcast. They said, in fact, I wouldn’t have to do any work, other than record something weekly. They made it so easy, it was impossible to say no. Thanks to them, we’re here 5 years later. – Gini Dierich, The Spin Sucks Podcast --- ### [Free Podcast Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) **Published:** August 12, 2024 **Author:** Megan **Content:** # Podcasting for Business # Complimentary Strategy Session ## A strategic look at your current or future podcast. " # If you’re podcurious, or not happy with the performance of your current show – let’s talk about it! ## Book a completely free 30-minute podcast strategy session with One Stone Creative Co-Founder Megan Dougherty. [Strategy Session - Schedule a meeting](https://zcal.co/i/KNh5kbWR) ### Prefer email? No problem, you’re welcome to email *megan (at) onestonecreative (dot) net*. # Company Podcasts need to meet Company Goals --- ### [Schema Markup](https://onestonecreative.net/schema-markup/) **Published:** March 27, 2026 **Author:** Megan **Content:** # Does AI Know You Have a Podcast? ### If your website isn’t structured to tell AI platforms and Search Engines who you are and what you do – they can’t recommend your show – or your business – to anyone. # Podcast Schema Markup If someone asks AI tools like ChatGPT, Perplexity, or Claude about shows in your niche, does your podcast come up? Right now, it may or may not show up – AI decides what to surface based on many factors, and no one controls all of them. But we do know that if your website isn’t structured properly, you’re not even in the running. Most podcast websites are missing something called schema markup: the behind-the-scenes code that tells search engines and AI tools what your show actually is and that you host it. Without it, they’re guessing, and when they’re guessing, they’re usually moving on to a show that makes it easier for them. (Or hallucinating something, I suppose…) Now, schema markup doesn’t guarantee you’ll be cited or recommended – it’s one of many factors in play. What it does do is make sure your show can be properly read and understood by the different AI platforms (and search engines!) And that means you’re in the game. # Here’s How it Works # Step 1 ## Learning You tell us about your show, and choose the episodes you would like schema markup for. # Step 2 ## Creation We will create the markup code for you whole podcast and for the individual episode. # Step 3 ## Deployment We will either provide you with upload-ready schema markup code – or upload it for you! Each Package Includes: - Podcast-level schema (show name, host, description, categories, etc.) - Individual episode schema for the number of episodes you select (title, date, duration, affiliation, etc) - Ready to upload schema markup, or full deployment – your choice! # Schema Markup Packages **10 Episodes ($347)** – Perfect if you’re newer to podcasting or want to start with your very best or most recent epiodes. [Get Your 10-Episode Podcast Schema Setup!](https://buy.stripe.com/cNidR908z0iXfq2fFm38404) **20 Episodes ($497)** – Great for shows with a core catalog that want a stronger signal for search engines and AI platforms. [Get Your 20-Episode Podcast Schema Setup!](https://buy.stripe.com/00w9ATg7x1n16Tw2SA38405) **30 Episodes ($747)** – Ideal for serious shows who want comprehensive coverage – you pick the episodes, we’ll handle the rest. [Get Your 30-Episode Podcast Schema Setup!](https://buy.stripe.com/00w00jf3t8Pt91Edxe38406) # I want to Talk About it! If you’d like to have a chat about your business and whether or not Podcast Schema Markup is a good next step for you, click the button below to book a free, no-obligation strategy session with Megan Dougherty. [Book a Strategy Session](https://calendly.com/onestone/strategysession) Not sure if you want to podcast forever? Check out our [Business Podcast Sprints](onestonecreative.net/sprint) – Limited Release Seasons that will be the easiest podcasting you ever do. # What People Have to Say about Working with One Stone Creative: ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/Lindsay-Rec.png "Lindsay Rec") [dipl_tilt_image image=”https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/Amy-Rec.png” _builder_version=”4.17.6″ _module_preset=”default” global_colors_info=”{}” theme_builder_area=”post_content”][/dipl_tilt_image] [dipl_tilt_image image=”https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/Mary-Ann-Rec.png” _builder_version=”4.17.6″ _module_preset=”default” global_colors_info=”{}” theme_builder_area=”post_content”][/dipl_tilt_image] ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/Mike-Rec.png "Mike Rec") One Stone Creative produced the Unlearn Podcast from the spring of 2019, to 2024. The team provided excellent strategy development, coaching and preparation during the planning and launch of the show, and consistently deliver crisp editing and detailed show notes. On an ongoing basis, they’ve offered interview coaching, brainstorming around strategies and ideas to improve the show. With their help my audience and podcasting skills continuously grow. – Barry O’Reilly, The Unlearn Podcast “The team of One Stone creativewas a pure joy to work with on my podcast network. They bring both professionalism and passion to being two of the top podcast producers and podcasting consultants around. If you are thinking about starting a podcast or have been podcasting for years as I have, they bring not only efficiency to your podcast production but real value for your entire operation. Two Thumbs up and Five Stars to the entire team of One Stone Creative.” – Tox Fox, The Compliance Podcast Network I’ll be honest. I started the Spin Sucks podcast with some trepidation. We talked about it for years, but I couldn’t just seem to get my butt in gear to get it done. I kept hearing things such as less than one percent of podcasts are hosted by women (according to Libsyn) and also watched the trajectory of podcasting and yet… But then the amazingly brilliant and easy-to-work with women from One Stone Creative told me there is more than enough content on the blog to create a podcast. They said, in fact, I wouldn’t have to do any work, other than record something weekly. They made it so easy, it was impossible to say no. Thanks to them, we’re here 5 years later. – Gini Dierich, The Spin Sucks Podcast --- ### [Megan Dougherty](https://onestonecreative.net/megan-dougherty/) **Published:** March 16, 2026 **Author:** Megan **Content:** # Megan Dougherty Podcast Producer and Strategist, Author, Podcast Host # About Megan Dougherty ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/MeganDoughertyHeadshot2_DSC1702-683x1024.jpg "MeganDoughertyHeadshot2_DSC1702") Megan Dougherty is the co-founder of One Stone Creative and author of [Podcasting for Business: How to Create a Show That Makes a Bottom-Line Difference for Your Company](http://podcastingforbusiness.com/book). As a digital marketing strategist with a background in online business development, she has had the opportunity over the years to work with hundreds of business owners in a huge variety of industries. One Stone Creative Specializes in limited release practically done-for-you podcast seasons, and ongoing audio and video shows for expert business owners. In 2020 One Stone Creative developed the [Business Podcast Blueprints](https://onestonecreative.net/business-podcast-blueprints), to help companies and executives dial into the specific ways they can leverage a podcast for their content marketing and business development goals. Megan is also the creator of the [State of Business Podcasting Report](http://podcastingforbusiness.com/report), an annual research report that examines the top 100 business podcasts to establish trends and best practices for things like show structure, social media marketing and sponsorship for business podcasters. She currently lives in Western Quebec with her spouse, 2 Cats, 5 chickens and dozens of thriving houseplants. When not devising new ways to use podcasts for measurable business outcomes, she painstakingly creates from scratch items that are easily and cheaply available in many stores. Connect with Megan on [LinkedIn](https://www.linkedin.com/in/doughertymegan/), or check out her [Micro-Pod](https://onestonecreative.net/Micro-Pod) – [the Podcasting for Business Q and A Show](https://onestonecreative.net/QandA)! # Get Podcasting for Business! If you’re wondering: *is my podcast actually doing what I need it to? Am I measuring the right things? Could I be getting more out of the time and money I’m already putting in?* then you might want to grab a copy of [Podcasting for Business](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book)! Podcasting for Business outlines the entire Business Podcast Blueprints methdology and goes into detail about how t optimize your show for 15 different business outcomes, from more referral partners to a shorter sales cycle. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/PFB-Book-Mockups.png "PFB Book Mockups") # Will a Podcast Work for Your Business? **One Stone Creative** helps businesses build *profitable* podcasts that serve real business goals and make a real difference to your balance sheet – and we make it dead-simple for you and your team. If you’re ready to launch or level up your show, let’s talk. [Book a Free Strategy Session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) Or learn more about [Ongoing Production](https://onestonecreative.net/production/), Practically Done-For You [Podcast Sprints](https://onestonecreative.net/sprint/), [Micro-Pods](https://onestonecreative.net/micro-pods/) and [Podcast Action Plans](https://onestonecreative.net/action/). --- ### [Q and A](https://onestonecreative.net/qanda/) **Published:** January 28, 2026 **Author:** Megan **Content:** # The Podcasting for Business Q and A Show If you’ve got podcast questions, we’ve got podcast answers. Podcasting in support of a business is different than podcasting as a passion project, or even as a business in and of itself, and business owners need to think about an understand podcasts in the contexts of their businesses if they are going to be successful. So if you are podcasting, or thinking about podcasting as a marketing or business development channel for your business, subscribe on your favorite podcast player, or follow on social media for three podcast questions and three podcast answers, every week. Got a Podcast Question? We might have an asnwer! Email *hello (at) onestonecreative (dot) net* with your question and we may ue it on a future episode! The Podcasting for Business Q and A Show is hosted by Megan Dougherty, Co-Founder of One Stone Creative, a full-service podcast production agency that offers [ongoing production](onestonecreative.net/services), [DFY Podcast Sprints](OneStoneCreative.net/Sprint) and podcast network development. She is the author of [Podcasting for Business: How to Create a Show That Makes a Bottom Line Difference for Your Company](https://podcastingforbusiness.com/book) and creator of the annual State of Business Podcasting Report. [![Where Do You Find Guests for Your Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2026/05/PFBQA0342-Feature-400x250.jpg)](https://onestonecreative.net/where-do-you-find-guests-for-your-podcast-2/) ## [Where Do You Find Guests for Your Podcast?](https://onestonecreative.net/where-do-you-find-guests-for-your-podcast-2/) Jun 16, 2026 For most podcasters, guest sourcing is the hardest part of the workflow. It doesn't have to be. Listen Now: For some people, finding guests for their podcast is absolutely hands-down the easiest part of their workflow. Most podcasters are not like this. Sometimes,... --- ### [About](https://onestonecreative.net/about/) **Published:** June 5, 2018 **Author:** Megan **Content:** # About One Stone Creative ## There is a formula for profitable podcasting. *But it’s probably not what you think.* One of the biggest problems in podcasting for your business is that tying your effort to your outcomes is really, really challening. This is usually becuase company podcasts are designed to be podcasts instead of what they really are: custom built tools to drive specific business outcomes. One Stone Creative is a Boutique B2B Podcast Production Agency. This means that we build tools for businesses that improve sales cycles, create referral networks, build authority, nurture leads, improve SEO, fill social media flywheels and much more. We do this using our proprietary methodology, [The Business Podcast Blueprints](https://onestonecreative.net/business-podcast-blueprints), which allows us to design and optimize podcasts for specific, measurable outcomes. The exact formula for a profitable podcast is unique to each business, and the only measures for success that matter are those that drive that business forward. ## Strategic Podcasting for Small Businesses In 2017, there was a problem in the podcasting industry. There were a lot of great services out there to help people create a podcast as a passion project. And there were a lot of great services out there to help people create podcasts that would \*be\* businesses. But there weren’t a whole lot of services avalable for business owners who didn’t want another business – but who did want to leverage podcasts to support the work they were already doing. So when Audra Casino, a veteran audio producer with close to 2 decades of experience in radio, podcasts, and video, reached out to Megan Dougherty a digital marketing strategist with a background in online business building and audience engagement and said: “Do you want to start a business together?” And One Stone Creative began producing podcasts as marketing channels and business development tools for expert business owners. ## What is a Boutique B2B Podcast Production Agency? As we began our work in the podcasting space, we decided that One Stone Creative should be a boutique podcast production agency, rather than a commoditized or more mass-market one. We lead with strategy, and embed ourselves within your existing team and workflows so that your podcast is easy to produce, and the results it generates are measureable. We limit the number of new shows we launch each month to ensure we have enough time and bandwidth to be deeply involved with the process and make sure the show is easy to make and to share. Our focus is always on the job that a podcast does within a business, and are able to modify our tried and tested formulas for profitable podcasting to create the business results our clients need. ## The State of Business Podcasting Report ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/12/SOBP-Sample.jpg "SOBP Sample") Something that happens when you start to produce podcasts for business owners who are attentive to best practice and measurable results, is that they ask you a lot of questions. Questions like: - When should I release episodes? - How long should they be? - Do I need to make video? - Which social media channels should I promote on? - Should I have interviews or do solos? - What kind of show notes should we create? And I had good, educated responses, based on experince and anecdotes. But hard data is better. So in 2020, we published the first [State of Business Podcasting Repor](https://onestonecreative.net/report)t, where we look at the top 100 business pdocasts and manually evaluate them on over 70 different criteria, from length and release schedule, to sponsorships and networks to multi-media and social media activity. We have publsehd it every year since then, creatng benchmarks and best practices for business podcasts that we use to inform our strategy nad improve our outcomes. ## The Business Podcast Blueprints Over the years that we’ve been producing company podcasts, patterns started to emerge, and in 2022 we vodified them into [the Business Podcast Blueprints](https://onestonecreative.net/business-podcast-blueprints) – a methodology to design podcsats that do specific things very, very well. We optimize podcasts to do things like nurture leads, build referral networks establish thought leadership, shorted sales cycles and create content that fills internal and external channels. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/12/Business-Podcast-Blueprints.png "Business Podcast Blueprints") # Podcasting for Business: The Book Some people dream of writing great literature. Megan Dougherty dreamed about writing a textbook. So she did. Podcasting for Business: How to Create a Show That Makes a Bottom-Line Difference For your company, [which you can download and read for free,](https://podcastingforbusiness.com) is a detailed breakdown of the Business Podcsat Blueprints, and how you can use them to optimize a podcast for 15 different business outcomes. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/PFB-Book-Mockups.png "PFB Book Mockups") # The Team at One Stone Creative ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2019/03/Audra.jpg) #### Audra Casino Audra Casino is a radio broadcast veteran since 1997, both as a performer and producer. Her voice and audio production have been heard by millions. In the 2011, she moved into podcasting and video production, forecasting the future of audio-video content for the mass market. She has produced thousands of podcasts and created unique, compelling videos for YouTube, online courses, social ads, and company websites. She currently lives in North Texas with her lovely spouse, delightful child, two dogs, and a cat. When not producing, Audra bakes yummy things and slays digital dragons. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2020/07/MeganDougherty-Headshot.png) #### Megan Dougherty Megan Dougherty is a digital marketing strategist with a background in online business development and course creation. She has had the opportunity over the years to work with hundreds of business owners in a variety of industries. She really likes spreadsheets, but just hasn’t gotten the knack of Twitter yet. She currently lives in Western Quebec with her partner and over 65 thriving houseplants. When not devising new ways to use old content, she painstakingly creates from scratch items that are easily and cheaply available in many stores. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2020/10/Irwin.jpg) #### Irwin B. Galino Senior Audio Producer Irwin B. Galino has been a media professional for over a decade working in both the private and government sectors in the Philippines. Early in his career, he took various production roles in the Audio-Visual field. Later on, he focused further in audio by producing music, editing and mixing. For some of his free time, he does intensive research on building his “dream” bass rig. He currently lives in La Trinidad, with his wife, Michelle. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2020/10/Jensen.jpg) #### Jensen B. Galino Audio Producer Jensen B. Galino is an assistant producer in audio with a background in music and multimedia production. He currently lives in the Philippines and indulges in hobbies that involve music, doodling sketches, and consuming content. ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2021/01/Darla-sized-3.png) #### Darla Fields Account Manager Darla is an administrator and project manager with a genuine desire to help others succeed in their business and get their message out to the world. She has an unquenchable curiosity and a desire to learn about productivity, new software, and just about anything else. Her favorite place to be is in the background doing the tasks that keep entrepreneurs from doing what they do best…servicing their clients and audience. When not uploading podcast episodes and tweaking her to-do list, you can find her hiding out in her Indiana home, loving on one of her many German Shepherd Dogs, while sipping on coffee and having long conversations about life with her hubby. --- ### [Spotlight Updates](https://onestonecreative.net/spotlight-updates/) **Published:** March 17, 2025 **Author:** Megan **Content:** # The Business Podcast Spotlight # You’re on the list! You are going to be getting all of the juicy strategies we explore on the business podcast spotlight – and the latest research we conduct, tips for more profitable podcasting, and the best podcasting offers in the industry. We’re in between seasons of the spotlight right now – so check out past episodes [right here](https://onestonecreative.net/spotlight/). In the meantime, we’d love to get to know you! You can connect with One Stone Creative Co-Founder [Megan Dougherty on LinkedIn](https://www.linkedin.com/in/doughertymegan/) – she’d love if you dropped her a line and said hi! If you are currently considering a podcsat, and would like to discuss the strategy and options, you are welcome to book a [complimentary strategy session](https://onestonecreative.net/free-podcast-strategy-session/) with her, as well. If you’re interested (but no pressure!) you can read on to see the different ays One Stone Creative can support you with your podcst, and what it’s like to work with us! # How One Stone Creative Can Help ## Ongoing Production We can design, launch and produce ongoing audio and/or video podcasts on a weekly or bi-weekly release schedule. We always design shows for maximum benefit to the business, and handle everything from the audio-visual brand to ongoing production, show notes and promotional materials. We can also take on existing shows, and fit neatly into an existing workflow. ## Podcast Sprints and Seasons If a shorter session of podcasting is a better strategic fit (which it is for many businesses and newer podcasters) we can create limited release seasons of 6-12 episodes. If someone is looking for a trule DFY option, in our Podcast Sprints service, we will design and outline (with scripts!) an entire 12-episode podcast season, and record it with them in a virtual studio. ## Podcast Action Plans If someone just needs to know how to optimize a podcast for thier specific business, then we can provide an action plan with a detailed rundown of what type of podcast would be most apprpriate, how to execute it in-house or with another team, and even identify the specific metrics that will indicate success. For existing podcasters, we include a review of the current show, and provide a list of optimizations that can be made. # What People Have to Say about Working with One Stone Creative: ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/Lindsay-Rec.png "Lindsay Rec") [dipl_tilt_image image=”https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/Amy-Rec.png” _builder_version=”4.17.6″ _module_preset=”default” global_colors_info=”{}”][/dipl_tilt_image] [dipl_tilt_image image=”https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/Mary-Ann-Rec.png” _builder_version=”4.17.6″ _module_preset=”default” global_colors_info=”{}”][/dipl_tilt_image] ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/Mike-Rec.png "Mike Rec") One Stone Creative produced the Unlearn Podcast from the spring of 2019, to 2024. The team provided excellent strategy development, coaching and preparation during the planning and launch of the show, and consistently deliver crisp editing and detailed show notes. On an ongoing basis, they’ve offered interview coaching, brainstorming around strategies and ideas to improve the show. With their help my audience and podcasting skills continuously grow. – Barry O’Reilly, The Unlearn Podcast “The team of One Stone creative was a pure joy to work with on my podcast network. They bring both professionalism and passion to being two of the top podcast producers and podcasting consultants around. If you are thinking about starting a podcast or have been podcasting for years as I have, they bring not only efficiency to your podcast production but real value for your entire operation. Two Thumbs up and Five Stars to the entire team of One Stone Creative.” – Tox Fox, The Compliance Podcast Network I’ll be honest. I started the Spin Sucks podcast with some trepidation. We talked about it for years, but I couldn’t just seem to get my butt in gear to get it done. I kept hearing things such as less than one percent of podcasts are hosted by women (according to Libsyn) and also watched the trajectory of podcasting and yet… But then the amazingly brilliant and easy-to-work with women from One Stone Creative told me there is more than enough content on the blog to create a podcast. They said, in fact, I wouldn’t have to do any work, other than record something weekly. They made it so easy, it was impossible to say no. Thanks to them, we’re here 5 years later. – Gini Dierich, The Spin Sucks Podcast --- ### [Spotlight Booking Confirmation](https://onestonecreative.net/booking-confirmation/) **Published:** May 9, 2025 **Author:** Megan **Content:** # You’re Booked! ## On The Business Podcast Spotlight Thank you for joining The Business Podcast Spotlight! I can’t wait to learn more about your business, your podcast and the impact you’re making with both. If I may also say – you’re in great company. Our guests are among the smartest in their spaces – and unfailingly generous with their wisdom and insight. **Here’s what happens next:** - You’ll get a calendar invite with the recording link. - You’ll get a prep email about 2 days in advance outlining the agenda of the call. - At the time of recording we’ll chat for a couple of minutes, then dive right into podcasting strategy. **A few things to keep in mind:** - Please make sure to be in a quiet place, and have your mic (standing or headset) ready to go. - If you do not have headphones, or don’t use them during recordings, then please make sure to select “I am not using headphones” when you join the recording room. - It is important to be on a desktop or laptop computer during the recorings – phones have a bad track record when it comes to getting the content uploaded! Looking for extra credit? Listen to a couple of episodes so you know what’s coming! --- ### [Services](https://onestonecreative.net/services/) **Published:** January 10, 2022 **Author:** Megan **Content:** # Business Podcast Production Services ### Build a strategic asset that transforms your expertise and ideas into authority, visibility and revenue – and all you’ll have to do is *talk.* ## A Business Asset Tailored to Your Goals. Strategically designed and expertly produced, your podcast can achieve much more than you expect. - **Niche Leadership:** Cement your authority and lead your space with brand-elevating multi-media. - **Audience Expansion:** Reach, engage and nurture exactly the right listeners for your brand. - **Relationship Building:** Strengthen key partnerships and deepen client loyalty. - **Revenue Generation:** Drive opt-ins, consultations, and sales through smart content pathways. Every show we produce at One Stone Creative is built using the Business Podcast Blueprints(tm)—our proprietary strategic framework that aligns your podcast with the specific business outcomes you care about most. ## Here’s How it Works # Step 1 ## What Does Your Podcast Need to Do? Before we begin, enjoy a complimentary strategy session to ensure a podcast is what your business needs right now. # Step 2 ## Outcome-Based Design Choose or build a package that focuses on your most important business goals so you don’t waste time on what you don’t need. # Step 3 ## You Record, We Do The Rest Spend your time crafting your content, nurturing relationships and running your business – we’ll manage everything else. ## Business Podcast Production Services Pricing ## Solo Pod Build Thought Leadership From300/Episode - Episode Production (20 minutes) - Description + Bullet Show Notes - Episode Title Card - MP4 Version of Episode - 1x Captioned Reel - Scheduling on Podcast Host - Stats and Metrics Tracking - As-Needed strategy calls - Human-Edited Transcript - Make it Video +$50/episode ## Interviews Build Relationships From420/Episode - Episode Production - Description + Bullet Show Notes - 2x Social Media Copy - 2x Captioned Reels - 2x Promo Graphics - Guest Notification Email - Episode Title Card - MP4 Version of Episode - Scheduling on Podcast Host and Youtube - Stats and Metrics Tracking - As-Needed strategy Calls - Unedited Transcript - Make it Video +$80/episode ## Custom Build Whatever You Need From100/Epsiode - Select exactly what you need in terms of production, promotional materials and administrative support, like: - Shorter or Longer Audio or Video Production - Everything BUT the Production - Promo Graphics and Title Cards - Social Media Copy - Email Copy for Your Newsletter - Reels and Audiograms - Scheduling on Social Media, Your Website, YouTube or Email - Guest Kits and Notification # I want to Talk About it! If you’d like to have a chat about your business and whether or not a podcast is a good next step for you, click the button below to book a free, no-obligation consultation with Megan Dougherty. [Book Your Free Strategy Session](https://zcal.co/onestonecreative/strategysession) Not sure if you want to podcast forever? Check out our [Business Podcast Sprints](https://onestonecreative.net/sprint/) – Limited Release Seasons that will be the easiest podcasting you ever do. Want maximum reach for minimum effort? A [Micro-Pod](https://onestonecreative.net/micro-pods/) gets you releasing multipe episodes weekly for less time than a single traditional interview! # What People Have to Say about Working with One Stone Creative: ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/Lindsay-Rec.png "Lindsay Rec") ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/Amy-Rec.png "Amy Rec") ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/Mike-Rec.png "Mike Rec") ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/Mary-Ann-Rec.png "Mary Ann Rec") One Stone Creative produced the Unlearn Podcast from the spring of 2019, to 2024. The team provided excellent strategy development, coaching and preparation during the planning and launch of the show, and consistently deliver crisp editing and detailed show notes. On an ongoing basis, they’ve offered interview coaching, brainstorming around strategies and ideas to improve the show. With their help my audience and podcasting skills continuously grow. – Barry O’Reilly, The Unlearn Podcast “The team of One Stone creativewas a pure joy to work with on my podcast network. They bring both professionalism and passion to being two of the top podcast producers and podcasting consultants around. If you are thinking about starting a podcast or have been podcasting for years as I have, they bring not only efficiency to your podcast production but real value for your entire operation. Two Thumbs up and Five Stars to the entire team of One Stone Creative.” – Tox Fox, The Compliance Podcast Network I’ll be honest. I started the Spin Sucks podcast with some trepidation. We talked about it for years, but I couldn’t just seem to get my butt in gear to get it done. I kept hearing things such as less than one percent of podcasts are hosted by women (according to Libsyn) and also watched the trajectory of podcasting and yet… But then the amazingly brilliant and easy-to-work with women from One Stone Creative told me there is more than enough content on the blog to create a podcast. They said, in fact, I wouldn’t have to do any work, other than record something weekly. They made it so easy, it was impossible to say no. Thanks to them, we’re here 5 years later. – Gini Dierich, The Spin Sucks Podcast --- ### [Partners](https://onestonecreative.net/partners/) **Published:** March 12, 2025 **Author:** Megan **Content:** # Partner with One Stone Creative # Help Someone Podcast Profitably And we’d love to thank you with a referral thank you payment of $500. We are a referral-grown company – most of the new clients we welcome are introduced to us be current clients and our friends and colleagues. This means two things: 1\) We treat our clients as well, because we’re not just reflecting our own values, but the good word of the people who introduced us to them, and 2\) We want to make it as easy and pleasant as possible for our referral partners to connect us with business owners who are curious about podcasting, or seeking new podcast solutions. The best way to make a referral is to send an introduction email to megan (at) onestonecreative (dot) net or make a connection through LinkedIn! (This is [Megan’s Profile](https://www.linkedin.com/in/doughertymegan/)) And if we’re not connected there yet, please shoot me a connection request and we’ll fix that! Here is some text you could copy and paste if you discover someone you know could use a little production help (and we have outlined some of the ways we can help below!): *I know you’re thinking about podcasting right now, and I wanted to recommend Megan Dougherty and the team at One Stone Creative – I was/am \[a colleague of theirs / a podcast guest / a client\] of thiers and was impressed by \[the strategy we discussed/ the experience I had working with them / the content and information they share\]. I can make an introduction directly to Megan if you’re interested in learning more – let me know!* If you introduce us to someone and they sign on for a podcast sprint, season or ongoing production, we’ll be delighted to give you a thank you gift of $500, either in cash, or in services, if that is your preference, as soon as we begin production. You’re also more than welcome to share our website so they can review our services and prices (a call can be booked directly with Megan through the contact page) – just make sure to let your contact know to share your name with us, so we know who to thank! # Our Ideal Clients We love working with small business owners who have teams from 1-10, and have been in business for at least 2 years. We work with many speakers and authors, legal and financial services providers, consultants and agencies in HR, PR and marketing and generally anyone who has a strong background of expertise and professional practice who is looking for new ways to leverage their insights in their marketing. # How One Stone Creative Can Help ## Ongoing Production We can design, launch and produce ongoing audio and/or video podcasts on a weekly or bi-weekly release schedule. We always design shows for maximum benefit to the business, and handle everything from the audio-visual brand to ongoing production, show notes and promotional materials. We can also take on existing shows, and fit neatly into an existing workflow. ## Podcast Sprints and Seasons If a shorter session of podcasting is a better strategic fit (which it is for many businesses and newer podcasters) we can create limited release seasons of 6-12 episodes. If someone is looking for a trule DFY option, in our Podcast Sprints service, we will design and outline (with scripts!) an entire 12-episode podcast season, and record it with them in a virtual studio. ## Podcast Action Plans If someone just needs to know how to optimize a podcast for thier specific business, then we can provide an action plan with a detailed rundown of what type of podcast would be most apprpriate, how to execute it in-house or with another team, and even identify the specific metrics that will indicate success. For existing podcasters, we include a review of the current show, and provide a list of optimizations that can be made. # What People Have to Say about Working with One Stone Creative: ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/Lindsay-Rec.png "Lindsay Rec") [dipl_tilt_image _builder_version=”4.17.6″ _module_preset=”default” title_text=”Amy Rec” image=”https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/Amy-Rec.png” hover_enabled=”0″ sticky_enabled=”0″][/dipl_tilt_image] [dipl_tilt_image _builder_version=”4.17.6″ _module_preset=”default” title_text=”Mary Ann Rec” image=”https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/Mary-Ann-Rec.png” hover_enabled=”0″ sticky_enabled=”0″][/dipl_tilt_image] ![](https://onestonecreative.net/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/Mike-Rec.png "Mike Rec") One Stone Creative produced the Unlearn Podcast from the spring of 2019, to 2024. The team provided excellent strategy development, coaching and preparation during the planning and launch of the show, and consistently deliver crisp editing and detailed show notes. On an ongoing basis, they’ve offered interview coaching, brainstorming around strategies and ideas to improve the show. With their help my audience and podcasting skills continuously grow. – Barry O’Reilly, The Unlearn Podcast “The team of One Stone creativewas a pure joy to work with on my podcast network. They bring both professionalism and passion to being two of the top podcast producers and podcasting consultants around. If you are thinking about starting a podcast or have been podcasting for years as I have, they bring not only efficiency to your podcast production but real value for your entire operation. Two Thumbs up and Five Stars to the entire team of One Stone Creative.” – Tox Fox, The Compliance Podcast Network I’ll be honest. I started the Spin Sucks podcast with some trepidation. We talked about it for years, but I couldn’t just seem to get my butt in gear to get it done. I kept hearing things such as less than one percent of podcasts are hosted by women (according to Libsyn) and also watched the trajectory of podcasting and yet… But then the amazingly brilliant and easy-to-work with women from One Stone Creative told me there is more than enough content on the blog to create a podcast. They said, in fact, I wouldn’t have to do any work, other than record something weekly. They made it so easy, it was impossible to say no. Thanks to them, we’re here 5 years later. – Gini Dierich, The Spin Sucks Podcast --- ### [Podcast Kickoff Call](https://onestonecreative.net/podcast-kickoff-call/) **Published:** May 17, 2024 **Author:** Megan **Content:** # Welcome to One Stone Creative! ### This is going to be awesome. ### Thank you for signing up to produce your podcast with One Stone Creative! ### We have received your order and all of the details about what you need in your podcast! We’re going to review everything, and send you a services agreement within the next 24 hours (M-F). You will also receive an invitation to a shared googledrive, where you can start uploading any content you think we should have, like your headshots, company information, logos, brand guides, colours and fonts. In the meantime, please use the calendar below to book your show Kickoff call! ### We can’t wait to work with you! --- ### [Consulting](https://onestonecreative.net/consulting/) **Published:** March 8, 2019 **Author:** Megan **Content:** # Podcast and Network Consulting ## Guidance and Support… If you’re planning an in-house podcast, or looking to develop a podcast network, then One Stone Creative is available to consult with you n every detail, to make sure you acheive the results you’re looking for. From idea development to creating the master plan executing elements you need an assist with, we are here to make sure that the content you’re creating and the platforms you’re placing it on are working for you. ## All One Stone Creative consulting packages address three key elements: k #### Content Planning We’ll develop a structure for your media – what should be included, in what order and why. Then we’ll work directly with your in-house team, doing (digital) live training and providing feedback on media assets.  #### Effective Launches Will work with you on the audio-brand so it conveys your message and fits with your other marketing and branding materials, develop a step-by-step launch plan for you, and provide all of the nececarry communications templates.  #### Promotional Strategy We’ll develop a plan for promoting each media asset with a promotional calendar that takes into account other company activities. We’ll also create a plan for how to strategically re-purpose and reuse new media assets in different places in your business. ## Ready to Expand Your Content Empire? Send a message using the form below, and Megan Dougherty will be in touch to schedule a call. Name Email Address Company Name Message Send --- ### [Privacy Policy](https://onestonecreative.net/privacy-policy/) **Published:** October 21, 2018 **Author:** Megan **Content:** One Stone Creative operates the One Stone Creative website, which provides multi-media content production services, and provides information around multi-media content creation. This page is used to inform website visitors regarding our policies with the collection, use, and disclosure of Personal Information if anyone decided to use our Service, the One Stone Creative Website. If you choose to use our Service, then you agree to the collection and use of information in relation with this policy. The Personal Information that we collect are used for providing and improving the Service. We will not use or share your information with anyone except as described in this Privacy Policy. ## Information Collection and Use For a better experience, while using our Service, we may require you to provide us with certain personally identifiable information, including but not limited to your name, phone number, and postal address. The information that we collect will be used to contact or identify you. ## Log Data We want to inform you that whenever you visit our Service, we collect information that your browser sends to us that is called Log Data. This Log Data may include information such as your computer’s Internet Protocol (“IP”) address, browser version, pages of our Service that you visit, the time and date of your visit, the time spent on those pages, and other statistics. ## Cookies Cookies are files with small amount of data that is commonly used an anonymous unique identifier. These are sent to your browser from the website that you visit and are stored on your computer’s hard drive. Our website uses these “cookies” to collection information and to improve our Service. You have the option to either accept or refuse these cookies, and know when a cookie is being sent to your computer. If you choose to refuse our cookies, you may not be able to use some portions of our Service. ## Service Providers We may employ third-party companies and individuals due to the following reasons: - To facilitate our Service; - To provide the Service on our behalf; - To perform Service-related services; or - To assist us in analyzing how our Service is used. We want to inform our Service users that these third parties have access to your Personal Information. The reason is to perform the tasks assigned to them on our behalf. However, they are obligated not to disclose or use the information for any other purpose. ## Security We value your trust in providing us your Personal Information, thus we are striving to use commercially acceptable means of protecting it. But remember that no method of transmission over the internet, or method of electronic storage is 100% secure and reliable, and we cannot guarantee its absolute security. ## Links to Other Sites Our Service may contain links to other sites. If you click on a third-party link, you will be directed to that site. Note that these external sites are not operated by us. Therefore, we strongly advise you to review the Privacy Policy of these websites. We have no control over, and assume no responsibility for the content, privacy policies, or practices of any third-party sites or services. ## Children’s Privacy Our Services do not address anyone under the age of 13. We do not knowingly collect personal identifiable information from children under 13. In the case we discover that a child under 13 has provided us with personal information, we immediately delete this from our servers. If you are a parent or guardian and you are aware that your child has provided us with personal information, please contact us so that we will be able to do necessary actions. ## Changes to This Privacy Policy We may update our Privacy Policy from time to time. Thus, we advise you to review this page periodically for any changes. We will notify you of any changes by posting the new Privacy Policy on this page. These changes are effective immediately after they are posted on this page. ## Contact Us If you have any questions or suggestions about our Privacy Policy, do not hesitate to contact us [using our contact page. ](http://onestonecreative.net/contact) --- ## DP Testimonials ### [It was impossible to say no.](https://onestonecreative.net/dipl-testimonial/it-was-impossible-to-say-no/) **Published:** April 8, 2025 **Author:** Megan **Content:** I’ll be honest. I started the Spin Sucks podcast with some trepidation. We talked about it for years, but I couldn’t just seem to get my butt in gear to get it done. I kept hearing things such as less than one percent of podcasts are hosted by women (according to Libsyn) and also watched the trajectory of podcasting and yet… But then the amazingly brilliant and easy-to-work with women from One Stone Creative told me there is more than enough content on the blog to create a podcast. They said, in fact, I wouldn’t have to do any work, other than record something weekly. They made it so easy, it was impossible to say no. Thanks to them, we’re here 6 years later. --- ### [There is no one better in the business.](https://onestonecreative.net/dipl-testimonial/podcasting-efficiently/) **Published:** July 27, 2022 **Author:** Megan **Content:** I have been podcasting for several years. Four years ago I switched to One Sone Creative. Megan, Darla Fields, and the One Stone Team have been incredible!! Megan provided invaluable guidance on podcasting best practices, leveraging my content and recommending improvements. Her advice was spot on. Darla and her team organize and produce each Episode, related content and provide editing services. There is no one better in the business. This is no ordinary recommendation. If you have a podcast, there is no one better in the business and their rates are more than reasonable. You will be happy once you switch or start a new podcast under One Stone’s guidance. Thank you again to Megan, Darla and the rest of the One Stone Team!!! --- ### [Our podcast has brought so much new business.](https://onestonecreative.net/dipl-testimonial/our-podcsat-has-brought-so-much-new-business/) **Published:** April 8, 2025 **Author:** Megan **Content:** Megan and One Stone Creative do an amazing job with our podcast production! Our podcast continues to increase in rankings and has brought so much new business. Megan is quality-oriented and the utmost professional in all that she does. I’m so grateful for all the hard work she puts into the Career Can Do podcast! --- ### [Seamless and Frictionless](https://onestonecreative.net/dipl-testimonial/seamless-and-frictionless/) **Published:** April 8, 2025 **Author:** Megan **Content:** One Stone Creative is a complete pleasure to work with. They make the process of podcasting completely seamless and frictionless for me. After I record audio, I share it with the One Stone Creative team and they do the rest. If I’d known that the podcasting process could be this easy and fun, I’d have started podcasting years ago. I recommend One Stone Creative with no reservations – they are absolutely the best. --- ### [Figuring Out a Methodology](https://onestonecreative.net/dipl-testimonial/figuring-out-a-methodology/) **Published:** July 27, 2022 **Author:** Megan **Content:** “It was a beautiful collaboration. We hired One Stone to work with us on a consultaing basis and we wanted to go over podcast strategy, format and production. I personally knew nothing about any of those three buckets, although other members of our team had much more of a background in that… and what I ound to be so profoundly helpful was that Megan and Audra can talk to both levels, someone like me who is a complete newbie, or someone like our editing producer who has wonderful technical skills and backgornd. When it comes to strategy, one of the things I really loved was the way in which Megan and Audra talked though the different formats that were available to us and the pros and cons of each one, and when it came to the production piece, figuring out a methodology that worked within our budget and timeframe. I am completely blown away by what we achieved.” (See [full video testimonial here](https://vimeo.com/336825636)!) --- ### [Excellent strategy development, coaching and preparation.](https://onestonecreative.net/dipl-testimonial/excellent-strategy-development-coaching-and-preparation/) **Published:** July 27, 2022 **Author:** Megan **Content:** One Stone Creative has been producing the Unlearn Podcast since the spring of 2019. The team provided excellent strategy development, coaching and preparation during the planning and launch of the show, and consistently deliver crisp editing and detailed show notes. On an ongoing basis, they’ve offered interview coaching, brainstorming around strategies and ideas to improve the show. With their help my audience and podcasting skills continuously grow. --- ### [Brilliant and Easy-to-Work-With](https://onestonecreative.net/dipl-testimonial/gdietrich/) **Published:** July 27, 2022 **Author:** Megan **Content:** I’ll be honest. I started the Spin Sucks podcast with some trepidation. We talked about it for years, but I couldn’t just seem to get my butt in gear to get it done. I kept hearing things such as less than one percent of podcasts are hosted by women (according to Libsyn) and also watched the trajectory of podcasting and yet… But then the amazingly brilliant and easy-to-work with women from One Stone Creative told me there is more than enough content on the blog to create a podcast. They said, in fact, I wouldn’t have to do any work, other than record something weekly. They made it so easy, it was impossible to say no. Thanks to them, we’re here two years later. --- ### [Professionalism and Passion](https://onestonecreative.net/dipl-testimonial/tfox/) **Published:** July 27, 2022 **Author:** Megan **Content:** “The team of One Stone creative has been a pure joy to work with on my podcast network. They bring both professionalism and passion to being two of the top podcast producers and podcasting consultants around. If you are thinking about starting a podcast or have been podcasting for years as I have, they bring not only efficiency to your podcast production but real value for your entire operation. Two Thumbs up and Five Stars to the entire team of One Stone Creative.” ---